A2S2T6 - ETE Project Design - Construction Specifications

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.
ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND PRACTICES
EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS,

AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
GC3101, Revision 3, June 2007

Revision 3
GC3101
June 2007
Page 1 of 10
Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
2.0
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS ............................................................................ 3
3.0
LIMITING ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS ........................................................... 3
4.0
COATING SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 3

4.1
Approved Manufacturers............................................................................ 3
4.2
Topcoat Colours ........................................................................................ 4

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
5.0
6.0
Trans Mountain.......................................................................................... 4
Express...................................................................................................... 5
Platte ......................................................................................................... 6
SURFACE PREPERATION .................................................................................. 6

5.1
Surface Irregularities .................................................................................. 6
5.2
Pre-Blast Cleaning ..................................................................................... 6
5.3
Blast Cleaning ............................................................................................ 6
5.4
Blasting Equipment Grounding .................................................................. 6
5.5
Blast Cleaning Abrasive ............................................................................. 7
5.6
Masking ..................................................................................................... 7
5.7
Surface Contamination .............................................................................. 7
5.8
Incomplete Blasting Prior to Priming .......................................................... 7
5.9
Coating Contamination .............................................................................. 7
5.10
Re-Blasting ................................................................................................ 8
5.11
Dead Man Control ...................................................................................... 8
5.12
Alternate Cleaning Methods....................................................................... 8
APPLICATION ...................................................................................................... 8
6.1
Manufacturers Requirements..................................................................... 8
6.2
Coating Film Continuity .............................................................................. 8
6.3
Wet Film Thickness.................................................................................... 8
6.4
Overspray .................................................................................................. 8
6.5
Handling or Shipping ................................................................................. 8
6.6
Measures for Corroded Surfaces ............................................................... 9
6.7
Clean-Up and Disposal .............................................................................. 9

GC3101
Revision 3
June 2007
Page 2 of 10

7.0
8.0
INSPECTION........................................................................................................ 9
7.1
7.2
Daily Reporting .......................................................................................... 9

Inspection Equipment ................................................................................ 9
7.3
Inspection Hold Points ............................................................................... 9
SAFETY DATA SHEETS .................................................................................... 10

Revision 3
GC3101
June 2007
Page 3 of 10
1.0 GENERAL
This standard prescribes the surface preparation and application of coating
materials to aboveground piping, fittings, valves, equipment, and structural steel.
It is applicable to coatings applied in both shop and field environments.
Aluminum, stainless steel, and galvanized fittings are to be left unpainted unless
specified by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
2.0
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
The following codes and standards (latest issue) shall form part of this
specification:
SSPC-PA-1
Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting
SSPC-SP-1
Solvent Cleaning
SSPC-SP-6
Commercial Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP-7
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP-10
Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP-11
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
The Manufacturers recommendations for the use of their coatings shall be

considered a part of this specification. The Contractor shall not intermix
manufactured products.
3.0
LIMITING ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS

Surfaces shall not be prepared or coated when:
4.0
The relative humidity is greater than 80%;

The surface temperature is less than 3C (5F) above the dew point;
The surface temperature is lower than 10C (50F);
One or more of the above conditions may be reasonably expected to
occur within 8 hours unless otherwise approved by Kinder Morgan
Canada.
COATING SYSTEM
4.1
Approved Manufacturers
The specified coating systems are listed in Table 4.1.A. Deviations are
not allowed without prior approval in writing from the Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc. Designated Representative. The Contractor shall specify, at
the tender stage, all precleaning, blasting, and coating material to be
used. Film thickness for each material listed shall be in accordance with
the manufacturers specifications. The total paint system (both primer and

Revision 3
GC3101
June 2007
Page 4 of 10

top coat) shall be 6 to 10 mdft. Unless otherwise specified, the top coat
finish shall be high gloss.
TABLE 4.1.A - COATING SYSTEMS
Paint
Manufacturer
Coat
Material
Primer Options
Bar Rust 231, 235, or 236

Devran 201
TopcoatOptions
Devthane 359, 379, or 389
Primer Options
Intergard 345 or 251
Topcoat Options
Interthane 990 or 870
Primer
8315 Series
Topcoat
834 Series
Primer
EP 421 HIBLD
Topcoat
EX2C
Primer
Sigmacover CM Miocoat II 7427US
Topcoat
Sigmadur Verafinish 5522
Primer
Carboguard 893
Topcoat
Carbothane 134HG
Primer
B67 Series
Topcoat
B65-300 Series
Primer
Valchem 13F62/13R62
Topcoat
Vthane Series 54
ICI/Devoe
International
Cloverdale
Endura
Sigma
Carboline
Sherwinn Williams
Valspar
4.2
Topcoat Colours
4.2.1 Trans Mountain
The topcoat colours designated by RAL numbers for Trans
Mountain Pipeline including the Puget Sound and the Jet Fuel
systems shall be as specified in Table 4.2.A.

GC3101
Revision 3
June 2007
Page 5 of 10
TABLE 4.2.A TRANS MOUNTAIN TOPCOAT COLOURS

Standard Colour Scheme
Surfaces
Colour
RAL Number
White
RAL9003
Dark Green
RAL6005
Dark Green
RAL6005
Orange
RAL2008
Motors and Pumps
Light Green
RAL6018
Coupling Guards
Orange
RAL2008
Handrails and Kickplates
Yellow
RAL1021
Structural Steel
Black
RAL9005
Piping and Shoes

(1)
Valve Body
Valve Actuator and Gear Boxes
(1)
(1)
Valve Handwheel
(1) For new facilities valves, actuators, and handwheels shall be white (RAL
9003).
4.2.2 Express
The topcoat color for all piping, components, and structural steel
covered by this standard for Express U.S. shall be tan designated
by U.S. Federal Standard (FS) 595B 20318. The topcoat colours
for Express Canada designated by RAL numbers shall be as
specified in Table 4.2.B.
TABLE 4.2.B EXPRESS CANADA TOPCOAT COLOURS
Surfaces
Standard Colour Scheme

Colour
RAL Number
White
RAL9003
White
RAL9003
White
RAL9003
Valve Handwheel
Black
RAL9005
Motors and Pumps
White
RAL9003
Motor and Pump Base
Black
RAL9005
Yellow
RAL1021
Structural Steel
Black
RAL9005
Piping and Shoes

Valve Body

GC3101
Revision 3
June 2007
Page 6 of 10
4.2.3 Platte
The topcoat colors designated by U.S. Federal Standard numbers
for Platte Pipeline shall be as specified in Table 4.2.C.
TABLE 4.2.C PLATTE TOPCOAT COLORS
Surfaces
Color
FS Number
Gray
595B 16440
Outside Diameter of Flanges
Blue
595B 25184
Valve Body
Gray
595B 16440
Gray
595B 16440
Valve Handwheel
Blue
595B 25184
Motors and Pumps
Gray
595B 16440
Motor and Pump Base
Gray
595B 16440
Yellow
595B 33655
Structural Steel
Gray
595B 16440
Piping and Shoes
5.0
Standard Color Scheme
SURFACE PREPARATION
5.1
Surface Irregularities
Before commencing blast cleaning all weld spatter, flux, slag, laminations,
burred edges, and sharp projections shall be ground off. Rough hand
welds shall be ground to minimum 3 mm () radius or to the acceptance
of Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
5.2
Pre-Blast Cleaning
All oil, grease, and other deleterious matter shall be removed by chemical
cleaning per SSPC-SP-1 prior to any preparation and/or coating
application. Bio-degradable water based degreasers shall be used for
pre-blast cleaning at all Kinder Morgan Canada facilities.
5.3
Blast Cleaning
All structural steel and hand rails to be coated shall receive a Commercial
Blast Cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-6. All other surfaces to be
coated shall receive a Near White Metal Blast Cleaning in accordance with
SSPC-SP-10.
5.4
Blasting Equipment Grounding

For surface preparation activities at Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. facilities,
all blasting equipment, including the nozzle, shall be electrically grounded
to the work prior to the commencement of blasting. As a minimum,

GC3101
Revision 3
June 2007
Page 7 of 10

12 AWG insulated flexible conductor wire shall be employed for
grounding. Grounding connections shall be inspected whenever the
blasting equipment is repositioned.
5.5
Blast Cleaning Abrasive

Abrasive used for blast cleaning shall be new, unused, dry, neutral PH,
low chloride (<5 ppm) hard material of angular configuration, and free of
dust, clay, or other foreign particles. The selected abrasive shall not
impart embedment or other contaminants in the blasted surface. Particle
size shall range from approximately 20 to 40 mesh with a maximum of 5%
retained on No. 20 U.S. Standard Sieve. Use of abrasive media shall be
in accordance with local Occupational Health and Safety regulations.
5.6
Masking
Care shall be exercised in blast cleaning to avoid damage to equipment
(ie. flange faces, nameplates, gauges, instruments, electrical controls, and
coated conduit) not intended for coating application. All masking shall be
removed at the completion of blasting and coating activities.
5.7
Surface Contamination
Care shall be taken to ensure freshly blasted surfaces are not
contaminated. At the discretion of Kinder Morgan Canada, Surface
Contamination Analysis Tests (SCAT) for the presence of soluble
chlorides may be required after abrasive blasting. Where the measured
chloride level is greater than 10 ppm, cleaning measures such as washing
and rinsing to reduce chloride contamination to acceptable levels shall be
performed.
5.8
Incomplete Blasting Prior to Priming

A 300 mm (12) wide strip of uncoated, blasted surface shall be left
between coated and unblasted surfaces. When additional blasting is
done, the 300 mm (12) strip of previously blasted surface shall receive a
light brush blast in order to remove any rust. Such cleaning shall be
accomplished by holding the nozzle in a direction away from the coated
surface.
5.9
Coating Contamination
Special care shall be taken to ensure that blasting abrasive or foreign
matter is not allowed to contaminate freshly applied coating. All foreign
matter shall be completely removed from an existing coat before
application of a new coat. Any coating so contaminated shall be removed
and replaced.

Revision 3
GC3101
June 2007
Page 8 of 10
6.0
5.10
Re-Blasting
Where rusting or blooming occurs, the metal surfaces shall be re-blasted
to remove all rust and blooming. Surfaces shall be blown free of blasting
abrasives before the surface is primed.
5.11
Dead Man Control

Abrasive blast nozzles must be equipped with a fully operational Dead
Man Control.
5.12
Alternate Cleaning Methods

Where blast cleaning is not practical, cleaning by power or hand-tool
methods may be used upon approval by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. All
power tool cleaning shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-SP-11.
APPLICATION
6.1
Manufacturers Requirements
The manufacturers written requirements for coating, mixing, handling,
application, curing, and overcoating shall be mandatory.
6.2
Coating Film Continuity

Coatings shall be uniformly applied with adequate overlap, minimum 75
mm (3), and be free of runs, sags, holidays, pinholes, voids, mudcracking, and other anomalies.
6.3
Wet Film Thickness

During the coating application, personnel shall regularly utilize wet film
thickness gauges to ensure the application shall result in the dry film
thickness measurements stipulated in Table 4.1.A.
6.4
Overspray
For surface applications at Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. facilites, any
surface inadvertently contaminated with overspray or otherwise displaced
coating shall be cleaned or recoated at no extra cost to Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc.
6.5
Handling or Shipping
The coating Manufacturers hard dry cure requirements must be met
before any handling or shipping can be performed.

Revision 3
GC3101
June 2007
Page 9 of 10
7.0
6.6
Measures for Corroded Surfaces

For coating over corrosion pitted substrates, special application measures
such as back rolling the coating material to ensure adequate coverage
shall be undertaken.
6.7
Clean-Up and Disposal

The contractor shall store, transport, and dispose of all waste materials in
accordance with all applicable federal, provincial/state, and local
regulations.
INSPECTION
7.1
Daily Reporting
For the duration of the work, daily coating/inspection reports included with
this specification shall be completed. Alternatively, a similar form preapproved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. may be used. Ambient
conditions shall be recorded a minimum of four times per day or as
requested by Kinder Morgan Canada.
7.2
Inspection Equipment
The contractor shall have the following inspection equipment calibrated
and available for use:
7.3
Surface temperature measuring instruments;

Micrometer c/w replica tape;
NACE VIS 1-89 reference photos;
SCAT kit;
Psychrometer and dewpoint chart;
Wet film thickness gauge;
Dry film thickness gauge.
Inspection Hold Points

The work shall be subject to inspection and acceptance by Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc. before proceeding at the following hold points; these hold
points shall be identified on the contractors inspection test plan:
Pre-job meeting;
After blast cleaning and prior to priming;
After priming and prior to application of topcoat;
Final inspection including submission and acceptance of all quality
control documentation.

GC3101
Revision 3
June 2007
Page 10 of 10
8.0
SAFETY DATA SHEETS

All materials to be used shall be clearly labelled with batch numbers and other
pertinent data. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are to be provided for all
materials to be used at Kinder Morgan Canada facilities.
COATING INSPECTION DAILY REPORT

SITE AND JOB DESCRIPTION:
Inspector
Date
SURFACE PREPARATION
Pre Inspection Comments

Defects Corrected
Pre Cleaning Method
Equipment Used
Chloride Levels (Post Blast SCAT):
Comments:
BLASTING ABRASIVE
Type/Grade of Abrasive
Spec. Standard
Abrasive Check for:

Cleanliness
Abrasive Check for: pH

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Time
Condition
Air Temperature
Wet Bulb Temp.
Relative Humidity
Steel Temperature
Dew Point
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
C/F
C/F
%
C/F
C/F
kph/
mph
ANCHOR PROFILE MEASUREMENTS
Min.
Max.
Mean
Hrs. Left Uncoated
Comments:
COATINGS
Coat
Paint
Manufacturer
Name &
Description
Description
Batch
Application
Number
Method
Color
MDFT
Before
This
Coat
W.F.T.
Min
Max
1.
2.
Coat
M.D.F.T.
Min
Max
Mixing
Thinning
1.
2.
Provide Comments on Coating Appearance/Acceptance:
Storage
Holidays
Defects/Comments:

EXTERNAL COATING OF BURIED PIPING

GC3102, Revision 0, May 1995
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 1 of 11
Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF BURIED PIPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 3
3.1
Contractor .................................................................................................. 3
3.2
Holiday ....................................................................................................... 3
3.3
Manufacturer .............................................................................................. 3
3.4
mdft ............................................................................................................ 3
3.5
SSPC ......................................................................................................... 3
GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 4
4.1
Supervision ................................................................................................ 4
4.2
Materials .................................................................................................... 4
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
Clean-Up and Disposal .............................................................................. 4

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
5.0
6.0
7.0
General ...................................................................................................... 4
Storage ...................................................................................................... 4
General ...................................................................................................... 4
Abrasive Blast Materials ............................................................................ 4
Coating Containers and Waste Materials .................................................. 5
Final Clean-Up........................................................................................... 5
4.4
Labour........................................................................................................ 5
4.5
Limiting Atmospheric Conditions ................................................................ 5
COATING SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 6
5.1
SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................................. 6
6.1
Surface Irregularities .................................................................................. 6
6.2
Pre-Blast Cleaning ..................................................................................... 6
6.3
Blast Cleaning ............................................................................................ 6
6.4
Blasting Equipment Grounding .................................................................. 6
6.5
Blast Cleaning Abrasive ............................................................................. 7
6.6
Masking ..................................................................................................... 7
6.7
Surface Contamination .............................................................................. 7
6.8
Incomplete Blasting Prior to Priming .......................................................... 7
6.9
6.10 Re-Blasting ................................................................................................ 7
6.11 Dead Man Control ...................................................................................... 7
6.12 Alternate Cleaning Methods....................................................................... 7
APPLICATION ...................................................................................................... 8

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 2 of 11
8.0
9.0
7.1
Rust Blooming ........................................................................................... 8
7.2
Spray Equipment ....................................................................................... 8
7.3
Film Continuity ........................................................................................... 8
7.4
Compressed Air Quality ............................................................................. 8
7.5
Air Pressure ............................................................................................... 8
7.6
Film Thickness ........................................................................................... 8
7.7
7.8
Overspray .................................................................................................. 9
INSPECTION........................................................................................................ 9
8.1
Contractor's On-Site Supervisor, Quality Control ....................................... 9
8.2
Contractor's Inspection Equipment ............................................................ 9
8.3
Inspection Hold Points ............................................................................... 9
SAFETY DATA SHEETS ...................................................................................... 9

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 3 of 11
1.0 SCOPE
This standard prescribes the surface preparation and application of coating
materials to external surfaces on buried piping and fittings. Aluminum, stainless
steel and galvanized fittings are to be left uncoated unless specified.
2.0 REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS

The following codes and standards (latest issue) shall form part of this standard:
SSPC-PA-1
SSPC-SP-1
Solvent Cleaning
SSPC-SP-7
Brush-off Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP-10
Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
The manufacturer's recommendations for the use of their coatings shall be

considered a part of this standard. The Contractor may intermix manufactured
products but must use a specified coating system approved by Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc. The Contractor shall use the materials specified in Section 5.0 of this
standard.
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
Contractor
Contractor shall mean the coating applicator.
3.2
Holiday
A discontinuity that exhibits electrical conductivity when exposed to a specific
voltage.
3.3
Manufacturer
Manufacturer shall mean the coating manufacturer or supplier.
3.4
mdft
Units of measure for coating applications - mils dry film thickness (0.001
inches).
3.5
SSPC
SSPC stands for the Steel Structures Painting Council.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 4 of 11
4.0 GENERAL
4.1
Supervision
The Contractor shall have a full-time supervisor on site at all times during the
course of the work. The on-site supervisor is expected to be completely
familiar with conditions and constraints existing in the work area and shall
insure that all of the Contractor's personnel are aware of potential hazards.
4.2
Materials
4.2.1
General
The Contractor shall supply all thinners, cleaning and coating
materials in sufficient quantities to complete the Work.
The
Contractor shall be responsible for receiving and unloading these
materials. The Contractor shall keep a strict account of all materials
used during the course of the Work.
4.2.2
Storage
The Contractor shall insure that all containers are suitablely stored to
prevent damage to or rusting of the containers, and to preserve all
identifying labels and markings. Paint, thinners, and abrasive
materials in damaged or leaking containers shall be rejected and
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
4.3
Clean-Up and Disposal

4.3.1
General
The Contractor shall store, transport, and dispose of all waste
materials in accordance with all applicable Federal and Provincial
regulations.
The Contractor shall disclose, in writing, the proposed methods of
waste storage, transport, and disposal to Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
not less than one week prior to the completion of the coating work.
The Contractor shall provide written confirmation that the methods
used were in accordance with the requirements listed above
(including copies of manifests and disposal facility receipts), to
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. not more than one week after the waste
transport and disposal.
4.3.2
Abrasive Blast Materials

The Contractor shall sweep-up, collect, and place all abrasive blast
materials used into appropriate disposal containers.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 5 of 11

4.3.3
Coating Containers and Waste Materials

The Contractor shall place all waste materials into appropriate
disposal containers at the end of each working day.
4.3.4
Final Clean-Up
Upon completion of the coating work, the Contractor shall ensure that
the work area is in it's original clean state and that all equipment and
materials have been removed from Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
property.
4.4
Labour
All surface preparation and application shall be carried out by tradesmen
skilled in the application of corrosion-resistant protective coatings.
4.5
Limiting Atmospheric Conditions

Surfaces shall not be coated when:
a)
the relative humidity is greater than 80%;
b)
the surface temperature is within 3C of the Dew Point or dropping;
c)
the ambient air temperature is lower than 10C;
d)
there is a possibility that the blasted surface will be subject to wetting

before the primer can be applied.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 6 of 11
5.0 COATING SYSTEM

5.1
The specified coating systems are listed in Table 5.1.A. Deviations are not
allowed without prior approval from Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. The
Contractor shall specify, at the tender stage, all precleaning, blasting, and
coating material to be used.
TABLE 5.1.A -- COATING SYSTEMS
Paint Manufacturer
Madewell
Material
Coating Thickness (mdft)

Minimum
Maximum
Quikset 1127
20
30
Standard 1103
25
35
6.0 SURFACE PREPARATION

6.1
Surface Irregularities
Before commencing blast cleaning all weld spatter, flux, slag, laminations,
burred edges, and sharp projections shall be ground off. Rough hand welds
shall be ground to minimum 3 mm radius.
6.2
Pre-Blast Cleaning
All oil, grease, and other deleterious matter shall be removed by chemical
cleaning with bio-degradable water based degreasers per SSPC-SP-1 prior
to any preparation and/or coating application.
6.3
Blast Cleaning
All surfaces to be coated shall receive a Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
in accordance with SSPC-SP-10.
6.4
Blasting Equipment Grounding

All blasting equipment, including the nozzle, shall be electrically grounded to
the work prior to the commencement of blasting. As a minimum, 12 AWG
insulated flexible conductor wire shall be employed for grounding. Grounding
connections shall be inspected whenever the blasting equipment is
repositioned.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 7 of 11

6.5
Blast Cleaning Abrasive

Abrasive used for blast cleaning shall be new, unused, dry, neutral PH, hard
material of angular configuration, and free of dust, clay, or other foreign
particles. Particle size shall range from approximately 20 to 40 mesh with a
maximum of 5% retained on No. 20 U.S. Standard Sieve.
6.6
Masking
Care shall be exercised in blast cleaning to avoid damage to name plates,
gauges, instruments, electrical controls, and coated conduit.
Unless
otherwise specified, these surfaces shall not be painted.
6.7
Surface Contamination
Freshly blasted surfaces shall not be contaminated by workers' hands or
feet.
6.8
Incomplete Blasting Prior to Priming

A 300 mm wide strip of unpainted blasted surface shall be left between
primed and unblasted surfaces. When additional blasting is done, the 300
mm strip of previously blasted surface shall receive a light brush blast in
order to remove any rust. Such cleaning shall be accomplished by holding
the nozzle in a direction away from the painted surface.
6.9
Special care shall be taken to ensure that blasting abrasive or dust is not
allowed to contaminate freshly applied coating. All dust and foreign matter
shall be completely removed from an existing coat before application of a
new coat. Any coating so contaminated shall be removed and replaced at
Contractor's expense.
6.10 Re-Blasting
No more surface shall be blasted than can be prime coated before visible or
detrimental re-rusting occurs. Blasted surfaces shall be prime painted by the
end of the same work day or before any rust bloom occurs.
6.11 Dead Man Control
Abrasive blast nozzles must be equipped with a fully operational "Dead Man
Control".
6.12 Alternate Cleaning Methods
Where blast cleaning is not practical, cleaning by power or hand tool
methods may be used upon specific approval by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 8 of 11
7.0 APPLICATION
7.1
Rust Blooming
Where rusting or blooming occurs the metal surfaces shall be re-blasted to
remove all rust and blooming. Surfaces must be blown free of blasting
abrasives before the surface is primed.
7.2
Spray Equipment
Spray equipment suitable for the intended purpose shall be used. It shall be
capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied and shall be equipped
with suitable pressure regulators and gauges in good working order. The air
caps, nozzles and needles shall be those recommended by the spray
equipment manufacturer for the paint being applied.
7.3
Film Continuity
All coatings shall be uniformly applied with adequate overlap of spray pattern
and be free of runs, sags, holidays, pinholes, voids, mud-cracking and other
anomalies.
7.4
Compressed Air Quality

Traps or separators shall be provided to remove oil and condensed water
from the air. They must be of adequate size and be drained periodically
during application. The air from the spray gun impinging against the surface
shall show no signs of condensed water or oil.
7.5
Air Pressure
The atomizing air pressure at the gun shall be high enough to properly
atomize the paint, but not so high as to cause excessive fogging, loss of
solvent or overspray.
7.6
Film Thickness
The contractor shall provide the tradesmen applying coating materials with
wet film thickness gauges to ensure the application will result in the correct
final dry film thickness.
7.7
If in the judgment of Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.s representative a coating's
performance has been jeopardized by contact with rain, moisture
condensation, dust, or other foreign elements it shall be removed and
replaced.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 9 of 11

7.8
Overspray
Any surfaces contaminated by the Contractor with overspray or otherwise
displaced coating shall be cleaned or repainted to Kinder Morgan Canada
Inc.'s satisfaction.
8.0 INSPECTION
8.1
Contractor's On-Site Supervisor, Quality Control

For the duration of the job the Contractor's on-site supervisor shall provide
daily reports on progress and status of the work. These reports shall be
made on the attached form.
8.2
Contractor's Inspection Equipment

The Contractor must have the following inspection equipment on site:
surface thermometer, hygrometer, dewpoint chart, wet mil gauge and dry film
thickness gauge.
8.3
Inspection Hold Points

The work shall be subject to inspection and approval by Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc.'s representative before proceeding at the following points:
a)
After blast cleaning and prior to priming;
b)
After priming and prior to application of Topcoat;
c)
Final Inspection. This shall include a visual examination for anomalies

and film thickness measurements.
9.0 SAFETY DATA SHEETS

All material brought on site shall be clearly labelled with batch numbers and other
pertinent data readily available. MSDS sheets, as required by WHMIS, are to be
provided for all materials to be used on Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.'s property.

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 10 of 11

COATING / INSPECTION DAILY REPORT
SITE DESCRIPTION
Inspector
Date
Customer
Job Name
Area
Notes:
SURFACE PREPERATION
Pre Inspection Comments
Defects Corrected
Pre Cleaning Method
Equipment Used
Comments:
BLASTING ABRASIVE
Type/Grade of Abrasive
Spec. Standard
Abrasive Check for: Cleanliness
Abrasive Check for: pH

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Time
Condition
Air Temp
Wet Bulb Temp
Relative Humidity
Steel Temp
Dew Point
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
km
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time

GC3102
Revision 0
May 15, 1995
Page 11 of 11
ANCHOR PROFILE MEASUREMENTS

Min.
Max.
Mean
Hrs. Left Uncoated
Comments:
COATINGS
Coat
Paint Manufacturer
Name & Description
Description
Batch
Number
Application
Method
Color
MDFT
Before
This Coat
W.F.T.
Min
Max
1.
2.
3.
Coat
1.
2.
3.
M.D.F.T.
Min
Max
Mixing
Thinning
Storage
Holidays
Defects/Comments:

EXTERNAL FUSION BOND EPOXY COATING

GC3105, Revision 0, January 2003

GC3105
Revision 0
January 6, 2003
Page 1 of 1
Title: EXTERNAL FUSION BOND EPOXY COATING
1.0 SCOPE
This standard specifies the requirements additional to those of CSA Z245.20
External Fusion Bond Epoxy Coating for Steel Pipe. The numbering of Clauses
listed below refers to those in CSA Z245.20 unless otherwise indicated. Where
there is a conflict between these requirements and those specified by CSA, the
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. requirement shall govern.
5.2.1 General
(d)
The applicator shall use epoxy powder that is listed in Table 1.

TABLE 1 APPROVED COATING SYSTEMS
Manufacturer
Material
3M
Scotchkote 6233
Dupont
Nap-gard 7-2501
Nap-gard 7-2500
6.2.4 Coating Thickness

Nominal coating thickness shall be 355 m (14 mils).
Maximum coating thickness shall be 560 m (22 mils).
6.2.5 End Finish
The cutback length for pipe ends shall be 75 mm 15 mm.
7.1
Inspection Notice
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. shall have unrestricted access to all plant and
test facilities, and may without providing the applicator notice, witness
coating application and testing.
7.3.3.4 Retests - Type A Test Failures

When a production (CSA Table 4) Cathodic Disbondment test (Clause
12.8) and/or Adhesion test (Clause 12.14) fails to conform to the specified
requirements, the repeated tests shall be 48 hours in duration.

STATION & TERMINAL PIPING DESIGN

MP1110, Revision 4, January 2011

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 2 of 44
Title: STATION & TERMINAL PIPING DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 7
2.0
REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS.......................................................................... 8
3.0
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 9
4.0
3.1
Isolation Valve ........................................................................................... 9
3.2
Main Line ................................................................................................... 9
3.3
NPS ........................................................................................................... 9
3.4
PN .............................................................................................................. 9
3.5
3.6
Sectionalizing Valve ................................................................................... 9

Station Piping ............................................................................................. 9
3.7
SMYS......................................................................................................... 9
PIPING DESIGN................................................................................................. 10
4.1
General .................................................................................................... 10
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.2
Design Conditions .................................................................................... 10

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
Design Wall Thickness ............................................................................ 11

Pressure Relief ........................................................................................ 11
Pressure Class ........................................................................................ 12
Pump Shut-off.......................................................................................... 12
Positive Displacement Pumps ................................................................. 12
Hydraulic Design ...................................................................................... 12

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
Design Pressure ...................................................................................... 10

Design Temperature ................................................................................ 11
Design Fluids ........................................................................................... 11
Pressure Design ...................................................................................... 11

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.4
Minimum Pipe Size .................................................................................. 10

Maximum Pipe Size ................................................................................. 10
Prohibited Pipe Sizes .............................................................................. 10
Materials .................................................................................................. 10
Station Pipe Sizing .................................................................................. 12

Valve Sizing ............................................................................................. 13
Branch Connections ................................................................................ 13

4.5.1
4.5.2
Branch Connections < 50% of Run Diameter .......................................... 13

Branch Connections 50% of Run Diameter .......................................... 14

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 3 of 44

4.5.3
4.5.4
5.0
PIPING COMPONENTS ..................................................................................... 16

5.1
Flanges .................................................................................................... 16
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
5.3
Design Wall Thickness ............................................................................ 16

Increased Thickness................................................................................ 16
Reducers ................................................................................................. 17
Scraper Tee Fittings ................................................................................ 17
Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings ................................................... 17
Piping Unions .......................................................................................... 17
Joint Design ............................................................................................. 17

5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
General .................................................................................................... 16
Hub design .............................................................................................. 16
Fittings ..................................................................................................... 16
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
General .................................................................................................... 17
End Preparations ..................................................................................... 18
Elbows and Bends ................................................................................... 19

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
6.0
Reinforced Branch Connections .............................................................. 14

Branch Connection and Weld Spacing .................................................... 15
Elbows ..................................................................................................... 19
Reducing Elbows ..................................................................................... 19
Miter Bends ............................................................................................. 19
Bends Made From Pipe ........................................................................... 19
PIPING LAYOUT ................................................................................................ 19

6.1
General .................................................................................................... 19
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9
6.2
Pipe Routing ............................................................................................ 19

Consistency ............................................................................................. 20
Maintainability .......................................................................................... 20
Operability ............................................................................................... 20
Safety ...................................................................................................... 20
Environment ............................................................................................ 20
Dead Legs ............................................................................................... 20
Dikes and Berms ..................................................................................... 21
Aboveground Vs Buried Piping Systems ................................................. 21
Clearances............................................................................................... 21
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
Minimum Vertical Clearances .................................................................. 21

Piping Access .......................................................................................... 22
General Piping Clearances...................................................................... 22
Minimum Pipe Rack Clearances ............................................................. 23

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 4 of 44

6.3
Valves ...................................................................................................... 24
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.8
6.3.9
6.3.10
6.3.11
6.3.12
6.3.13
6.3.14
6.3.15
6.4
Centrifugal Pumps ................................................................................... 29

6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
6.4.9
6.5
General .................................................................................................... 29
Flange Loads ........................................................................................... 30
Piping Reducers ...................................................................................... 30
Restrictions on Elbows in Suction Piping ................................................ 30
Vertical Elbows in Suction Piping ............................................................ 30
Horizontal Elbows in Suction Piping ........................................................ 30
Temporary Strainers ................................................................................ 30
Vents and Drains ..................................................................................... 30
Pump Selection ....................................................................................... 31
Vent and Drain Systems .......................................................................... 31

6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.5.8
6.5.9
7.0
General .................................................................................................... 24
Accessibility ............................................................................................. 24
Chain Operators ...................................................................................... 24
Handwheel Access .................................................................................. 25
Valve Installation, Vertical Handwheel Orientation .................................. 26
Valve Installation, Horizontal Handwheel Orientation .............................. 26
Relative Valve Elevation .......................................................................... 27
Valves Below Grade ................................................................................ 27
Valve Body Cavity/Bonnet Pressure Relief ............................................. 27
Globe Type Control Valves ...................................................................... 28
Check Valves ........................................................................................... 28
Ball Valves ............................................................................................... 28
Safety Relief Valves................................................................................. 28
Thermal Relief Valves.............................................................................. 29
Valve Selection ........................................................................................ 29
General .................................................................................................... 31
Vent and Drain Piping (NPS 2 and smaller) ............................................ 31
Equipment Isolation and Drains............................................................... 31
Pipe Header Termination Drains ............................................................. 31
Vents on Buried Piping ............................................................................ 31
Drain Piping Slopes ................................................................................. 32
Open Drain Header Systems................................................................... 32
Closed Drain Header Systems ................................................................ 32
Expansion Chambers .............................................................................. 32
PIPING STRESS AND FLEXIBILITY .................................................................. 33

7.1
General .................................................................................................... 33

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 5 of 44

7.2
Analysis ................................................................................................... 33
7.3
7.4
Design Criteria ......................................................................................... 34

Routing .................................................................................................... 34
7.5
Expansion Joints ...................................................................................... 35
7.6
Piping Supports ....................................................................................... 35

7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.7
8.0
Piping Spans ............................................................................................ 36
BURIED PIPING AND CROSSINGS .................................................................. 37

8.1
Design Wall Thickness............................................................................. 37

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.3
Minimum Cover ....................................................................................... 38

Minimum Crossing Clearances ................................................................ 39
Minimum Lateral Clearances ................................................................... 39
Backfill ..................................................................................................... 41
PROTECTIVE COATINGS ................................................................................. 41

9.1
Exposed Piping ........................................................................................ 41
9.2
Buried Piping ........................................................................................... 41

9.2.1
9.2.2
10.0
General .................................................................................................... 38
Road Crossings ....................................................................................... 38
Pipe Clearances ...................................................................................... 38

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.4
General .................................................................................................... 37
Minimum Wall Thickness ......................................................................... 37
Road Crossings ....................................................................................... 38
Location and Alignment ........................................................................... 38

8.2.1
8.2.2
9.0
Pipe Support Layout ................................................................................ 35

Anchoring and Guides ............................................................................. 35
Anchor Blocks.......................................................................................... 35
Welded Pipe Supports ............................................................................. 36
General .................................................................................................... 41
Girth Weld Coatings ................................................................................ 41
INSULATION ...................................................................................................... 42
10.1
Insulation Materials and Application ........................................................ 42

10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
Exterior Piping ......................................................................................... 42

Interior Piping........................................................................................... 42
Buried Piping ........................................................................................... 42
Vessels and Tanks .................................................................................. 42
Valves and Equipment ............................................................................. 42

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 6 of 44

10.1.6 Personnel Protection ............................................................................... 42
11.0
10.2
10.3
Insulation Thickness ................................................................................ 43

Insulation Cladding and Accessories ....................................................... 43
10.4
Surface Preparation ................................................................................. 43
10.5
Application of Insulation ........................................................................... 43
EXAMINATION AND TESTING .......................................................................... 44

11.1
Examinations ........................................................................................... 44
11.2
Testing ..................................................................................................... 44
APPENDICES
Appendix A:
Appendix B:
Appendix C:
Appendix D:
Appendix E:
Standard Piping Classes

General Piping Details
Anchor Block Calculations
Pipe Support Design
Environmental Design Data for Canadian Facilities

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 7 of 44
1.0 SCOPE
This standard is a guide to mandatory design practices for station piping. This
standard shall be limited to systems transporting liquid hydrocarbons including:
crude oil, condensate and liquid petroleum products. This standard shall be
further limited to the design of Low Vapour Pressure (LVP) systems intended for
Category I service.
The scope of this standard includes all pressure pipe, valves, fittings and auxiliary
components used in tank farms, pump stations and terminals. This standard does
not cover the design of Main Line piping systems. The designer is cautioned that
this standard is not a comprehensive design handbook; it does not do away with
the need for the designer or for competent engineering judgement.
The requirements of this standard shall not be applied retroactively to existing
installations, but shall apply to the extension, repair, maintenance, and upgrading
of such installations.
FIGURE 1.0.A -- SCOPE DIAGRAM
Note:
Facilities indicated by heavy lines are within the scope of this standard,
light lines indicate facilities not within the scope.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 8 of 44
2.0 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS

Some referenced publications are supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific
requirements in this standard; referenced publications should therefore be applied
only in the context of this standard.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
CSA Z662-99
Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems
American Petroleum Institute

API 610, 1995
Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Heavy Duty Chemical, and

Gas Industry Services
API 1102, 1993 Steel Pipelines Crossing Railroads and Highways

National Energy Board Act
SOR/99-294
Onshore Pipeline Regulations
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standards

MP1100
Pipe Selection and Specification
MP1200
Fitting Selection and Specification
MP1300
Valve Selection and Specification
MP2215
Scraper Tee Fittings
MP2217
Induction Pipe Bending
MP2219
Full-Encirclement Saddles
MP3102
Piping Insulation Requirements
MP3110
Station Piping Fabrication
MP3901
Joining Program
MP4111
Station Hydrostatic Test Procedure
GC3101
External Coating of Piping, Components and Structural Steel
GC3102
External Coating of Buried Piping
GC3103
External Coating of Girth Welds on Buried Pipe

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 9 of 44
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
Isolation Valve
A valve used to isolate facilities such as pumping stations, tank farms,
refineries, terminals, drain lines, and vents from the main line.
3.2
Main Line
Those items through which oil industry fluids are conveyed, which includes
pipe, components, and any appurtenances attached thereto, up to and
including the isolating valves used at stations and other facilities.
3.3
NPS
NPS means Nominal Pipe Size, and the NPS system of nominal size
designation is contained in standards prepared by the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers.
3.4
PN
PN means Pressure Nominal and the PN system of nominal pressure class
designation is contained in standards prepared by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO).
The numerical part of the
designation approximates the maximum cold working pressure rating in bars
(100 kPa).
3.5
Sectionalizing Valve
A valve for isolating a section of pipeline.
3.6
Station Piping
This includes all pipe, components, and any appurtenances at Pump
Stations, Tank Farms, and Terminals downstream from the first station
isolating valve or sectionalizing valve within the station.
3.7
SMYS
SMYS means Specified Minimum Yield Strength. This is the minimum
yield strength prescribed by the specification or standard under which the
material is produced.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 10 of 44
4.0 PIPING DESIGN

4.1
4.2
General
4.1.1
Minimum Pipe Size

With the exception of instrumentation piping, the minimum size of
piping shall be NPS 1, including drains, vents, and flushing
connections. If smaller lines are required, stainless steel tubing
should be considered.
4.1.2
Maximum Pipe Size

The maximum pipe size for station applications shall be NPS 24.
NPS 30 pipe within stations shall be limited to the piping up to any
scraper barrels (this restriction is due to the fact that under standard
test procedures, NPS 30, 12.7 mm wall, grade 359 piping is limited to
an MOP of 9570 kPA, the MOP for PN 100 is 9930 kPa).
4.1.3
Prohibited Pipe Sizes

Pipe sizes NPS 1, 2, 3 and 5 shall not be used. Pipe sizes
NPS 14, 18, 22, 26, and 28 should be avoided. Mechanical
equipment or instrument connections of NPS 1, 2, 3 and 5 shall
change to a permissible piping size, immediately adjacent to the
equipment.
4.1.4
Materials
The material requirements for pipe, piping components and nonmetallic elements (ie. gaskets, elastomers) shall be in accordance
with the requirements of Appendix A.
Design Conditions
4.2.1
Design Pressure
The maximum operating pressure (MOP) shall equal the design
pressure for the pressure class specified in Table 4.2.1.A.
TABLE 4.2.1.A -- DESIGN PRESSURES
Pressure Class
PN 20
(ANSI 150)
PN 50
(ANSI 300)
PN 100
(ANSI 600)
Design Pressure (kPa)
1900
4960
9930
4 Hr Test Pressure (kPa)
2375
6210
12415
1 Hr Test Pressure (kPa)
2850
7450
14900

Piping Class

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 11 of 44

4.2.2
Design Temperature
The pipeline operating (or fluid) temperature range is -5C to 25C.
The design temperature range of this standard is -29C to 50C.
Design temperatures outside of this range are beyond the scope of
this standard. Ambient temperature ranges must be considered when
specifying materials that are not at pipeline temperature.
4.2.3
Design Fluids
The table lists the nominal properties for various hydrocarbons that
flow in station piping systems:
TABLE 4.2.3.A -- PROPERTIES OF DESIGN FLUIDS
4.3
Fluid
Density
(kg/m3)
Viscosity
(mm2/sec
@ 10C)
Vapour
Pressure
(kPa)
Flash
Point(C)
Light Crude Oil
825 - 860
6 - 15
25 - 60
<-40
Heavy Crude Oil
920 - 930
220 - 300
40 - 50
<-40
Condensate
695 - 745
0.7 - 0.8
40 - 70
<-40
MTBE
740
0.35 @ 20C
53.5
-26
Gasoline
695 - 735
0.4 - 0.45
85 - 105
<-40
Diesel
830 - 865
1-5
0 - 10
40
Methanol
795
0.7
12.8
15
Jet Fuel (Type A)
820
2.0
4.0
38
Pressure Design
4.3.1
Design Wall Thickness

The minimum wall thickness for above ground piping shall be:
TABLE 4.3.1.A: MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS, ABOVE GROUND PIPING
4.3.2
Pipe Size
Rating
Nipple Size
Rating
NPS 1 to 2
XS (Sch 80)
NPS 1
Sch 160
NPS 3 to 10
STD (Sch 40)
NPS 1 to 2
XS (Sch 80)
NPS 12 to 30
Appendix A
Pressure Relief
Relief valves shall be used to prevent excessive pressure build up in
any piece of equipment or piping system segment that can be

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 12 of 44

isolated with a valve, or check valve. Thermal relief valves shall be in
accordance with paragraph 6.3.14.
4.4
4.3.3
Pressure Class
The pressure class for any section of piping not protected by a relief
valve shall be equal to the maximum pressure which can be
developed as a result of pump shut-off, inadvertent valve closure, or
static head (note: thermal relief valves are inadequate for this type of
protection).
4.3.4
Pump Shut-off
For piping subject to pump shut-off pressure, the design pressure
shall exceed the maximum suction pressure plus the pump shut-off
head.
4.3.5
Positive Displacement Pumps

Piping located downstream of a positive displacement pump shall be
protected by a pressure relief valve or have a design pressure that
exceeds the stalling pressure of the pump. The pressure relieving
device shall be independent of any internal pump relief valve and
shall be installed between the pump and the first block valve on the
pump's discharge. The relieving capacity of the pressure relieving
device shall be equal or exceed the capacity of the pump.
Hydraulic Design
4.4.1
Station Pipe Sizing

Pressure systems such as pump suction and discharge lines,
manifold piping, and metering systems should be sized using Figure
4.4.A. With the exception of pump suction lines, in situations where
economics justify, the flow rates may exceed those indicated by
Region 2, but should not include those in Region 4.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 13 of 44
FIGURE 4.4.A HYDRAULIC PIPE SIZING

4000
Region 3
Short
runs only
3500
Region 4
Avoid applications
in this region
Flow Rate (m 3/hr)
3000
2500
Region 2
Discharge
Piping
2000
1500
1000
Region 1
Suction Piping
500
0
6
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
Pipe Size (NPS)
4.4.2
4.5
Valve Sizing
In order to minimize erosion damage, vibration, and noise, the
velocity of flow through valves should not exceed 7.6 m/s. Block
valve sizing shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
Standard MP1300.
Branch Connections
4.5.1
Branch Connections < 50% of Run Diameter

Branch connections less than 50% of the run pipe size should be
made with wrought steel reducing tees, extruded outlet fittings, or
integrally reinforced, forged steel, branch outlet fittings which abut the
run pipe. Such outlet fittings include: weldolets, sockolets or
threadolets.
Direct stub-ins shall only be permitted on
atmospheric drain lines.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 14 of 44

4.5.2
Branch Connections 50% of Run Diameter

Except as permitted by 4.5.2(a) and (b), branch connections greater
than or equal to 50% of the run pipe size shall be made with straight
tees, reducing tees, or extruded outlet fittings.
a)
Pad-type reinforcement shall be permitted for applications

where the branch pipe is at least one pipe size less than the run
pipe. The reinforcement shall be in accordance with CSA Z662.
b)
Forged steel outlet fittings shall be permitted for applications

where the branch pipe is at least one pipe size less than the run
pipe, for the following classes and sizes:
i)
Piping Class A (PN 20), run pipe size NPS 16
ii)
Piping Class B (PN 50), run pipe size NPS 4

TABLE 4.5.A -- BRANCH CONNECTION SELECTION GUIDE
BRANCH SIZE
H
E
A
D
E
R
S
I
Z
E
4.5.3
10
12
16
20
24
24
RT
RT
RT
20
RT
RT
RT
16
RT
RT
RT
12
RT
RT
RT
10
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
T
RT
W
O
=
=
=
=
=
SOCKET WELDING TEE

STRAIGHT TEE
REDUCING TEE
WELDOLET
OTHER OLETS:
SOCKOLET
ELBOLET
THREADOLET
Reinforced Branch Connections

When reinforced branch connections are used, the branch piping
shall be made from XS pipe. As a minimum, the XS pipe stub shall
extend from the run pipe to 150 mm past the re-pad or saddle outlet
before any reduction in wall thickness. Full-encirclement saddles
shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard
MP2219, Full-Encirclement Saddles. Re-pads shall include tapped
vent holes for weld testing.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 15 of 44

4.5.4
Branch Connection and Weld Spacing

The minimum distance between any two girth welds or any
combination of fillet and girth weld shall be 100 mm. The minimum
distance between adjacent branch connections shall be in
accordance with 4.5.4.A.
FIGURE 4.5.A -- MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR LOCATIONS OF BRANCH CONNECTIONS
TABLE 4.5.A -- MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR LOCATIONS OF BRANCH CONNECTIONS

BRANCH SIZE
A
B
R
A
N
C
H
S
I
Z
E
150
150
150
150
160
150
160
170
180
150
170
170
180
190
260
310
310
310
310
510
290
340
340
340
340
540
575
330
380
380
380
380
580
610
650
360
410
410
410
410
610
650
680
720
10
410
450
450
450
450
660
690
730
760
Table 5.4.A is based on PN 100 (600 ANSI) flanges.
10
810

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 16 of 44
5.0 PIPING COMPONENTS

5.1
5.2
Flanges
5.1.1
General
Raised face, weld neck flanges should be used for permanent
piping. Slip on flanges should be avoided. If slip on flanges are
used, they shall be double welded (welded on the inside and outside
diameter). Except as permitted by clause 5.1.2, the material grade
shall conform to the requirements of Appendix A.
5.1.2
Hub design
A flange with a SMYS less than that of the mating pipe may be used
provided that there is a corresponding increase in thickness of the
hub at the welding end of the flange. The hub thickness shall be
such that the product of its nominal thickness and its SMYS is equal
to or greater than the respective product for the mating pipe.
However, the ratio of the SMYS of the pipe to that of the flange shall
not exceed 1.5.
The end preparation shall conform to the
requirements of 5.3.5. When pipe of greater wall thickness than
required is used, match boring of the pipe ends to suit the flange
thickness is permitted.
Fittings
5.2.1

Except as permitted by clause 5.2.2, the design wall thickness and
material grade for wrought steel butt-welding fittings shall be
equal to or greater than that of the mating pipe it is attached to, and
not less than that specified in Appendix A.
5.2.2
Increased Thickness
A fitting with a SMYS less than that of the mating pipe may be used
provided that there is a corresponding increase in the fitting wall
thickness. The fitting wall thickness shall be such that the product of
its nominal thickness and its SMYS shall be equal to or greater than
the respective product for the mating pipe. However, the ratio of the
SMYS of the pipe to that of the fitting shall not exceed 1.5. The end
preparation shall conform to the requirements of 5.3.5. When pipe of
greater wall thickness than required is used, match boring of the pipe
ends to suit the fitting thickness is permitted.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 17 of 44
5.3
5.2.3
Reducers
Concentric or eccentric reducers joining pipes of different thickness
should be specified for the thicker wall, with end preparation as per
subsection 5.3.5.
5.2.4
Scraper Tee Fittings

Tees with branch sizes NPS 12 and larger, in piping designed for
internal inspection shall have scraper guide bars in accordance with
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP2215.
5.2.5
Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings

Forged-steel threaded and socket-welding fittings, including forged
outlet fittings, plugs, and unions shall be ANSI Class 3000. Cast iron
and brass fittings shall not be used for liquid hydrocarbon service.
5.2.6
Piping Unions
Pipe unions shall be limited to drain piping and shall not be used in
pressure piping systems. Unions in drain systems shall be located
on the downstream or low pressure side of header drain valves.
Joint Design
5.3.1
General
Typical piping joints are welded, flanged or threaded. Piping systems
should be designed to minimize the number of joints, and should be
welded wherever possible. Joints on piping shall be in accordance
with the requirements of Table 5.3.1.A.
TABLE 5.3.1.A - JOINT SELECTION GUIDE
Joint Type
Application
Threaded
Socket
Welded
Butt
Welded
PN 20 NPS 1
PN 20 > NPS 1
Temporary only
Drain Systems
Buried Piping
Prohibited
PN 50 & PN 100
Prohibited
Prohibited

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 18 of 44

5.3.2
End Preparations
Transition between ends of unequal thickness shall be accomplished
by the means illustrated in Figure 5.3.5.A.
FIGURE 5.3.5.A -- END PREPARATIONS
a) Standard End Preparation of

Butt-Welding Fittings and
Optional End Prep. for Pipe
b) Standard End Preparation for Pipe
c) Internal Diameters Unequal

for materials of unequal
SMYS
d) External Diameters
Unequal
for materials of unequal SMYS
SMYS 1
t2 = t1
and t2 1.5 t1
SMYS 2
e) External and Internal Diameters Unequal
t1 = design wall thickness of the mating pipe
t2 = design wall thickness of the fitting or thicker pipe
SMYS1 = SMYS of pipe
SMYS2 = SMYS of fitting or thicker pipe
1)
2)
3)
4)
Where the fitting is tapered within its design thickness (t2), the taper angle () shall be;
Wrought Fittings: 14 30, Flanges: 14 18
Where the taper is outside the design thickness, the minimum angle is 0 (wrought fittings only);
Undimensioned angles and lands shall be in accordance with either figure a or b.
In the case of match boring pipe of greater wall thickness than required, t1 is the thickness of the
fitting and t2 is the thickness of the pipe, with the corresponding reversal in SMYS1 and SMYS2.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 19 of 44

5.4
Elbows and Bends

5.4.1
Elbows
Long radius elbows shall be used in permanent piping for sizes NPS
3 and larger. Because of their poor hydraulic characteristics, short
radius elbows are to be avoided, particularly in pump suction piping
and upstream of valves, flow measuring equipment, and
instrumentation connections. One exception is the use of short
radius elbows in safety relief valve discharge piping to minimize the
moment and forces on the valve. Elbows in piping systems designed
tp allow for internal inspection shall have a minimum radius of three
pipe diameters.
5.4.2
Reducing Elbows
Because of their high relative cost and quality assurance problems,
reducing elbows should be avoided.
If reducing elbows are
unavoidable, they must be carefully specified and inspected during
fabrication.
5.4.3
Miter Bends
Miter bends shall be avoided and their use is prohibited on PN 50
and PN 100 piping.
5.4.4
Bends Made From Pipe

It shall be permissible to use bends made from pipe in accordance
with the following:
a)
Cold pipe bends shall be limited to a minimum radius of 40 pipe

diameters.
b)
Induction Bends shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan

Canada Inc. Standard MP2217, Induction Pipe Bending.
6.0 PIPING LAYOUT

6.1
General
The overall piping arrangement should be neat, orderly, and economical
based on the following guidelines:
6.1.1
Pipe Routing
Multiple adjacent piping runs should be routed parallel to one another
and at a common elevation. Branches off the main lines should be

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 20 of 44

from the top or bottom of the pipe in order to avoid interference with
an adjacent line.
6.1.2
Consistency
Piping layouts at multiple identical pieces of equipment should be
alike for familiarity and ease of operation.
6.1.3
Maintainability
All piping and equipment requiring regular attention by operating and
maintenance personnel should be readily accessible. Adequate,
clear working spaces, of at least 1m, should be provided around
equipment such as pumps and valves. Piping should be self
supporting for ease of equipment removal.
6.1.4
Operability
Piping shall be designed such that operating personnel can perform
their functions in an efficient manner. Not every valve and instrument
can be ideally located, but priorities can be established by
consideration of the frequency of operation and degree of physical
effort required.
6.1.5
Safety
Stairs, ladders, and platforms shall be provided with adequate head
room and lateral clearance. Equipment, valves and other piping
components shall be located such that they do not create hazards.
Special care shall be taken in the placement of valve stems. Every
effort shall be made to keep such projections out of the area between
1400 to 1800 mm (face level) above grade.
6.1.6
Environment
At large integrated manifold systems, overhead cranes complete with
roof systems should be provided to shelter workers and equipment
from the elements and minimize the amount of rainwater runoff to be
processed. These manifolds shall also include liner systems and
sumps to collect and contain leakage.
6.1.7
Dead Legs
Industry experience has shown that dead legs (sections of pipe which
do not experience flow under normal conditions) are subject to
internal corrosion and thus should be avoided. These volumes also
present contamination problems and shall be minimized on any clean
product systems.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 21 of 44
6.2
6.1.8
Dikes and Berms

Wherever possible, pumps, operating valves and fire fighting valves
shall be located outside diked areas to provide access to this
equipment during a spill or fire.
6.1.9
Aboveground Vs Buried Piping Systems

Aboveground piping systems are preferred, but the designer shall
consider the following:
a)
aboveground piping is
maintenance and repair;
accessible
for
visual
inspection,
b)
piping modifications are usually easier to complete on

aboveground piping due to the absence of excavation
requirements;
c)
aboveground piping will be affected by radiant heat;
d)
aboveground piping provides more flexibility for movement in all

planes. Flexibility may be necessary to accommodate uneven
settlement, shifting foundations, soil movement, earthquakes,
movements from line shocks and movements from thermal
expansion.
e)
underground piping may be necessary for gravity drain systems;
f)
underground piping requires better coating and cathodic

protection;
Clearances
6.2.1
Minimum Vertical Clearances

Minimum vertical clearances between finished grade (or top of floor
plate) and the bottom of the piping, insulation, or support beam
(whichever controls) are to be as specified in Table 6.2.1.A.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 22 of 44
TABLE 6.2.1.A -- MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCES

Minimum
Clearance
Location
Above railroad tracks from base of rail
Above major roads open to unrestricted traffic
as periphery of manifold area limits)
6.8 m
(such
5.5 m
Within manifold and metering areas:

Above internal roadways provided for access of
maintenance and fire fighting equipment
4.25 m
Above grade, at pipe racks, where access is

required for:
1. vehicular equipment
2. portable (temporary) service equipment only
6.2.2
4.25 m
3.05 m
Above walkways and elevated platforms
2.15 m
Above grade in paved or unpaved areas

(measured from grade to underside of pipe
flange, Dimension C in Table 6.2.5.A)
0.3 m
Piping Access
Piping shall be designed in order to maintain the minimum width of
accessway specified in Table 6.2.2.A.
TABLE 6.2.2.A -- MINIMUM WIDTH OF ACCESSWAY
Location
Manifold area
accessway
a)
b)
Width
Primary
Secondary
Platform and walkways
6.2.3
1.50 m
0.91 m
0.81 m
General Piping Clearances

There shall be a minimum clearance of 75 mm between pipe flanges
and any obstructions in confined spaces such as pits or beneath
grating. This spacing shall be maintained even in the absence of
pipe flanges

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 23 of 44
FIGURE 6.2.3.A -- MINIMUM PIPING CLEARANCES
TABLE 6.2.3.A -- MINIMUM PIPING CLEARANCES (mm)

Pipe Size
135
135
365
Critical
service
applications
such as unit
and station
valves
155
155
380
160
160
180
180
210
210
255
255
285
285
1010
510
10
330
330
1040
555
12
355
355
1060
580
16
420
420
1100
645
20
480
480
1150
710
24
545
545
1200
770
30
640
640
1280
865
385
405
440
480
Clearances are based on PN 100 ( 600 lb. ) flanges.
6.2.4
Minimum Pipe Rack Clearances

Minimum horizontal center to center spacing between uninsulated
lines shall be as shown in Table 6.2.4.A. Spacing may also be
governed by movement of lines due to expansion.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 24 of 44

TABLE 6.2.4.A -- MINIMUM SPACING BETWEEN CENTERLINES (mm)
6.3
Pipe
Size
10
12
16
20
24
30
30
475
475
500
550
575
625
650
700
750
775
825
875
950
24
450
450
450
475
525
550
575
625
650
700
750
800
20
400
400
425
425
450
475
525
550
575
625
675
16
325
350
350
375
400
425
475
500
525
575
12
275
300
300
325
350
375
400
450
475
10
250
275
275
300
325
350
375
400
225
250
250
275
300
325
350
275
200
225
225
250
250
175
175
200
200
225
150
150
175
175
125
125
150
125
125
125
Pipe spacing based on:

OD small pipe + OD large flange) + 25 mm
This chart is based on the use of a PN 50 flange on the
larger pipe size. Insulated lines or PN 100 flanges will
require larger clearances.
Valves
6.3.1
General
Valves should be installed with their stems oriented between the
vertical upward (preferred) and 45 from vertical positions. Horizontal
valve installations should be avoided. Valves shall not be installed
upside down. The following safety hazards must be avoided when
determining stem orientation: head and knee interference, tripping
hazards, and valve stems at eye level in the horizontal plane. The
valve handwheel size shall not be reduced to accommodate the
piping arrangement.
6.3.2
Accessibility
In determining the location of valves in piping systems, accessibility
for operation and adequate space for maintenance shall be provided.
The use of extended stems should be considered in order to avoid
unnecessary loops or turns in the piping.
6.3.3
Chain Operators
The use of chain operators should be avoided. In general, only
infrequently used valves should be located with their handwheel
centerline higher than 1400 mm above grade. Platforms should be
provided for any valves required in piping above this elevation. An
exception to this requirement would be a high point vent.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 25 of 44

6.3.4
Handwheel Access
A minimum of 100 mm clearance shall be provided around the entire
circumference of all handwheels. For valve handwheels behind
obstructions, such as handrails, the following shall apply:
a)
In the case of vertical handwheels, the entire handwheel shall

be within 400 mm of the outer edge of the obstruction, which
shall not exceed 1200 mm in elevation above grade. No other
obstacle shall interrupt the space between the obstruction and
an elevation of 1800 mm. In the case of handrails, the
handwheel stem can either penetrate through the rail, or a
section of rail in front of the handwheel can be removable
(dropbar section) to facilitate access.
b)
In the case of horizontal handwheels, one half of the handwheel

diameter shall be within 400 mm of the outer edge of the
obstruction and all other restrictions mentioned in 6.3.4(a) shall
apply.
FIGURE 6.3.4.A -- HANDWHEEL CLEARANCE
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 26 of 44
6.3.5
Valve Installation, Vertical Handwheel Orientation

Valves installed with their handwheel in the vertical should have the
handwheel centerline located at an elevation between 1000 mm and
1200 mm above grade or platform grating as shown in Figure
6.3.5.A (optimal elevation 1100 mm). Installations below 800 mm
should be avoided and reserved for infrequently used valves such as
header drain valves.
FIGURE 6.3.5.A -- VALVE INSTALLATION - VERTICAL HANDWHEEL
6.3.6
Valve Installation, Horizontal Handwheel Orientation

Valves installed with their handwheel in the horizontal should have
the handwheel located at an elevation between 1000 mm and 1200
mm above grade or platform grating as shown in Figure 6.3.6.A
(optimal elevation 1100 mm). Installations below 800 mm should be
avoided and reserved for infrequently used valves such as header
drain valves.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 27 of 44
FIGURE 6.3.6.A -- VALVE INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL HANDWHEEL
6.3.7
Relative Valve Elevation

Water emulsified in crude oil can precipitate out of solution and
collect at low points in piping. To prevent this accumulation and the
subsequent freezing potential at valves, a valve shall be placed at an
elevation equal to or higher than that of the highest piping header
that it is connected to (refer to Figure 6.3.7.A).
FIGURE 6.3.7.A -- RELATIVE VALVE ELEVATION
NEVER
AVOID
BETTER
BEST
6.3.8
Valves Below Grade

All below grade valves shall be located in valve boxes and provided
with an extended stem and handwheel above grade. Burial of below
grade valves is not permitted.
6.3.9
Valve Body Cavity/Bonnet Pressure Relief

Valves NPS 8 and larger that do not have integral pressure relief,
such as wedge gate valves, soft sealing plug valves and some
ball valves shall be installed complete with body cavity pressure

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 28 of 44

relief valves piped to an open drain system, or to the connected
piping. The body cavity can be vented to the adjacent piping using
connections provided on the valve body.
6.3.10 Globe Type Control Valves
Control valves should be installed with the valve stem in the vertical
upright position. There should be a minimum of three diameters of
straight pipe both upstream and downstream of the control valve,
unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. This practice
reduces turbulence in the fluid entering and leaving the valve.
6.3.11 Check Valves
Check valves are used to control the direction of flow and cannot be
relied upon for positive shut off in the reverse direction. The
preferred installation of any check valve is in a horizontal piping run.
Check valves shall not be installed in vertical down flow piping.
Check valves are highly susceptible to chattering due to upstream
turbulence caused by fittings.
In the absence of specific
recommendations from the manufacturer, a minimum of five
diameters of straight pipe should be provided upstream of all check
valves. For check valves in horizontal piping, the hinge pin
orientation shall be:
a)
vertical for dual plate wafer type check valves;
b)
horizontal for regular swing type check valves.
6.3.12 Ball Valves

Ball valves shall not be installed in vertical piping runs. In crude
service when the valve is closed, dirt or grit can settle on top of the
ball. Upon opening the valve, these solids can damage the seats or
the ball itself.
6.3.13 Safety Relief Valves
In the absence of any manufacturers recommendations, the following
guidelines should be followed for the arrangement and installation of
safety and relief valves of the direct spring loaded type:
a)
All relief valves shall be installed in the vertical upright position

on top of a horizontal run of pipe. The valve should be located
at least one header diameter away from any butt weld.
b)
No header branch penetration should be made in the same

circumferential cross section as the safety valve inlet nozzle.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 29 of 44

c)
Where more than one safety valve or service branch are to be

installed in the same header run, a minimum distance of 610
mm or three times the sum of the nozzle inside radii, whichever
is greater shall be provided between the nozzles.
d)
Where more than two safety valves are located in the same
header run, the spacing between valves should be varied such
that the distance between two adjacent valves differs by at least
an inlet nozzle diameter.
e)
The relief valve outlet piping shall consist of the mating flange
and a fitting to fitting short radius elbow in order to keep the
moment and forces imposed on the valve to a minimum.
6.3.14 Thermal Relief Valves

Thermal relief valves shall be MNPT x 1 FNPT, Consolidated
model 1990C-DL-1 pressure relief valve or approved equal. Unless
the piping or equipment protected has not been designed to full
flange rating, thermal relief valve set pressures shall in accordance
with Table 6.3.14.A. Note: the thermal relief valve set pressure
should be taken into consideration when sizing the MOV's.
TABLE 6.3.14.A B THERMAL RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURES
Piping Class
MOP (kPa)
Set Pressure (kPa)
PN 20
1,900
2,000
PN 50
4,960
5,200
PN 100
9,930
10,400
6.3.15 Valve Selection

Valve selection shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada
Inc. Standard MP1300. Cast iron valves shall not be used for
hydrocarbon service.
6.4
Centrifugal Pumps
6.4.1
General
Piping systems at pump locations shall be designed to allow for
pump removal and maintenance. At locations with multiple pumps,
each pump should have isolation valves and a check valves. The
piping should be designed to minimize flanges loads on the pump
and flexible connections to pumps shall be avoided. Flexible
connections shall not be permitted for pumps with drivers greater
than 3 kw in size.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 30 of 44

6.4.2
Flange Loads
The suction and discharge piping must be supported independently
of the pump such that minimal load is transmitted to the pump
flanges. API Standard 610, Centrifugal Pumps for General
Refinery Service, should be consulted when designing suction and
discharge piping. Allowable pump flange loads are given in section
2.4 and in Appendix F -Criteria for Piping Design.
6.4.3
Piping Reducers
When a reduction in pipe size is required at the pump suction, an
eccentric reducer with the flat side up shall be used.
6.4.4
Restrictions on Elbows in Suction Piping

Only long radius elbows are to be used at or adjacent to any pump
suction connection.
6.4.5
Vertical Elbows in Suction Piping

In the suction piping of horizontal double suction pumps, an elbow
may be fitting to fitting if in the vertical plane with flow from above or
below.
6.4.6
Horizontal Elbows in Suction Piping

When the suction piping is in the horizontal plane, provide at least
four diameters of straight pipe between the pump suction connection
and the first elbow. Eccentric reducers may be included in this
straight section.
6.4.7
Temporary Strainers
Pump suction lines should be designed to accommodate a
temporary, in-line, conical type strainer used during pump
commissioning.
6.4.8
Vents and Drains

Pump drains include: high point vents to evacuate trapped air; casing
drains to drain pumps for maintenance; and seal drains(/vents) on
the mechanical seal gland plates to take away fluid discharged from
leaking seals. High point vents and casing drains shall be hard piped
to a closed drain system. Seal drains shall be connected to an
open drain system to prevent the liquid from the casing drain exiting
the seal drain.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 31 of 44

6.4.9
6.5
Pump Selection
Pumps with cast iron pressure containing components shall not be
used for hydrocarbon service. Centrifugal pumps shall be in
accordance with API Standard 610, Centrifugal Pumps for
General Refinery Service.
Vent and Drain Systems

6.5.1
General
High-point vent and low-point drain connections shall be provided
on all piping systems. These connections provide a means of
flooding and draining piping systems and equipment for hydrostatic
testing and during start-up and shutdown. The recommended design
of vents and drains shall be as shown in Appendix B.
6.5.2
Vent and Drain Piping (NPS 2 and smaller)

The first vent or drain connection off any line, vessel, or other
component shall have a block valve installed as close as possible to
the connection. The nipple from this connection shall be socketwelded and the opposite end shall be threaded to accept the block
valve.
6.5.3
Equipment Isolation and Drains

Piping systems shall be provided with adequate valves to isolate
pumps, strainers, meters, and other equipment or vessels for
maintenance. These pieces of equipment should be connected to
drain headers. If drain connections are not provided on the
equipment body, drains shall be provided on the piping inside the
limits of the isolation valves.
6.5.4
Pipe Header Termination Drains

A pipe header shall be terminated with a blind flange complete with
drain as shown in Appendix B. Pipe caps shall be avoided as a
means of terminating pipe headers.
6.5.5
Vents on Buried Piping

Vents or drains on buried piping shall be made with a T.D.
Williamson style hot-tap fitting, as shown in Appendix B.
Regardless of function, the fitting shall always be installed on top of
the pipe. Prior to commissioning, the vent shall be plugged, capped
and covered with a vent protector.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 32 of 44

6.5.6
Drain Piping Slopes

In general, drain systems are non-pressurized gravity flow piping and
should have a minimum slope of 10 mm rise per 1 m run of pipe.
6.5.7
Open Drain Header Systems

Any drain point that is open to atmosphere either by design or for
inspection should be connected to an open drain header. Typical
applications include those that can be characterized as low pressure
and/or low volume sources such as valve body cavity bleeds and
pump seal drains.
Because these drain points are open to
atmosphere, another drain source at a higher elevation or under
pressure could force fluid to flow out through these open locations.
Therefore, relative elevations, expected drain volumes, and
pressures should be reviewed when designing connections to open
drain systems.
6.5.8
Closed Drain Header Systems

Applications that should be connected to closed drain headers are
those that can be characterized as high pressure and/or high volume
sources. Such applications include: pump case or equipment drains,
safety relief device outlets, and piping header drains. In a closed
drain system, drain connections from a large range of elevations can
be tied into the same header system.
6.5.9
Expansion Chambers
Where it is impractical to route separate lines from closed and open
drain headers to a sump or slop tank, the headers can be connected
by use of an expansion chamber or blow-off box. The expansion
chamber should be vented to atmosphere and designed in
accordance with the requirements of Appendix B. For high volume
systems, installation of a high level alarm in the expansion chamber
should be considered.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 33 of 44
7.0 PIPING STRESS AND FLEXIBILITY

7.1
General
Piping systems shall have sufficient flexibility to prevent thermal expansion or
contraction or movements of piping supports from causing:
7.2
a)
failure of piping or supports from over stress or fatigue;
b)
leakage at joints; or
c)
detrimental stresses or distortion in piping and valves or connected

equipment, resulting from excessive thrusts and moments in the piping.
Analysis
Piping stress and flexibility analysis is required for NPS 4 and larger piping
when:
a)
it is connected to rotating equipment;
b)
it is connected to equipment subject to differential settlement;
c)
it forms part of a pressure relieving system;
d)
the operating pressures exceed 7000 kPa; or
e)
the operating temperature is outside the shaded area in Figure 7.2.A.

FIGURE 7.2.A ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS
A nalysis required for applications outside the shaded area
315
175
-25
2
P ip e S ize (N P S)
10
12

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 34 of 44

7.3
Design Criteria
Section 4.6 of CSA Z662 provides concepts, data and methods for
determining the requirements for flexibility in a piping system. These
requirements include:
a)
that the computed stresses at any point due to displacements in the

system shall not exceed allowable stresses;
b)
that reaction forces shall not be detrimental to supports or connected

equipment; and
c)
that the computed movement of the piping shall be within any

prescribed limits, and properly accounted for in the flexibility
calculations.
If it is determined that a piping system does not have adequate inherent

flexibility, means for increasing flexibility shall be provided in accordance with
7.4. Flexibility calculations shall be based on the following data:
TABLE 7.3.A -- REQUIRED DATA FOR FLEXIBILITY CALCULATIONS
7.4
Modulus of Elasticity (E)
207,000 MPa
Linear Coefficient of Expansion ()
12 x 10-6/C
Poisson's Ratio (v)
0.30
Minimum T (TOperating - TInstalled)
20C
Routing
The following guidelines shall be used to obtain the required flexibility using
the minimum amount of pipe, fittings, and expansion loops:
a)
The use of a straight run of pipe between two pieces of equipment or

between two anchor points should be avoided.
b)
A piping system between two anchor points in a single plane should, as

a minimum, be L-shaped, ie. two runs of pipe and a single elbow.
c)
A piping system between two anchor points with the piping in two
planes should, as a minimum, consist of two L-shaped runs of pipe, one
in the horizontal plane and another in the vertical plane.
d)
When the expected thermal expansion in any given pipe run is high, the
use of an anchor at or near the center of the run will distribute the
expansion in two directions.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 35 of 44

e)
For systems consisting of a large diameter main line and multiple

smaller branch lines, the branches must be flexible enough to withstand
the expansion in the main header.
7.5
Expansion Joints
Bellows or packed expansion joints shall not be permitted. Proper piping
design techniques, anchoring of piping and stress analysis shall be used to
eliminate the need for flexible connections.
7.6
Piping Supports
Pipe supports, anchors and guides shall be designed in accordance with
Appendix D of this standard. The design of piping supports shall be based
on all concurrently acting loads transmitted to such supports. These loads
shall include weight effects, loads induced by service pressures,
temperatures, vibration, wind, earthquake, shock and displacement strain.
Pipe supports shall also be designed to prevent wear and corrosion of the
pipe.
7.6.1
Pipe Support Layout

Where possible, equipment such as valving, metering or strainers,
shall be supported by the attached piping. Where large pieces of
equipment such as pumps or heavy valves require individual support,
provision shall be made for support of the piping if the equipment is
removed.
7.6.2
Anchoring and Guides

To protect equipment such as pumps, tanks and valves from excess
mechanical loading, anchors and guides shall be installed to control
movement or to direct expansion into those portions of the system
which are designed to absorb them. Anchor structures and guides
shall be designed to prevent wear and corrosion of the piping. In
addition to thermal forces and moments, the effects of friction in other
supports shall be considered in the design of such anchors and
guides.
7.6.3
Anchor Blocks
Stresses and deflections occur in pipelines at the transition from the
below ground (fully restrained) to the above ground (unrestrained)
condition. Analysis of the stresses and deflections in the transition
areas, resulting form internal pressure and temperature change shall
be in accordance with Appendix C of this standard.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 36 of 44

7.6.4
Welded Pipe Supports

Nonwelded attachments are preferred, but where welded
attachments are required (ie. anchors, pipe supports) for piping sizes
and classes listed in Table 7.6.4.A, such attachments shall be welded
to a separate cylindrical member that totally encircles the pipe. The
encircling member shall be welded to the pipe by continuous
circumferential welds.
TABLE 7.6.4.A -- WELDED SUPPORTS REQUIRING FULL ENCIRCLEMENT
7.7
Piping Class
Pipe Size (NPS)
Class B (PN 50)
20 - 30
Class C (PN 100)
8 - 30
Piping Spans
The maximum allowable distance between pipe supports shall be as given in
Table 7.7.A for each of the cases depicted in Figure 7.7.A.
Note: Spans listed in Table 7.7.A are designed to limit piping deflections to 6.35 mm. Do
not apply where concentrated weights such as heavy valves or heavy fittings exist.
FIGURE 7.7.A -- MAXIMUM SPAN BETWEEN SUPPORTS

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 37 of 44
TABLE 7.7.A -- MAXIMUM SPAN BETWEEN SUPPORTS

Pipe
Size
(NPS)
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
1
2
3
4900
5500
6700
4000
4300
5200
4000
4600
5500
3700
4000
4600
3700
4000
4300
--4900
----
4
6
8
7600
8800
10100
5800
7000
7900
6100
7300
8200
4900
5500
6100
4900
5500
6400
5200
5800
6400
-7000
7600
10
12
14
11000
11900
12200
8500
9400
9800
9100
9800
10100
6400
6700
6700
7000
7300
7600
7700
7300
7600
7900
8200
8500
16
20
24
12800
14000
14900
10100
11100
11900
10700
11600
12200
7000
7300
7600
8200
8800
9400
8200
8800
9400
8800
9400
9800
MAXIMUM SPAN (mm)
BURIED PIPING AND CROSSINGS

8.1

8.1.1
General
The minimum design wall thickness for buried piping shall be
determined by the following design formula:
t = pipe design wall thickness (mm)
t=
PD
2SF
P = design pressure (kPa)

D = pipe outside diameter (mm)
S = specified minimum yield strength (kPa)
F = design factor (0.80)
8.1.2
Minimum Wall Thickness

Notwithstanding 8.1.1, the minimum thickness for buried piping shall
be:
TABLE 8.1.2.A -- MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS, BURIED PIPING
Pipe Size (NPS)
Pipe Wall Thickness (mm)
<6
6 - 14
16 - 30
per Appendix A
6.35
7.92

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 38 of 44

8.1.3
Road Crossings
Notwithstanding 8.1.1 and 8.1.2, the minimum requirements for
buried, uncased road crossing piping shall be (based on 1.2 m of
cover):
TABLE 8.1.3.A -- MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD CROSSINGS
Pressure Class
PN 50 (ANSI 300)
PN 100 (ANSI 600)
8.2
8.3
Size (NPS)
Min. Thickness (mm)
20
24
30
10
12
16
20
24 - 30
7.92
9.53
12.7
7.92
9.53
9.53
9.53
12.7
Min. Grade
241
241
241
290
359
359
Location and Alignment

8.2.1
General
Wherever possible, buried piping should be located in straight runs
on flat ground. Steep slopes should be avoided. In areas where
steep slopes cannot be avoided, piping should be located such that it
follows the fall line of the slope.
8.2.2
Road Crossings
Where buried piping crosses a road, the angle of intersection should
be as near to 90 degrees as possible. In no case should it be less
than 30 degrees. The crossing piping should be uncased.
Pipe Clearances
8.3.1
Minimum Cover
Piping should be buried at a constant depth below grade with a
minimum cover as given in Table 8.3.1.A (Measured from the top of
pipe to the top of the surface).
TABLE 8.3.1.A -- MINIMUM DEPTH OF COVER
Location
under bottom of ditches
non travelled surfaces
road crossings
Minimum Cover
0.9 m
1.0 m
1.2 m

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 39 of 44

FIGURE 8.3.1.A -- ROAD CROSSING
8.3.2
Minimum Crossing Clearances

Where lines cross the angle of intersection should be as near to 90
degrees as possible. At the point of crossing, a minimum clearance
of 300 mm should be maintained between the two lines.
8.3.3
Minimum Lateral Clearances

Lines running parallel should be buried at the same elevation with
minimum lateral clearances shown in Table 8.3.3.A. Where lines are
located at different elevations, the lateral spacing shall be increased
such that an excavation extending from the lower most pipe, along a
45 line, does not intersect the bedding of the upper pipe, (Figure
8.3.3.A).
TABLE 8.3.3.A -- MINIMUM LATERAL CLEARANCES
Pipe Size
< NPS 6
NPS 6
Clearance (mm)
600
1000
Figure 8.3.3.A -- LATERAL CLEARANCE ON PIPING AT UNEQUAL ELEVATIONS

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 40 of 44

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 41 of 44
8.4
Backfill
With the exception of bored sections or piping installed in compressible soils
all buried piping should be backfilled in a manner consistent with the crosssection illustrated in Figure 8.3.3.A. The bedding material should be sand or
fine sand and gravel. If the native soils excavated for the trench are
unsuitable or cannot otherwise be screened, the sand bedding shall be
imported from an appropriate borrow site. Bedding should be placed around
the pipe in a manner to prevent damage to the coating and mechanically
compacted using vibratory equipment to 95% standard Proctor maximum
dry density.
9.0 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

9.1
Exposed Piping
All external surfaces of exposed, carbon steel piping shall be coated in
accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard GC3101.
9.2
Buried Piping
9.2.1
General
All external surfaces of buried, carbon steel piping shall be coated in
accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard GC3102.
Alternative coating systems are listed in Appendix A.
9.2.2
Girth Weld Coatings

Girth welds and other uncoated pipe and fittings on pre-coated piping
shall be coated in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
Standard GC3103.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 42 of 44
10.0 INSULATION
10.1 Insulation Materials and Application
Insulation materials, including insulating cement and insulation covering,
shall not contain asbestos. Approved insulation materials are listed in
Appendix A.
10.1.1 Exterior Piping
Piping shall generally be insulated with preformed mineral wool or
spun glass fibre with the following exceptions:
a)
all piping up to 2150 mm above grade shall be insulated with

calcium silicate (where the pipe goes underground, the calcium
silicate shall stop 300 mm above grade per 10.1.3).
b)
any piping that is exposed to spray or moisture shall be

insulated with cellular glass type insulation.
10.1.2 Interior Piping

Piping located within enclosed buildings, with the exception of those
circumstances mentioned in 10.1.1 b). Shall be insulated with
preformed mineral wool or spun glass fibre.
10.1.3 Buried Piping
Buried piping shall be insulated with cellular glass foam from 300 mm
above grade to a depth of 1 m below grade. Unless otherwise
required by heat loss, piping extending below this depth shall not be
insulated.
10.1.4 Vessels and Tanks
Vessels shall be insulated with mineral wool blanket insulation. For
tanks or vessels installed on or within 1 m of the ground, the bottom
600 mm of insulation shall be cellular glass.
10.1.5 Valves and Equipment
Valves and equipment shall be insulated with prefabricated, reusable
boxes of insulated fabric covers that can be entirely removed for
maintenance. Valve stems shall remain exposed. Prefabricated
boxes shall use either calcium silicate or mineral wool for insulation.
10.1.6 Personnel Protection
Piping and equipment with operating temperatures above 651C shall
be insulated to protect personnel.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 43 of 44

10.2 Insulation Thickness
Unless higher operating temperatures warrant greater thickness, the
thickness of thermal insulation shall be in accordance with Table 10.2.A.
TABLE 10.2.A -- MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS (mm)
Pipe Size (NPS)
6
8 - 20
24 - 30
1
1 - 4
Insulation Class
Energy conservation*
25
40
50
50
65
Personnel Protection
25
25
25
40
40
* Thickness is based on a maximum operating temperature of 95C
10.3 Insulation Cladding and Accessories

Components of dissimilar metals subject to galvanic corrosion shall not be
brought into contact with each other. Plated or clad accessories shall not be
used. Cladding and insulation accessories shall conform to Appendix A.
10.4 Surface Preparation
Piping and equipment surfaces shall be prepared and primed in accordance
with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard GC3101. Insulated piping, with
the exception of any exposed surfaces such a flanges or nozzles, shall be
top coated.
10.5 Application of Insulation
The application of insulation shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc. Standard MP3102.

MP1110
Revision 3
January 21, 2000
Page 44 of 44
11.0 EXAMINATION AND TESTING

This section outlines the minimum mandatory examination and testing
requirements for station piping.
11.1 Examinations
All nondestructive examinations (visual, radiographic, liquid penetrant and
magnetic particle) shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
Standard MP3901.
11.2 Testing
All pressure piping and atmospheric drain systems shall be hydrostatically
tested in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP4111.
Where pre-tested assemblies are installed, the numbers of "tie-in" welds not
subjected to a pressure test shall be minimized to the extent possible.

STATION PIPE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

MP 2110, Revision 1, July 1996

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 1 of 11
Title: STATION PIPE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
1.1
General ...................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Size, Grade, and Category ........................................................................ 3

1.2.1 Diameter and Wall Thickness.......................................................... 3
1.2.2 Grade .............................................................................................. 3
1.2.3 Category ......................................................................................... 3
2.0
3.0
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 4
3.1
Analysis, Heat ............................................................................................ 4
3.2
Analysis, Product ....................................................................................... 4
3.3
Heat ........................................................................................................... 4
3.4
Killed Steel ................................................................................................. 4
3.5
Supplier...................................................................................................... 4
3.6
NPS ........................................................................................................... 4
3.7
Pipe............................................................................................................ 5
3.8
3.7.1 Electric Fusion Welded Pipe ........................................................... 5

3.7.2 Electric Resistance Welded (ERW) ................................................. 5
3.7.3 Furnace Butt-Welded, Continuous Welded ..................................... 5
3.7.4 Double Submerged-Arc Welded (DSAW) ....................................... 5
3.7.5 Seamless ........................................................................................ 5
Skelp .......................................................................................................... 5
3.9
SMYS......................................................................................................... 6
3.10
Station Piping ............................................................................................. 6
4.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................... 6
5.0
MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE .................................................................... 6
5.1
Deoxidation Practice .................................................................................. 6
5.2
Pipe Manufacture ....................................................................................... 6

5.2.1 Material Specification ...................................................................... 6
5.2.2 Process of Manufacture .................................................................. 6
5.2.3 Maximum Cold Expansion .............................................................. 7
6.0
CHEMICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 7

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 2 of 11

6.1
General ...................................................................................................... 7
6.2
Intentional additions ................................................................................... 8
7.0
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES .............................................................................. 8
8.0
WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION, AND TOLERANCES ....................................... 8
8.1
Plant Access .............................................................................................. 8
8.2
Rejection .................................................................................................... 9
8.3
Defects....................................................................................................... 9
8.4
8.3.1 Plain Dents ...................................................................................... 9

8.3.2 Laminations ..................................................................................... 9
8.3.3 Undercuts ........................................................................................ 9
8.3.4 Other Defects .................................................................................. 9
Length Tolerance ..................................................................................... 10
9.0
SHIPPING .......................................................................................................... 10
9.1
General .................................................................................................... 10
9.2
Weld Seams ............................................................................................ 10
9.3
Metal Contact ........................................................................................... 10
10.0
DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING ............................................................. 11
10.1
Marking .................................................................................................... 11
10.2
Information Required ............................................................................... 11

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 3 of 11
1.0 SCOPE
1.1
General
This standard covers welded and seamless steel pipe primarily intended for
use in station piping systems. This standard does not cover line pipe for
main line applications. This pipe will comply with all the requirements of
Canadian Standards Association standard CSA Z245.1-95, Steel Line Pipe
and this standard. Pipe that conforms to all of the requirements of CSA
Z245.1-95 but does not comply with all of the requirements of this standard
may be acceptable subject to the discretion of Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
1.2
Size, Grade, and Category

1.2.1
Diameter and Wall Thickness

This standard covers pipe having sizes from NPS : to NPS 30. The
diameters and wall thicknesses shall be as given in ANSI B36.10.
1.2.2
Grade
This standard covers pipe from grade 207 to 359 inclusive.
1.2.3
Category
This standard covers Category I pipe, per CSA Z662.

Where reference is made to other publications, such references shall be
considered to refer to the latest edition of that publication. Some reference
publications are supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific requirements in
this standard; therefore, reference publications should be applied only in the
context of this standard.
ANSI B36.10
Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
API Spec 5L
Specification for Line Pipe
API RP 5LI
Recommended Practice for Railroad Transportation of Line

Pipe
ASTM A530
General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy

Steel Pipe
ASTM A53
Seamless and ERW Carbon Steel Pipe
ASTM A106
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 4 of 11

ASTM A333
Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low Temperature

Service
CSA Z662
CSA Z245.1
Steel Line Pipe
National Energy Board Act, Onshore Pipeline Regulation
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
Analysis, Heat
The chemical analysis reported by the steel producer as being representative
of the heat of steel.
3.2
Analysis, Product
The chemical analysis made on a sample taken from the finished product or
material representative of the finished product. Also known as check
analysis.
3.3
Heat
Heat shall mean material produced from the same batch of steel tapped from
a melting furnace, rolled into plate or coil using the same rolling practice, and
made into pipe using the same forming, welding and expanding procedures.
3.4
Killed Steel
Steel treated with aluminum and silicon or other deoxidisers to minimize gas
evolution during cooling.
3.5
Supplier
The term Supplier as used in this specification shall mean those who have
contracted to provide pipe and shall include their facilities.
3.6
NPS
NPS means nominal pipe size, and the NPS system of nominal size

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 5 of 11

3.7
Pipe
A pressure-tight cylinder used to convey a fluid or to transmit a fluid
pressure. Types of pipe, defined according to the method of manufacture,
are defined as follows:
3.8
3.7.1
Electric Fusion Welded Pipe

Pipe produced from coiled skelp, having a longitudinal butt joint
wherein coalescence is produced by manual or automatic electricarc welding. The weld may be single (welded from one side) or
double (welded from inside and outside) and may be made with or
without the addition of filler metal.
3.7.2
Electric Resistance Welded (ERW)

Pipe produced from coiled skelp, having a longitudinal butt joint
wherein coalescence is produced by heat obtained from the
resistance of the pipe to the flow of current in a circuit of which the
pipe is a part.
3.7.3
Furnace Butt-Welded, Continuous Welded

Pipe produced from coiled skelp, having a longitudinal butt joint forge
welded by the mechanical pressure developed in passing the hotformed and edge-heated skelp through a set of round pass welding
rolls.
3.7.4
Double Submerged-Arc Welded (DSAW)

Pipe produced from coiled skelp or discrete plates, having a
longitudinal butt joint produced by at least two passes, one which is
on the inside of the pipe. Coalescence is produced by heating with
an electric arc or arcs between the bare metal electrode or
electrodes and the work. The welding is shielded by a blanket of
granular fusible material on the work. Pressure is not used and filler
metal for the welds is obtained from the electrodes.
3.7.5
Seamless
Pipe produced by piercing a billet followed by rolling or drawing, or
both.
Skelp
The hot-rolled plate or coil that is used to form pipe.

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 6 of 11

3.9
SMYS
SMYS means Specified Minimum Yield Strength. This is the minimum
yield strength prescribed by the specification or standard under which a
material is purchased.
3.10 Station Piping

This includes all pipe, components and any appurtenances at Pump Stations,
Tank Farms and Terminals downstream from the first station isolating valve
or sectionalizing valve within the station.
4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

To the extent that chemical composition and skelp rolling practice affects field
weldability using conventional pipeline cellulosic welding procedures, the Supplier
shall ensure fitness of the pipe for joining lengths into a conventional oil pipeline.
5.0 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE

5.1
Deoxidation Practice
All pipe manufactured to this specification shall be made from fully-killed
steel. Silicon is an acceptable deoxidizer, but aluminum shall also be used
for grain refinement.
5.2
Pipe Manufacture
5.2.1
Material Specification
This standard covers pipe made to the requirements of CSA
Standard Z245.1. Where such line pipe is not available, pipe that is
manufactured in accordance with API Standard 5L, ASTM A53,
ASTM A106, or ASTM A333 (grade 6 only) shall be permitted.
5.2.2
Process of Manufacture
Only pipe produced by the submerged arc welding (SAW), high
frequency electric resistance welding (HFERW) and seamless
manufacturing processes are acceptable. Pipe produced by furnace
butt-welding or continuous welding and electric fusion welding
processes are specifically prohibited. For submerged arc welded
pipe, the pipe shall contain a single straight seam using at least two
weld passes. At least one pass shall be made from the inside and at
least one pass shall be made from the outside.

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 7 of 11

5.2.3
Maximum Cold Expansion

Where pipe is cold expanded, the maximum nominal expansion shall
be no more than 1.5 percent, calculated as follows:
(O.D. after expansion) - ( O.D. prior to expansion)
O.D. prior to expansion
= % Expansion
6.0 CHEMICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS

6.1
General
Chemical composition based on both heat and product (check) analysis shall
fall within the limits established in Table 6.1.A.
TABLE 6.1.A -- CHEMICAL COMPOSITION REQUIREMENTS
COMPOSITION
Element
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulfur
Silicon
Niobium1
Vanadium
Aluminum
Copper
Chromium
Molybdenum
Nickel
Boron
C Equivalents
PIPE
Symbol
C
Mn
P
S
Si
Nb
V
Al
Cu
Cr
Mo
Ni
B
CECSA2
Grade 241
0.18
1.35
0.023
0.025
0.35
0.070
0.070
0.060
0.30
0.25
0.50
0.20
0.0005
0.36
> Grade 241

0.15
1.35
0.023
0.025
0.35
0.070
0.070
0.060
0.30
0.25
0.50
0.20
0.0005
0.36
1) Niobium (Nb) is also know as Columbium (Cb)

2) Carbon equivalent (CECSA) per CSA or Yurioka Formula:
Mn Si Cu Ni Cr + Mo +V + Nb
+ +
+ +
+ 5B
CE CSA = C + F
6
24
15
20
5

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 8 of 11
TABLE 11.8.B -- COMPLIANCE FACTOR (F)

C. Content
C. Content
C. Content
C. Content
<0.06/0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.53/0.54
0.56
0.58
0.62
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.66
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.85
0.88
0.92
0.94
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.21/>0.21
0.96
0.97
0.98
0.99/1.00
6.2
Intentional additions
No deliberate additions of boron are allowed. All elements listed in Table
6.1.A of and any other intentionally added elements shall be reported in the
mill test certificates and shall be to the same number of decimal points as
shown. The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using the formula above.
7.0 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

The yield strength of each specimen shall not exceed the specified value by more
than 100 MPa. Mill tests with higher yield strengths may be accepted at Kinder
Morgan Canada Inc.'s discretion. The ratio of yield strength to tensile strength of
each test specimen shall not exceed the following:
TABLE 7.1.A -- REQUIRED RATIO OF
YIELD STRENGTH TO TENSILE STRENGTH
Process
Ratio
Seamless
0.90
HFERW
0.93
DSAW
0.85
8.0 WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION, AND TOLERANCES

8.1
Plant Access
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. representatives will conduct audit checks as
deemed necessary by themselves to ensure compliance with these
specifications. This shall be done without interfering unnecessarily with
operations.

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 9 of 11

The Supplier shall permit the examination by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. of
all test records and specimens made as a production control during the
manufacture of skelp and pipe.
8.2
Rejection
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. authorized inspection representatives have the
authority to reject any pipe that does not comply with these specifications.
Pipe will not be accepted for inspection by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
unless it is free inside and outside of all oil, grease, excessive rust, flux or
caustic substances. Pipe that is not free of rust, flux, etcetera shall be shot
blasted, sand blasted, or otherwise cleaned in a manner acceptable to Kinder
Morgan Canada Inc. enabling an adequate inspection. Heat and pipe
number identification shall be maintained.
8.3
Defects
In addition to the requirements of CSA Z245.1, finished pipe shall be free of
the following defects:
8.3.1
Plain Dents
All body dents of depth greater than 3.5 mm or weld dents of a depth
greater than 1.5 mm shall be cut out as a cylinder.
8.3.2
Laminations
Laminations extending into the bevel face of the pipe and having
either a transverse dimension exceeding 6 mm or an accumulated
length exceeding 6 mm in the same plane in any 50 mm sector of the
circumference, are considered defects. Pipe containing such defects
shall be cut back until all such lamination is removed.
8.3.3
Undercuts
The maximum length of an undercut to be repaired by grinding and
welding is 25 mm. The maximum depth of a repairable defect shall
not exceed 12.5% of the specified wall thickness.
8.3.4
Other Defects
Imperfections which have a depth less than 12.5% of the specified
wall thickness shall be given one of the following two dispositions:
a)
All stress raising imperfections such as sharp notches, gouges,

scores, slivers, etcetera shall be ground to vanishing. The
remaining wall thickness shall not be less than 92% of the
specified wall thickness or the affected area shall be cut out as

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 10 of 11

a cylinder. Ground areas shall be contained within a 100 mm
diameter circle. Only one such area will be allowed per pipe
joint.
b)
8.4
All isolated non-stress raising imperfections (e.g. round

bottomed pits) are acceptable without grinding.
Length Tolerance
Tolerances on length shall be as given in Table 8.4.A.
TABLE 8.4.A -- LENGTH TOLERANCES
Length
Nominal 12 m
Nominal 18 m
Nominal 24 m
Specified Lengths in Entire Shipment (m)

Minimum
Minimum Average
Maximum
8.10
15.10
15.10
10.70
16.00
21.40
13.70
19.80
25.30
Note: Unless otherwise specified, the minimum average length shall be 12.0m.
9.0
SHIPPING
9.1
General
Care shall be taken to ensure that pipe is stored, loaded, and transported in
such a manner as to avoid damage. The occurrence of critical stresses and,
possibly, of fatigue of the pipe while in transit shall be avoided.
9.2
Weld Seams
The weld seam of submerged arc welded pipe shall not contact any part of
the separator blocks. No weld seam shall contact any part of the railway car
or truck trailer. Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of
circumferential welds.
9.3
Metal Contact
For submerged arc welded pipe there shall be no metal to metal contact
between adjacent pipe. Tie-down chains may be used provided that they do
not come into direct contact with the pipe. A minimum separation between
pipe and bulkhead shall be maintained at 300 mm.

MP2110
Revision 1
July 10, 1996
Page 11 of 11
10.0 DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING

10.1 Marking
Each length of pipe shall be permanently marked with the following
information ( die-stamped marks shall not be permitted on the pipe ):
a)
Manufacturer's name or mark;
b)
Standard designation ( e.g. CSA Z245.1, API 5L );
c)
Specified outside diameter ( NPS or mm );
d)
Specified wall thickness ( mm );
e)
Pipe grade designation;
f)
Process of manufacture ( S,E,F per API and CSA );
g)
Heat treatment ( HN,HQ,HS,HA per API and CSA );
h)
Hydrostatic test pressure;
i)
Heat number.
10.2 Information Required

Prior to acceptance of the piping, the pipe mill test certificate shall be
submitted for approval. The mill test certificate shall include the following
information:
a)
Heat and product analysis for elements given in Section 6.0, or other
intentionally added elements and those appearing in the carbon
equivalent formula;
b)
Pipe body tensile test results for yield strength, tensile strength and
percent elongation;
c)
Transverse weld tensile test results;
d)
e)
Root bend test results for SAW pipe;
f)
Declaration that the pipe is made from killed steel;
g)
HAZ hardness test results for ERW pipe.
SHEET
MP 2110 -- PIPE DATA SHEET

REV
APPLICATION
ITEM
SIZE
(NPS)
CATEGORY
THICKNESS
(mm)
MATERIAL & GRADE
PROCESS OF
MANUFACTURE
JOINT
LENGTH (m)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE

AMBIENT TEMP. RANGE
-29oC to 50oC
OPERATING TEMP. RANGE
-5oC to 25oC
FLUIDS HANDLED
crude oil
methanol
diesel
M.T.B.E.
gasoline
condensate
heavy crude oil
DOCUMENTATION
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION REQUIREMENTS

Symbol
Gr. 207,241
Gr. A,B
Gr. 6 (A333)
Gr. 290 to 359

Gr. X42 to 52
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulfur
Silicon
Niobium
Vanadium
Aluminum
Copper
Chromium
Molybdenum
Nickel
Boron
C
Mn
P
S
Si
Nb
V
Al
Cu
Cr
Mo
Ni
B
0.18
1.35
0.023
0.025
0.35
0.070
0.070
0.060
0.30
0.25
0.50
0.20
0.0005
0.15
1.35
0.023
0.025
0.35
0.070
0.070
0.060
0.30
0.25
0.50
0.20
0.0005
Carbon
Equivalents
CECSA
0.36
0.36
Element
The mill test certificate furnished with

the pipe shall include:
a)
Heat and product analysis for all

elements
given
left,
other
intentionally added elements and
those in the carbon equivalent
formula;
b)
Pipe body tensile test results for

yield strength, tensile strength and
percent elongation;
c)
Transverse weld tensile test results

for tensile strength;
d)
e)
Root bend test results for SAW pipe;
f)
Declaration that the pipe is made

from killed steel;
g)
HAZ hardness test results for ERW

pipe.

SMALL PIPELINE VALVES

MP2301, Revision 0, April 2007

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 1 of 9
Title: SMALL PIPELINE VALVES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 2
1.1
General ...................................................................................................... 2
1.2
Size and Pressure Class............................................................................ 2
1.2.1 Size ............................................................................................................. 2
1.2.2 Pressure Class ............................................................................................ 2
1.3
Category .................................................................................................... 2
1.4
End Configuration ...................................................................................... 2
DESIGN ................................................................................................................ 3
3.1
Gate Valves ............................................................................................... 3
3.2
Floating Ball Valves ................................................................................... 3
3.2.1 Required Features ...................................................................................... 4
3.2.2 Optional Features ....................................................................................... 4
3.3
Check Valves ............................................................................................. 5
3.3
Operating Conditions ................................................................................. 5
MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE .................................................................... 4
4.1
Fluids Handled ........................................................................................... 4
4.2
Materials .................................................................................................... 6
4.3
Valve Coatings ........................................................................................... 7
CHEMICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 8
MECHANICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 9
HYDROSTATIC TESTING ................................................................................... 9
DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING ............................................................... 9

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 2 of 9
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
General
This standard covers requirements for small steel gate, ball, and check
valves intended for use in liquid petroleum pipeline systems. Needle
valves or other valves associated with instrumentation are not included in
the scope of this standard. All valves shall comply with the requirements
of this standard as applicable.
1.2
Size and Pressure Class

1.2.1 Size
NPS to NPS 2
1.2.2 Pressure Class
2000 and 3000 WOG
2.0
1.3
Category
This standard covers valves built for ASME B31.4 or Category I service
per CSA Z662.
1.4
End Configuration
This standard covers valves with threaded end configurations. Valve end
connections shall be internally taper threaded as specified in ANSI/ASME
B1.20.1.
considered to refer to the latest edition and any revisions thereto approved by the
organization issuing that publication.
Some reference publications are
supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific requirements in this standard;
therefore, reference publications should be applied only in the context of this
standard.
API 602
API 607
ASME B16.34
ANSI B31.4
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1
Compact Steel Gate Valves

Fire Test for Soft Seated Quarter Turn Valves
Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid
Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids
Pipe Threads, General Purpose

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 3 of 9

CSA Z662
SSPC-SP 6
SSPC-SP 10
SSPC-PS Guide 12.00
SSPC-Paint 30
MSS-SP-55
3.0

Commercial Blast Cleaning
Near-White Blast Cleaning
Guide to Zinc-Rich Coating Systems
Weld-Though Inorganic Zinc Primer
Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves
DESIGN
3.1
Gate Valves
The following features are required:
a)
meet the requirements of API 602;
3.2
b)
outside screw and yoke;
c)
bolted bonnet with adjustable packing and rising stem;
d)
forged or cast steel body;
e)
250 BHN minimum hardness on body and disc seating surfaces,

with a minimum difference of 50 BHN between the two surfaces.
Floating Ball Valves

3.2.1 Required Features
a)
top or end entry body design;
b)
bolted body or one piece (unibody) design;
c)
floating ball design with blow-out proof stem;
d)
forged or cast steel body;
e)
position indication to show open or closed position;
f)
designed to prevent rotation greater than 90, the stop must
be visually accessible without depressurizing or
disassembling the valve;
g)
a device for locking the valve in the open or closed position;
h)
fire safe design per API 607;
i)
stainless steel ball with a minimum of 12% chromium.
3.2.2 Optional Features
a)
internal body cavity vent through the ball;
b)
round port, full bore pattern.

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 4 of 9

3.3
Check Valves
The following features are required:
a)
regular swing or in-line (spring assisted) type;
b)
soft seat seal;
c)
permanent flow direction arrow on the valve body;
d)
cast or forged steel body.
3.4
Operating Conditions
The valve shall be designed to operate under the conditions listed in Table
3.4.A.
TABLE 3.4.A OPERATING CONDITIONS
Valve
Piping System
MOP
2000 WOG
PN 100 (ANSI 600) or less
9930 kPa
(1440 psi)
Design (Ambient)
Temperature
-29C to 38C
(-20F to 100F)
14,890 kPa
3000 WOG
PN150 (ANSI 900)
(2160 psi)
Notes: Normal Product Temperature Range -5C to 38C (23F to 100F).
Valves are in a CSA Z662 Cat. I and/or B31.4 service.
Valves may be subject to vacuum conditions up to -50 kPa (-7.25 psi)
gauge.
MOP (maximum operating pressure) is equivalent to maximum differential
pressure across the valve.
4.0
MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE

4.1
Fluids Handled
The valve materials shall be compatible with fluids listed in Table 4.1.A.

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 5 of 9
TABLE 4.1.A FLUID PROPERTIES

Petroleum Type
Viscosity
Sediment %*
H2S (ppm)
Specific Gravity
<1
0.69 0.74
0.5 0.7
Diesel, Jet Fuel
<1
0.81 0.87
2-7
Synthetic Crude
0 0.01
<1
0.86 0.88
6 - 10
0.01 0.02
< 10
0.82 0.85
4 - 15
Light Sour Crude
0.01 0.03
< 250
0.84 0.87
5 - 20
Heavy Crude
0.01 0.02
< 20
0.9 0.94
150 - 350
Gasoline, IsoOctane, Alkylate
Light Sweet
Crude
(cSt)
*The product may contain grit up to a particle size of 1.27 mm (0.05).
4.2
Materials
The valve shall be designed to meet or exceed material specifications as
listed in Tables 4.2.A and 4.2.B. Equivalent or alternate materials may be
acceptable if approved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 6 of 9
TABLE 4.2.A ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS FOR INTERNAL COMPONENTS

Valve
Component
Closure
Element
Stem/
Shaft
Seats/
Slips
Seat Inserts
Gaskets
Elastomers
Packing
Bolting
Springs/
Pins
Gate
ASTM A36
ASTM A105
ASTM A537
Valve Type
Ball
ASTM A148
ASTM A350 LF2
ASTM A105
Check
ASTM A36
ASTM A216 Gr.
WCC, WCB
ASTM A105
AISI 4130
AISI 4140
ASTM A276 Gr. T304, T310, T410, T416, T420
ASTM 582 Gr. T582
ASTM A36
ASTM A182 Gr. F6a, F304, 310, F316
ASTM A217 Gr. CA15
ASTM A351 Gr. CF8, CF8M, CN7M
ASTM A395
ASTM A537
ASTM A572
Nitrile, nylon, teflon, or viton or equivalent as recommended by the
manufacturer based on operating conditions.
Gaskets shall be non-asbestos type manufactured in accordance with
ANSI B16.21.
Nitrile or viton as per manufacturers recommendation based on
operating conditions.
Packing shall be non-asbestos type per manufacturers
recommendation based on operating conditions.
Studs ASTM A193 B7
Nuts ASTM A194 2H
AISI 302, 304, or 316 Stainless steel

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 7 of 9
TABLE 4.2.B ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE CONTAINING

COMPONENTS
Bodies, Bonnets,
and Covers
4.3
5.0
Castings
ASTM A216 Gr. WCB, WCC
ASTM A217 Gr. WC1, CA15
ASTM A352 Gr. LCB, LCC,
LC1, LC2, LC2.1, LC3
ASTM A487 Gr. 1, Cl. A & B
ASTM A487 Gr. 2, Cl. A & B
ASTM A487 Gr. 4, Cl. A, B &
E
ASTM A487 Gr. CA6NM
ASTM A487 Gr. CA15M
ASTM A757 (all grades
except B3Q & B4N)
Forgings
ASTM A105
ASTM A181 Cl. 60, 70
ASTM A182 Gr. F1, F2, F11,
F12
ASTM A350 Gr. LF1, LF2,
LF3
ASTM A541 Cl. 1, 4
CSA Z245.11
CSA Z245.12
Valve Coatings
Unless otherwise specified, all valves shall be cleaned, primed, and top
coated in accordance with the Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. standard
specified on the data sheet.
CHEMICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS

The valve manufacturer shall submit a chemical analysis (ladle, check or product
analysis) for all pressure containing components. The chemical analysis shall
include a report on the elements listed in Table 5.0.A as well as any other
intentionally added elements.
The chemical composition of all pressure
containing components shall be in accordance with the applicable material
standard or specification.
TABLE 5.0.A CHEMICAL COMPOSITION REQUIREMENTS
Element
Symbol
Element
Symbol
Carbon
C
Aluminum
Al
Manganese
Mn
Copper
Cu
Phosphorus
P
Chromium
Cr
Sulphur
S
Molybdenum
Mo
Silicon
Si
Nickel
Ni
Niobium
Nb
Boron
B
Vanadium
V
Carbon Equivalent
CE(1)
(1) The carbon equivalent (CE) shall be calculated using the CSA or Yurioka formula as
follows:

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 8 of 9
Mn Si Cu Ni Cr + Mo +V + Nb
+ +
+ +
+ 5B
CE CSA = C + F
24 15 20
5
6
Compliance factor (F) shall be as given in Table 5.0.B.

TABLE 5.0.B COMPLIANCE FACTOR (F)
Carbon Content
(%)
Less than 0.06
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
6.0
7.0
F
0.53
0.54
0.56
0.58
0.62
0.66
Carbon Content
(%)
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.16
F
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.88
0.92
Carbon Content
(%)
0.17
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.21
Greater than 0.21
F
0.94
0.96
0.97
0.98
0.99
1.00
MECHANICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS

6.1
General
Test results shall be submitted for mechanical properties of all pressurecontaining components or from the same type of material, manufactured
using the same procedures and heat treatment, at a frequency of one set
of tests per heat. Where the Manufacturer is other than the Vendor name
appearing on the mill test certificate, the name of the Manufacturer and
date that the component was formed shall be included in the remarks.
6.2
Tensile Tests
The tensile properties of each pressure-containing part in the valve shall
be in accordance with the applicable material standard or specification.
HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Hydrostatic testing shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
Standard MP4301, Valve Test Procedure. Prior to testing, a visual examination
shall be performed by the valve supplier of all castings of pressure containing
components to assure conformance with MSS-SP-55. Castings containing repair
welding that was made to correct hydrostatic test defects shall be stress relieved
or heat treated after welding.

MP2301
Revision 0
April 2007
Page 9 of 9
8.0
DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING

As a minimum, the Vendor shall provide the information listed in Table 8.0.A.
The information for approval shall be submitted within two weeks after the award
of the purchase order. In the case of short lead time valves, the information for
approval shall be provided with the proposal. All vendor information shall be
submitted to the location specified on the purchase order.
TABLE 8.0.A -- VENDOR INFORMATION REQUIRED
Information Provided With Proposal
Information Provided For Approval
Information Provided Upon Delivery of Valve

Flow coefficient for liquids (Cv);
If specifed, confirmation that the valve design includes integral
pressure relief;
Identification of the coating system provided per subsection 4.3.1;
Outline dimensional drawing;
Identification of all materials used for pressure-containing parts;
Identification of all materials used in the valve trim;
Identification of all elastomers and non-metallic valve parts;
(1)
Heat or product analysis for all elements given in Section 5.0 and
other intentionally added elements;
(1)
Tensile test results for yield strength, tensile strength, and

elongation for all pressure-containing parts;
Pressure test results for all testing requested;
Confirmation of visual inspection in accordance with MSS-SP-55.
An operation and maintenance manual.
(1)
If information is unavailable two weeks after the order date, it shall be provided at the earliest
possible date.
MP2301 GATE VALVE DATA SHEET
SHEET
REV
VALVE
TAG #(s)
PROJECT
TITLE
TO BE COMPLETED BY KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC. (Refer to MP1300)

Size (NPS)
Porting (check one)
Hydrostatic Test Standard
Pressure Class (WOG)

Regular Bore
Full Bore
MP4301
End Configuration
2000
3000
Threaded
Coating per Section 4.3

(specify standard)
Additional Requirements
TO BE COMPLETED BY THE VENDOR

Body
Gate
Stem
Seats
Bolting
Flow Coefficient (Cv)
Valve Materials (per Tables 4.2.A and 4.2.B)

Gaskets
Elastomers
Springs
Seat Inserts
Packing
Dimensional Drawing
Included (check one)
Yes
No
MP2301 FLOATING BALL VALVE DATA

SHEET
SHEET
REV
VALVE
TAG #(s)
PROJECT
TITLE

Size (NPS)
Body Construction
End Configuration
Porting (check one)
Internal Body Cavity Vent
Through Ball

Bolted
Unibody
Threaded
Regular Bore
Full Bore
Yes

Body Style (check one)
2000
3000
MP4301
Top Entry
End Entry

(specify standard)
No

Body
Ball
Trim
Stem
Seats

Gaskets
Elastomers
Bolting
Seat Inserts
Packing
Dimensional Drawing
Yes
No
MP2301 CHECK VALVE DATA SHEET
SHEET
REV
VALVE
TAG #(s)
PROJECT
TITLE

Size (NPS)
Type (check one)
Porting (check one)


Regular
Swing
In-Line
Regular Bore
Full Bore
MP4301
End Configuration (check

one)
2000
3000
Threaded

(specify standard)

Body
Disk/Plates
Shaft
Trim
Bolting

Gaskets
Elastomers
Springs
Pins
Dimensional Drawing
Yes
No

GENERAL PIPING FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS


MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 1 of 12
Title: GENERAL PIPING FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 4
3.1
Ambient Temperature ................................................................................ 4
3.2
Cold Bending ............................................................................................. 4
3.3
Hot Bending ............................................................................................... 4
3.4
Main Line Piping ........................................................................................ 4
3.5
NPS ........................................................................................................... 4
3.6
Pipeline ...................................................................................................... 4
3.7
Station Piping ............................................................................................. 4
WELDING ............................................................................................................. 5
4.1
Longitudinal Weld Seams .......................................................................... 5
4.2
Weld Spacing ............................................................................................. 5
4.3
Mitred Joints .............................................................................................. 5
4.4
Welded Valves ........................................................................................... 5
BRANCH CONNECTIONS ................................................................................... 6
5.1
General ...................................................................................................... 6
5.2
Branch Piping ............................................................................................ 6
5.3
Reinforcement Requirements .................................................................... 6
5.4
Inspection .................................................................................................. 6
FLANGES AND FITTINGS ................................................................................... 7
Slip-on Flanges .......................................................................................... 7
6.1
6.2
Flange Alignment ....................................................................................... 7
6.3
Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings ...................................................... 7
BENDS MADE FROM PIPE ................................................................................. 8
7.1
Minimum Bend Radius ............................................................................... 8
7.2
Bend Tolerances ........................................................................................ 8
ALIGNMENT......................................................................................................... 9
8.1
Piping Distortion ......................................................................................... 9
8.2
Cold Springing ........................................................................................... 9
8.3
Flanges ...................................................................................................... 9
8.4
Equipment Connection............................................................................... 9
FLANGED JOINTS ............................................................................................. 10
9.1
Flange Facings ........................................................................................ 10
9.2
Stud Length ............................................................................................. 10

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 2 of 12
10.0
9.3
Gaskets.................................................................................................... 10
9.4
Thread Compound ................................................................................... 10
9.5
Bolting ...................................................................................................... 11
PIPE SURFACE DEFECTS................................................................................ 12
10.1 Pipe Manufacturing Defects ..................................................................... 12
10.2 Dents ....................................................................................................... 12
10.3 Gouges and Grooves ............................................................................... 12
10.4 Arc Burns ................................................................................................. 12
10.5 Minimum Repair Section .......................................................................... 12

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 3 of 12

1.0
SCOPE
This standard covers mandatory requirements governing the fabrication and
assembly of piping systems. This a supplementary standard, and unless
otherwise specified, all other aspects of piping fabrication not covered by this
standard shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standards
MP3110, Station Piping Fabrication or MP3120, Pipeline Construction. This
standard is limited to systems transporting liquid hydrocarbons including: crude oil,
condensate, and liquid petroleum products. This standard excludes the joining of
piping and components for Highly Volatile Liquids.
All fabrication shall be completed in accordance with Canadian Standards
Association CAN/CSA Z662 standard, Oil And Gas Pipeline Systems. This
standard contains requirements that are in addition to CSA Z662.
2.0
REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS
MP2217
Induction Bending
MP3110
Station Piping Fabrication
MP3120
Pipeline Construction
MP3901
Joining Program

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 4 of 12

3.0
DEFINITIONS
3.1
Ambient Temperature
The temperature of the surrounding medium, usually used to refer to the
temperature of the air in which a structure is situated or a device operates.
3.2
Cold Bending
Bending of ferritic steels at a temperature below the transformation range.
3.3
Hot Bending
Bending of ferritic steels above the transformation range, but within a
temperature range consistent with the material and the intended service.
3.4
Main Line Piping

3.5
NPS
NPS means nominal pipe size; the NPS system of size designation is
contained in Standards prepared by the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers.
3.6
Pipeline
A line for the transmission of natural gas including branches, extensions and
attached appurtenances shall jointly or singly be referred to as the pipeline.
3.7
Station Piping
Any piping after the first valve off the mainline and before the last valve into
the mainline at a station.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 5 of 12

4.0
WELDING
Welding shall be performed by qualified welders in accordance qualified welding
procedure specifications, CSA Z662 and Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard
MP3901, Joining Program.
4.1
Longitudinal Weld Seams

Welded pipe shall be aligned such that the longitudinal weld seam is located
in the upper quadrant, 30N from vertical. Successive joints of pipe shall be
rotated to the left or the right to prevent the aligning of weld seams in
adjacent pipe sections.
4.2
Weld Spacing
Unless otherwise required by the piping design, the minimum pipe length
used in pipeline construction shall be 2 m and in no case shall the distance
between any two adjacent welds be less than 1 m.
4.3
Mitred Joints
Mitred joints are not permitted. Deflections of up to 2.0N caused by
misalignment are not considered to be mitred joints.
4.4
Welded Valves
Any valve trim that may be damaged during welding operations shall be
removed. The valve will be properly reassembled after the valve body has
sufficiently cooled.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 6 of 12

5.0
BRANCH CONNECTIONS
5.1
General
For "stub-in" branch connections, the hole cut for the branch shall equal the
inside diameter of the branch pipe. The material removed to create the hole
(coupon) shall be removed from the pipe. Branch connections shall be
directly joined to the carrier pipe with full penetration welds.
5.2
Branch Piping
When reinforced branch connections are used, the branch piping shall be
made from XS pipe. As a minimum, the XS pipe stub shall extend from the
run pipe to 150 mm past the re-pad or saddle outlet before any reduction in
wall thickness. Pad-type reinforcement shall be in accordance with the
requirements of CSA Z662.
5.3
Reinforcement Requirements
A vent hole shall be provided at the side of any pad, and not the crotch, to
reveal leakage and allow venting during welding and heat treatment. The
vent hole shall be plugged with a non-pressure retaining plug.
5.4
Inspection
The pressure containing weld shall be visually and non-destructively
examined prior to the installation of the re-pad. All branch connections to
headers NPS 16 and larger shall be visually inspected both internally and
externally.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 7 of 12

6.0
FLANGES AND FITTINGS

6.1
Slip-on Flanges
Raised face, weld neck flanges should be used for permanent piping.
Unless otherwise specified, the use of slip-on flanges is prohibited. If slip-on
flanges are specified, they shall be double welded (welded on the inside and
outside diameter). The slip-on flange face shall be positioned 3 mm plus the
nominal wall thickness of the pipe, past the end of the pipe. The welds shall
be applied so the flange face is free of weld spatter and does not require
refacing.
6.2
Flange Alignment
Flanges shall be installed so that the bolt holes straddle the vertical
centerline of the pipe and the flange face is perpendicular to the longitudinal
pipe centre-line.
6.3
Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings

Forged-steel, threaded and socket-welding fittings, including forged outlet
fittings, plugs, and unions shall be ANSI Class 3000. Cast iron and brass
fittings shall not be used for liquid hydrocarbon service.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 8 of 12

7.0
BENDS MADE FROM PIPE

7.1
Minimum Bend Radius

Cold pipe bends shall be limited to a minimum radius of 40 pipe diameters.
Bends made by induction heating shall be have minimum bend radii as listed
in Table 7.1.A.
TABLE 7.1.A -- MINIMUM INDUCTION BEND RADII
7.2
Pipe Size (NPS)
6-8
10
Minimum Radius (Pipe Diameters)
20
10
Bend Tolerances
Bends shall be made in such a manner as to preserve the cross- sectional
shape of the pipe and be free from buckling, cracks, or other damage. At
any point along the bend the pipe outside diameter shall not be reduced by
more than 2.5%. Induction bends shall be in accordance with Kinder
Morgan Canada Inc.. Standard MP2217, Induction Bending.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 9 of 12

8.0
ALIGNMENT
8.1
Piping Distortion
Any heating or distortion of piping or equipment to bring it into alignment for
joint assembly is prohibited.
8.2
Cold Springing
"Cold Springing" of piping shall not be permitted. Heating shall not be used
to close the gap to eliminate cold spring. Piping shall be installed in a stressfree condition.
8.3
Flanges
Prior to bolt-up, flange faces shall have the following shall have the following
minimum alignment:
8.3.1
with raised faces touching at one edge, the largest gap between the
faces at any point shall not exceed that listed in Table 5.1.3.A; and
8.3.2
flange holes shall be aligned within 3 mm maximum offset.

TABLE 8.3.A -- MAXIMUM OPENING AT RAISED FACE (mm)
8.4
Pipe
Size
(NPS)
PN 20
PN 50
PN 100
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
Flange Rating
2.5
3.0
3.0
10
3.0
3.5
3.5
12
3.5
4.0
4.0
14
4.0
4.0
4.5
16
4.5
4.5
5.0
18
5.0
5.0
5.5
20
5.5
5.5
6.0
24
6.5
6.5
6.5
30
7.5
8.0
8.0
Equipment Connection
Where pipe is connected to rotating equipment, the equipment shall be
aligned prior to connection of the piping. After connection of the piping, the
coupling alignment shall remain within 0.05 mm (0.002") TIR.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 10 of 12

9.0
FLANGED JOINTS
9.1
Flange Facings
Any damage to the gasket seating surface which would prevent gasket
seating shall be repaired, or the flange shall be replaced.
9.2
Stud Length
Studs shall extend completely through their nuts by at least two (2) threads.
Washers or other packing shall not be employed to use up excessive length
of flange bolts.
9.3
Gaskets
For flanged piping, new gaskets shall be used for every assembly operation
unless such assembly is intended solely for fit-up. Gaskets shall be new,
clean and free from foreign matter. No more than one gasket shall be used
between faces when assembling a flanged joint and no sealing compounds
shall be used with the gasket.
9.4
Thread Compound
All bolts and studs shall be coated with AJet Lube TF-15" thread sealing
compound (or approved equal) prior to being made up with nuts.

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 11 of 12

9.5
Bolting
Flange faces and gaskets shall be cleaned immediately prior to bolt-up.
Flange studs shall be tightened evenly in an alternating pattern, to achieve a
uniform gasket seating pressure. Misalignment shall not be corrected by
force or uneven bolt tightening. Only new studs shall be used. All bolts and
studs shall be tightened to the torque shown in Table 9.5.A as a minimum.
TABLE 9.5.A -- RECOMMENDED TORQUES FOR B7 STUDS
Nominal Stud Size
Threads
per inch
Torque
(mm)
(inches)
(ft. lbs.)
12.7
13
50 - 70
15.87
11
100 - 145
19.05
10
170 - 240
22.22
260 - 375
25.4
400 - 570
28.57
590 - 840
31.75
875 - 1250
38.1
1290 - 1850
41.27
1750 - 2500
44.45
2310 - 3300
47.62
2870 - 4100
50.8
3430 - 4900

MP3101
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 12 of 12
10.0 PIPE SURFACE DEFECTS

Where authorized, pipe surface defects may be repaired using procedures
approved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. The following defects shall be
completely removed:
10.1 Pipe Manufacturing Defects
All pipe manufacturing defects including laminations, pipe body cracking, or
cracks in the longitudinal weld.
10.2 Dents
All dents greater than 2% of the outside diameter, containing a stress
concentration, located at welds, or deeper than 6 mm. The depth of a dent
shall be measured as the gap between the lowest point of the dent and the
prolongation of the original contour of the pipe.
10.3 Gouges and Grooves
All gouges and grooves where grinding reduces the wall thickness to less
than 90% of the nominal wall thickness.
10.4 Arc Burns
The removal of any arc burns by grinding which reduces the wall thickness to
less than 90% of the nominal wall thickness (grinding in accordance with
clause 7.2.10.4 of CSA Z662).
10.5 Minimum Repair Section
Unless otherwise required by the piping design, the minimum pipe length
used in pipeline construction shall be 2 metres and in no case shall the
distance between any two adjacent welds be less than 1 metre (this
excludes pipe nipples and fittings). This shall include repairs requiring the
cutting out of a cylinder of pipe. The delineation of the repair section shall
meet the following requirements:
a)
No cut shall be closer than 300 mm to a defect.
b)
If a cut falls within 600 mm of a circumferential weld, the length of pipe to

be removed shall include the weld.
c)
If a branch connection falls within the section of pipe to be removed, a

minimum of 100 mm shall be maintained between the new branch
connection and any circumferential weld.

PIPING INSULATION REQUIREMENTS


MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 1 of 11
Title: PIPING INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 4
3.1
3.2
Main Line Piping ........................................................................................ 4
3.3
NPS ........................................................................................................... 4
3.4
Station Piping ............................................................................................. 4
3.5
WHMIS ...................................................................................................... 4
MATERIALS ......................................................................................................... 5
4.1
General ...................................................................................................... 5
4.2
External Piping ........................................................................................... 5
4.3
Internal Piping ............................................................................................ 5
4.4
Buried Piping ............................................................................................. 5
4.5
Vessels and Tanks .................................................................................... 5
4.6
Valves and Equipment ............................................................................... 6
4.7
Insulation Cladding .................................................................................... 6
ACCESSORIES FOR INSULATION SYSTEMS................................................... 7
5.1
General ...................................................................................................... 7
5.2
Tie Wire ..................................................................................................... 7
5.3
Fasteners ................................................................................................... 7
5.4
Bands and Clips ......................................................................................... 7
INSULATION APPLICATION ............................................................................... 8
6.1
General ...................................................................................................... 8
6.2
Surfaces Not Insulated............................................................................... 8
6.3
Surface Preparation ................................................................................... 8
6.4
Weather Protection .................................................................................... 8
6.5
Heat Tracing .............................................................................................. 8
6.6
Installation.................................................................................................. 8
6.7
Banding...................................................................................................... 9
CLADDING APPLICATION ................................................................................ 10
7.1
Banding.................................................................................................... 10
7.2
Side Lap................................................................................................... 10
7.3
Joints ....................................................................................................... 10
7.4
Cladding Overlap ..................................................................................... 10
7.5
Flanges .................................................................................................... 10

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 2 of 11

7.6
Tracing ..................................................................................................... 11

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 3 of 11
1.0 SCOPE
This standard covers mandatory requirements governing the installation of
Insulation on piping, vessels and equipment. This a supplementary standard, and
unless otherwise specified, all other aspects of piping fabrication not covered by
this standard shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard
MP3110, Station Piping Fabrication.
This standard is limited to systems
transporting liquid hydrocarbons including: crude oil, condensate and liquid
petroleum products.
Association standard CAN/CSA Z662, Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems. This

Some reference publications are supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific
Z662-99
American Society of Materials and Testing (ASTM)

ASTM A167
ASTM B209
ASTM C533
ASTM C547
ASTM C552
ASTM C592
Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel

Plate
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation
Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket Type Pipe
Insulation

GC3101
MP3110
External Coating of Piping, Components and Structural

Steel
Station Piping Fabrication.

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 4 of 11
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
Ambient Temperature
3.2
Main Line Piping

3.3
NPS
Engineers.
3.4
Station Piping
3.5
WHMIS
WHMIS means workplace hazardous materials information system.

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 5 of 11
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1
General
Insulation materials, including insulating cement and insulation covering,
shall not contain asbestos. All insulation application shall be carried out by
tradesmen skilled in the application of insulation. Approved insulation
materials are listed in Table 4.1.A.
TABLE 4.1.A -- INSULATION MATERIALS
Material
4.2
Material
Specification
Application
Mineral Wool
ASTM C547
Piping over 2150 mm above grade
Mineral Fibre Blanket
ASTM C592
Prefabricated boxes for vessels and equipment
Spun Glass Fibre
ASTM C547
Calcium Silicate
ASTM C533
Cellular Glass
ASTM C552
Buried piping up 300 mm above grade
External Piping
Piping shall generally be insulated with preformed mineral wool or spun glass
fibre with the following exceptions:
4.3
a)
all piping below 2150 mm above grade shall be insulated with calcium
silicate (where the pipe goes underground, the calcium silicate shall stop
300 mm above grade per 10.2.3);
b)
Any piping that is exposed to spray or moisture shall be insulated with

cellular glass type insulation.
Internal Piping
Piping located within enclosed buildings shall be insulated with preformed
mineral wool or spun glass fibre unless otherwise specified.
4.4
Buried Piping
Unless otherwise specified, buried piping shall be insulated with cellular
glass foam from 300 mm above grade to a depth of 1 m below grade. Piping
extending below this depth shall not require insulation.
4.5
Vessels and Tanks

Unless otherwise specified, vessels shall be insulated with mineral wool
blanket insulation. For tanks or vessels installed on or within 1 m of the
ground, the bottom 600 mm of insulation shall be cellular glass.

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 6 of 11

4.6
Valves and Equipment

Valves and equipment shall be insulated with prefabricated, removable
boxes or insulated fabric covers that can be entirely removed for
maintenance. Valve stems shall remain exposed. Prefabricated boxes shall
use either calcium silicate or mineral wool for insulation.
4.7
Insulation Cladding
Insulation cladding shall conform to requirements of Table 4.7.A.
TABLE 4.7.A -- INSULATION CLADDING
Material
Aluminum
ASTM B209 Types 3003-H14, 5005-H14
Stainless Steel
ASTM A167 Types 304, or 316
Minimum Thickness
(mm)
(inch)
4.4
0.016

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 7 of 11
5.0 ACCESSORIES FOR INSULATION SYSTEMS

5.1
General
Components of dissimilar metals subject to galvanic corrosion shall not be
brought into contact with each other. Unless otherwise specified, plated or
clad accessories shall not be used.
5.2
Tie Wire
Tie wire for the securing of insulation only shall be galvanized steel, stainless
steel or copper. The minimum diameter shall be 1.57 mm (0.062"). Copper
wire shall be soft drawn, galvanized and stainless steel wire shall be
annealed.
5.3
Fasteners
Sheet metal screws and rivets shall be stainless steel or aluminium. Screws
shall be self-tapping, #8 by 20 mm (") long.
5.4
Bands and Clips

Bands, seals, expansion springs and clips used for securing insulation or
cladding shall be stainless steel or aluminium. The minimum size of bands
shall be as shown in Table 5.4.A.
TABLE 5.4.A -- MINIMUM BAND SIZE
Equipment
Size
(mm)
(inch)
Pipe or vessels NPS 24 and less
10 x 0.4
x 0.015
Pipe greater than NPS 24
12.7 x 0.4
x 0.015
Vessels and Tanks greater than NPS 24
20 x 0.5
x 0.020

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 8 of 11
6.0 INSULATION APPLICATION

6.1
General
Insulation shall not be applied until coating, heat tracing and pressure testing
has been completed. If it is necessary to insulate a system before it is
tested, all welds, connections and flanges shall be left un-insulated until the
completion of pressure testing.
6.2
Surfaces Not Insulated

Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall not be insulated:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
6.3
equipment nozzles;
expansion joints;
nameplates (unless a duplicate is applied to the cladding);
pipe flanges, except on heat traced lines; and
safety valves.
Surface Preparation
Piping and equipment surfaces shall be prepared and primed in accordance
with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard GC3101, External Coating of
Piping, Components and Structural Steel. Insulated piping, with the
exception of any exposed surfaces such as flanges or nozzles, shall not be
top coated.
6.4
Weather Protection
All insulation shall be protected from moisture and weather before and during
application. If applied insulation should get wet before it is sealed, it shall be
thoroughly dried before it is sealed.
6.5
Heat Tracing
The insulation for heat traced lines shall be one pipe size larger to
accommodate the tracer.
6.6
Installation
Preformed insulation shall be installed as shown in Figure 6.6.A. All
insulation joints shall be butted together. Transverse joints shall be
staggered and all gaps in calcium silicate cellular glass foam insulations shall
be filled with insulating cement.

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 9 of 11

6.7
Banding
Insulation shall be secured with bands or wire ties every 600 mm. No less
than two ties shall be used to secure a single piece of insulation on straight
runs of pipe.
FIGURE 6.6.A -- PIPE INSULATION

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 10 of 11
7.0 CLADDING APPLICATION

7.1
Banding
Install cladding snugly and secure with the specified bands on 300 mm
centers. Lap all joints to the weather as shown in Figure 7.4.A. Tie wires
shall not be used in place or bands on external cladding.
7.2
Side Lap
The side lap shall be secured with screws at 100 mm centers.
7.3
Joints
Covers at the end of the run shall be banded. Screws shall not be used to
secure end covers. To allow for thermal expansion, screws shall not be used
at the ends of cladding sections.
7.4
Cladding Overlap
The laps in cladding shall be position to shed water as shown in Figure 7.4.A.
The extend of the overlap shall be as given in Table 7.4.A.
TABLE 7.4.A -- Cladding Lap
7.5
Piping Size
Minimum Lap
NPS 24
50 mm
> NPS 24
75 mm
Flanges
End bevels shall be lapped against the weather and secured with bands.
Sufficient clearance (A), as shown in Figure 7.5.A, shall be maintained
between the end of the flange and the end of the insulation to allow for the
removal of studs and nuts. Where specified, flanges shall be insulated with
removable boxes or insulated fabric covers.

MP3102
Revision 0
January 21, 2000
Page 11 of 11
FIGURE 7.5.A -- INSULATION AT FLANGES
7.6
Tracing
The insulation shall be sealed with silicone caulking at the beginning and end
and at the entry to instrument housings.

STATION PIPING FABRICATION


MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 1 of 16
Title: STATION PIPING FABRICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 4
3.1
3.2
Main Line Piping ........................................................................................ 4
3.3
MSDS ........................................................................................................ 4
3.4
NPS ........................................................................................................... 4
3.5
Station Piping ............................................................................................. 4
3.6
WHMIS ...................................................................................................... 4
3.7
Cold Bending ............................................................................................. 4
3.8
Hot Bending ............................................................................................... 4
PIPE FABRICATION ............................................................................................ 5
4.1
Dimensional Tolerances ............................................................................ 5
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
4.3
4.4
Welding ...................................................................................................... 7
Piping Fabrication and Assembly ............................................................... 7
Material Handling and Shipment ................................................................ 7
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
5.0
6.0
Linear Tolerances ...................................................................................... 5

Angular Misalignment ................................................................................ 5
Bend Radius .............................................................................................. 5
Bend Angle ................................................................................................ 5
Out of Plane............................................................................................... 5
Internal Cleaning ....................................................................................... 7

Material Handling....................................................................................... 7
Preparation for Shipment........................................................................... 7
EXAMINATION AND TESTING ............................................................................ 8

5.1
Examinations ............................................................................................. 8
5.2
Hydrostatic Testing .................................................................................... 8
BURIED PIPING ................................................................................................... 9
6.1
Excavation ................................................................................................. 9
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.2
Bedding ..................................................................................................... 9
Ditch Design .............................................................................................. 9
De-Watering .............................................................................................. 9
Ditch Spoil ................................................................................................. 9
Field Bending ............................................................................................. 9

6.2.1
6.2.2
General ...................................................................................................... 9
Bending Equipment ................................................................................... 9

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 2 of 16

6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.3
Lowering in Pipe ...................................................................................... 10

6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
8.0
Coating Inspection And Repair ................................................................ 10

Pipe Bedding ........................................................................................... 10
Backfilling................................................................................................. 10
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
7.0
Tolerances ............................................................................................... 10
Circumferential Welds ............................................................................. 10
Longitudinal Weld Seams ........................................................................ 10
Coating Protection ................................................................................... 10
Trench And Backfill Management............................................................ 10

Padding Material...................................................................................... 11
Backfilling Procedure (non-travelled surfaces) ........................................ 11
Backfilling Procedure (road crossings) .................................................... 11
PIPE COATINGS................................................................................................ 13
7.1
Exposed Piping ........................................................................................ 13
7.2
Buried Piping ........................................................................................... 13
7.3
Girth Weld Coating (buried piping) ........................................................... 13
7.4
Piping Insulation ...................................................................................... 13
QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................................... 14
8.1
Quality Control Program .......................................................................... 14
8.2
Project Quality Control Procedure ........................................................... 14
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
General .................................................................................................... 14
Procedure Elements ................................................................................ 14
Project Quality Control Record ................................................................ 15

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
General .................................................................................................... 15
Record Elements ..................................................................................... 15
Material and Weld Location Maps ........................................................... 16

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 3 of 16
1.0 SCOPE
This standard covers mandatory requirements governing the fabrication of station
piping systems.
This standard is limited to systems transporting liquid
hydrocarbons including: crude oil, condensate and liquid petroleum products. This
standard is further limited to the joining of piping and components for Category I,
Low Vapour pressure piping systems.
This standard does not cover the fabrication of Main Line piping systems. This
standard also excludes the design, layout and material selection of piping
systems.

Some reference publications are supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific
Z662-99
ISO 9001-94

Quality Systems

SOR/99-294
Onshore Pipeline Regulations, 1999

GC3101
GC3102
GC3103
MP3101
MP3102
MP3901
MP4111
External Coating of Piping, Components, and Structural

Steel
External Coating of Buried Piping
External Coating of Girth Weld Coatings on Buried Pipe
General Piping Fabrication Requirements
Piping Insulation Requirements
Joining Program
Station Hydrostatic Test Procedure

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 4 of 16
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
Ambient Temperature
3.2
Main Line Piping

3.3
MSDS
MSDS means material safety data sheet.
3.4
NPS
Engineers.
3.5
Station Piping
3.6
WHMIS
WHMIS means workplace hazardous materials information system.
3.7
Cold Bending
Bending of ferritic steels at a temperature below the transformation range.
3.8
Hot Bending
Bending of ferritic steels above the transformation range, but within a
temperature range consistent with the material and the intended service.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 5 of 16
4.0 PIPE FABRICATION

4.1
Dimensional Tolerances
4.1.1
Linear Tolerances
The tolerances on linear dimensions shall apply to the face to face,
face to end, and end to end measurements of fabricated straight pipe
and headers; center to end or center to face of nozzles and other
attachments; or center to face of bends; as illustrated by dimension A
in Figure 4.1.A. Linear tolerances shall be as indicated in Table
4.1.1.A.
TABLE 4.1.1.A -- LINEAR TOLERANCES
4.1.2
Pipe Size
(NPS)
Tolerance
(mm)
12
3.0
12 to 24
5.0
> 24
6.0
Angular Misalignment
As illustrated by dimension B in Figure 4.1.A, end preparations for
welding shall not deviate from true by more 3.0 mm across the land.
As illustrated by dimension C in Figure 4.1.A, the inclination of flange
faces shall not deviate from true across any diameter by more than
4.0 mm per meter or 1.0 mm whichever is greater.
4.1.3
Bend Radius
Bend Radii shall be within 1% of the specified value.
4.1.4
Bend Angle
The bend included angle shall be within 1.0 degrees of the
specified value.
4.1.5
Out of Plane
Out of plane measurements shall not exceed 6.0 mm as illustrated by
dimension D in Figure 4.1.A.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
FIGURE 4.1.A -- APPLICATION OF PIPE FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Page 6 of 16

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 7 of 16

4.2
Welding
Welding shall be performed by qualified welders in accordance Kinder
Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP3901, Joining Program.
4.3
Piping Fabrication and Assembly

Piping systems will be fabricated and assembled by qualified tradesmen in
accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP3101, General
Piping Fabrication Requirements.
4.4
Material Handling and Shipment

4.4.1
Internal Cleaning
All pipe, fittings, valves and other components shall be clean, dry and
free of foreign matter prior to installation.
4.4.2
Material Handling
Pipe and fittings shall be handled using wide canvas, leather, nylon
or padded slings. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, pipe clamps or
other similar equipment will not be allowed.
4.4.3
Preparation for Shipment

After completion of inspection, the openings of all shop fabricated
piping shall be prepared for shipment. Flanges shall be protected
over the entire gasket surface with metal, plastic or wood protectors
securely attached.
Threaded-end or socked welding-end
connections shall be fitted with metal, wood or plastic, plugs or caps.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 8 of 16
5.0 EXAMINATION AND TESTING

This section outlines the minimum mandatory examination and testing
requirements for station piping.
5.1
Examinations
All nondestructive examinations (visual, radiographic, liquid penetrant and
magnetic particle) shall be in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
Standard MP3901, Joining Program.
5.2
Hydrostatic Testing
All pressure piping and atmospheric drain systems shall be hydrostatically
tested in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP4111,
Station Hydrostatic Test Procedure. Where pre-tested assemblies are
installed, the numbers of "tie-in" welds not subjected to a pressure test shall
be minimized to the extent possible.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 9 of 16
6.0 BURIED PIPING

6.1
Excavation
6.1.1
Bedding
The bottom of the ditch shall be free from rocks, clods and debris at
the time the pipe is lowered in and so graded that the pipe will have a
uniform bearing on the bottom of the ditch. Jagged, sharp and strong
roots or other projections must be removed from the ditch to prevent
damage to the pipe or protective coating.
6.1.2
Ditch Design
The sides of the ditch shall be sloped to comply with Occupational
Health and Safety requirements and to prevent sloughing. Additional
depth of bury will be required adjacent to sharp changes in ground
profile in order to comply with minimum radius of curvature for the
pipe material specified.
6.1.3
De-Watering
Excavations shall be kept free of water as required. Ditch water shall
not be permitted to enter any piping. Discharge from dewatering
equipment shall be controlled to prevent damage.
6.1.4
Ditch Spoil
If space adjacent to the ditch is insufficient for the spoil, it shall be
removed, stockpiled and returned for backfill or alternatively, wasted
in a manner approved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. and replaced
by appropriate backfill material.
6.2
Field Bending
6.2.1
General
The Contractor shall make all field bends necessary for piping
construction. Sags and overbends shall conform to the profile of the
bottom of the ditch. Side bends shall fit the centerline of the ditch.
6.2.2
Bending Equipment
All field bends shall be made by the cold bending method using
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. approved bending equipment. An
internal bending mandrel shall be used.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 10 of 16

6.2.3
Tolerances
Bends shall be free from buckling, cracks and other evidence of
mechanical damage. All bends shall meet the requirements of CSA
Z662.
6.2.4
Circumferential Welds
Circumferential welds shall not be stressed during bending. A
tangent length of at least 1.0 m shall be maintained between any
circumferential weld and the start of any cold bend.
6.2.5
Longitudinal Weld Seams

Weld pipe shall be aligned such that the longitudinal seam shall be
on the neutral axis or at right angles to the plane of bending.
Adjacent bends shall be rotated so that the weld seams are on
opposite sides of the pipe after field welding.
6.2.6
Coating Protection
Padded shoes and padded slings shall be used when bending precoated pipe to prevent damage to the coating.
6.3
Lowering in Pipe
6.3.1
Coating Inspection And Repair

Prior to lowering pipe into the ditch, the pipe and coating shall be
checked for any defects. Holiday testing shall be conducted as the
pipe is being lowered into the trench. All defects shall be repaired in
accordance with section 9.0.
6.3.2
Pipe Bedding
When all rocks, skids, clods and debris have been removed, the
bottom of the ditch shall be graded to give support to the pipe
throughout its entire length. Where necessary Contractor shall install
bottom padding, the bottom layers of sack breakers, foam or
sandbag pillows.
6.4
Backfilling
6.4.1
Trench And Backfill Management

Following lowering in and before backfilling commences the ditch and
spoil pile shall be inspected to insure rocks, skids or any construction
debris are not buried in the trench.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 11 of 16

6.4.2
Padding Material
With the exception of bored sections or piping installed in
compressible soils all buried piping should be backfilled in a manner
consistent with the cross-section illustrated in Figure 6.4.2.A. The
bedding material should be sand or fine sand and gravel. If the
native soils excavated for the trench are unsuitable or cannot
otherwise be screened, sand bedding shall be imported from an
appropriate borrow site. Rock or large gravel shall not be backfilled
directly on the pipe.
FIGURE 6.4.2.A -- PLACEMENT OF PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL
6.4.3
Backfilling Procedure (non-travelled surfaces)

The ditch shall be filled to the level of the surrounding grade and
compacted by two passes of a large compactor approved by Kinder
Morgan Canada Inc. After compacting, the remaining backfill shall
be spread over the pipeline ditch and crowned directly over the ditch
to a height of approximately 200 to 300 mm above the adjacent
ground surface. Backfill along steep banks shall be compacted to
95% Modified Proctor Density.
6.4.4
Backfilling Procedure (road crossings)

The backfill shall be placed in maximum 250 mm lifts and compacted
with vibratory compaction equipment approved by Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc. Each lift shall be compacted to 95% Modified Proctor

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 12 of 16

Density. The Contractor shall add water to the backfill as necessary
to achieve the required compaction.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 13 of 16
7.0 PIPE COATINGS

7.1
Exposed Piping
Unless otherwise specified, all external surfaces of exposed, carbon steel
piping shall be coated in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
Standard GC3101, External Coating of Pipe, Components and Structural
Steel.
7.2
Buried Piping
Unless otherwise specified, all external surfaces of buried, carbon steel
piping shall be coated with one of the following systems in Table 7.2.A.
TABLE 7.2.A -- APPROVED COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED PIPING
7.3
TM System
Description
Standard
C1
100% Solids Epoxy Paint

CG3102
C2
Fusion Bonded Epoxy (FBE)
CSA Z245.20-M92
C3
High Density Polyethylene

(HDPE)/Mastic
CSA Z245.21-M92 System A2
Girth Weld Coating (buried piping)

Unless otherwise specified, girth welds on buried, carbon steel piping, shall
be coated in accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard
GC3103, External Coating of Girth Welds on Buried Pipe.
7.4
Piping Insulation
Unless otherwise specified, carbon steel piping, shall be insulated in
accordance with Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP3102, Piping
Insulation Requirements.

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 14 of 16
8.0 QUALITY CONTROL

8.1
Quality Control Program

The contractor's shall have a documented quality control program that is in
accordance with the requirements of one of the following:
a)
b)
c)
8.2
CSA CAN3 Z299.3-85, Quality Assurance Program;

one of the CAN/CSA-ISO 9000, standards; or
one of the ISO 9000 standards.
Project Quality Control Procedure

8.2.1
General
The contractor shall create and submit to Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
five (5) copies of a Project Quality Control Procedure specific to
the requirements of the work, two (2) weeks after award of the
contract.
8.2.2
Procedure Elements
The Project Quality Control Procedure shall include as a minimum:
a)
designated project personnel and their responsibilities;
b)
detailed procedures for documenting drawing, materials, testing

and other information;
c)
a fabrication and construction plan and flowsheet identifying all

inspection hold points related to shop and field fabrication.
Examples of hold points include:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
welding procedure and welder qualification approval;

visual and NDE of piping prior to hydrostatic testing;
visual inspection of piping and structural steel after surface
preparation and coating;
visual inspection of piping prior to burial;
formwork and rebar inspection prior to concrete pours;
confirmation of critical survey data prior to concrete pours,
e.g., elevations, anchor bolt locations, top of steel
elevations, etc.
d)
identification of all inspection witness points;
e)
sign-off forms for all inspection hold points and a reporting

procedure for inspection witness points;

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 15 of 16

f)
8.3
procedures for material control, engineering change requests,

and non-conformance reports.
Project Quality Control Record

8.3.1
General
The contractor shall create a Project Quality Control Record at the
beginning of construction. The Contractor shall continuously update
the Project Quality Control Record and make it readily available for
review by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. The contractor shall submit
three (3) copies of the Project Quality Control Record not less than
two (2) weeks after the date of substantial performance.
8.3.2
Record Elements
The Project Quality Control Record shall include as a minimum:
a)
contractor and
certifications;
subcontractor
b)
contractor and
certifications;
c)
an itemized, dated list of all specification and drawing revisions

made after receipt of the Issue for Construction drawings;
d)
an itemized record of all materials received from Kinder Morgan

Canada Inc. or purchased by the contractor or subcontractors,
including purchase orders, packing slips, delivery records, heat
numbers, materials test records, and all other information
regarding the receipt, identification, and properties of the
materials;
e)
a complete set of piping material and weld location maps;
f)
a complete set of certified mill test reports for all piping

components;
g)
a complete set of NDE records;
h)
a complete set of hydrostatic test records;
i)
a complete set of compaction test records;
j)
a complete set of concrete test records;
k)
a complete set of MSDS sheets, as required by WHMIS, for all

materials used on Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.'s Property.
subcontractor
structural
piping
fabrication
fabrication
CWB
ASME

MP3110
Revision 1
January 21, 2000
Page 16 of 16

8.3.3
Material and Weld Location Maps

The material and weld location maps shall be applied to piping spool
drawings. The material and weld location maps shall include as a
minimum:
a)
a unique identification for each fitting, pipe segment and piping

component;
b)
a material list that cross-references the fitting, pipe or

component description with its unique identification symbol and
the respective material heat number;
c)
a unique identification for each weld;
d)
a weld list that cross-references the unique weld identification

symbol with the welder ID, the NDE records and the hydrostatic
test record;
e)
a list of weld procedures used on the piping spool;
f)
the hydrostatic test pressure;
g)
the piping fabrication code (CSA Z662)

MP3110A
Revision 0
October 12, 1996
Page 1 of 3

Appendix A: Standard References
INTRODUCTION
MP3110 is a compilation of requirements that have been derived from different
sources. Where applicable, this appendix lists the reference from which the
clause was developed.
MP3110 REFERENCE INDEX
Clause
Title
CSA Z662
Other
4.1 Welding Materials

4.1.1
Filler Metal
4.1.2
Welds Thicker Than 13 mm
4.1.3
Low Hydrogen Electrodes
4.1.4
Backing Rings
7.2.4.2.1
7.2.4.2.2.2
4.2 Weld Preparation

4.2.1
Joint Design
7.2.7.6
4.2.2
Joint Preparation
7.2.7.1
4.2.3
Alignment
7.2.7.2
4.2.4
Grounding
7.2.7.3
4.2.5
Line-up Clamps
7.2.7.4
4.2.6
Ambient Weather Conditions
7.2.7.7
4.3 Production Welding

4.3.1
Removal of Line-up Clamps
7.2.7.4
4.3.2
Cleaning
7.2.7.9
4.3.3
Preheat
7.2.7.15.2
4.3.4
Interrupted Welding
4.3.5
Filler and Finish Beads
7.2.7.10.2.1
4.3.6
Weld Reinforcement
7.2.7.10.2.2
4.3.7
Controlled Cooling
7.2.7.15.4
4.4.1
Preparation
7.2.10.3.1
4.4.2
Preheat
7.2.10.3.2
4.4.3
Repair Welding
4.4.4
Inspection and Testing of Repairs
7.2.10.6
4.4.5
Repair of Cracks in Welds
7.2.10.5
B31.3 330.2.4
4.4 Weld Repair
4.5 Standards of Acceptability of Imperfections
7.2.9

MP3110A
Revision 0
October 12, 1996
Page 2 of 3

Clause
Title
CSA Z662
Other
4.6 Qualification of Welding Procedures

4.6.1
General
4.6.2
Contractor Weld Procedures
7.2.1.4
B31.3 328.2.2
4.7 Qualification of Welders

4.7.1
General
7.2.6.1.1
4.7.2
Butt Welds
7.2.6.1.3
.7.3
Fillet Welds
7.2.6.1.3
4.7.4
Pre-Qualification of Welders
B31.3 328.2.3
5.0 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (NDE) AND TESTING

5.1
Examination
OPR 22
5.2
Hydrostatic Testing
5.3
Approval of NDE Procedures
OPR 21
5.4
NDE and Inspection Personnel
OPR 21
5.5
Authority of NDE Technicians
OPR 22, 44
6.0 FABRICATION
6.1
Dimensional Tolerances
6.2
Welded Connections
6.3
Branch Connections
6.4
Flanges and Fittings
6.5
Bends Made From Pipe
PFI ES-3
6.2.3
B31.3 328.5.4
6.2.3
7.0 ASSEMBLY
7.1
Alignment
B31.3 335.1
7.2
Flanged Joints
B31.3 335.2
7.3
Pipe Surface Defects
7.4
Minimum Joint Length
7.5
Material Handling and Shipment
6.3
6.2.2
8.0 BURIED PIPING

8.1
Excavation
6.2.6
8.2
Field Bending
6.2.3
8.3
Lowering in Pipe
6.2.6
8.4
Backfilling
6.2.7
9.0 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

MP3110A
Revision 0
October 12, 1996
Page 3 of 3

Clause
Title
CSA Z662
9.1
Exposed Piping
6.2.5
9.2
Buried Piping
5.3.9
9.3
Girth Weld Coating
6.2.5
9.4
Repairs
Other
6.5
10.0 INSULATION
10.1
General
10.2
Insulation
10.3
Insulation Cladding
10.4
Accessories for Insulation Systems
10.5
Insulation Application
10.6
Cladding Application
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL

11.1
Quality Control Program
OPR 19
11.2
Project Quality Control Procedure
5.8
11.3
Project Quality Control Record
5.8
OPR
NEB Onshore Pipeline Regulations
PFI
Pipe Fabrication Institute
B31.3
ASME B31.3, Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping

BOLTED FLANGE JOINT ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS

MP3210, Revision 2, February 7, 2011

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 2 of 22
Title: BOLTED FLANGE JOINT ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 3
ALTERNATE ALLOWABLE FLANGE ASSEMBLY METHOD .............................. 3
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 4
DOCUMENTATION .............................................................................................. 5
BEST PRACTICES ............................................................................................... 6
FLANGE ALIGNMENT ......................................................................................... 7
FLANGE COMPONENTS .................................................................................... 8
BOLTING ............................................................................................................ 12
TORQUE INCREMENT ...................................................................................... 13
BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE ...................................................................... 14
APPENDICE
Appendix A-FLANGE TRACKING SHEET.15
Appendix B-CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION GUIDE................................19
Appendix C-SPIRAL WOUND GASKET SELECTION..................................22

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 3 of 22

1.0
SCOPE
This standard covers mandatory requirements governing assembly of raised-face
flanges. This is a supplementary standard, and unless otherwise specified, all
other aspects of piping fabrication, fastener/gasket selection and assembly not
covered by this standard shall be in accordance with the following Kinder Morgan
Canada Inc. Standards;
MP3110-Station Piping Fabrication

MP3120-Pipeline Construction
MP1110A-Station &Terminal Piping Design
MP3101 General Piping Fabrication Requirements
This standard is limited to systems transporting liquid hydrocarbons including:

crude oil, condensate, and liquid petroleum products. This standard excludes
the joining of piping and components for Highly Volatile Liquids.
2.0
INTRODUCTION
A bolted flange joint assembly (BFJA) is a complex mechanical device. Although
static by design, BFJAs that provide many years of leak-free service are the result
of correct assembly and torquing practices. The guidelines outlined in this
document address the correct assembly techniques, methods and practices
essential to achieving consistent leak-free performance of otherwise properly
designed and constructed BFJAs.
3.0
ALTERNATE ALLOWABLE FLANGE ASSEMBLY METHOD

Normal torquing of each fastener in stepped increments to a predetermined
Target-Torque is adequate for normal pipeline operational requirements. Should a
contractor or other wish to achieve the correct gasket seating results as outlined in
the following Standard through the use of fastener tensioning, rather than torquing,
the contractor shall present for approval a fully detailed tensioning procedure and
inspection test plan to the KMC representative for prior approval before performing
any tensioning activities.
The tensioning procedure will include the following:
Bolt tension target load for the given fastener size.

Steps to achieve tension target load.
Method used for applying tension.
The Flange Tracking Record will contain in addition to all other required
information the following:

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 4 of 22
Actual tension readings and/or stretch calculations of a random 1/4 of the

fasteners for every BFJA.
Signature of authorized KMC representative having witnessed final
tensioning pass.
4.0
REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS
ASME PCC-1---2000 Guidelines for Pressure Boundary Bolted Flange Joint
Assembly
ASME B16.5-------Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.20-----Metallic gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B16.21-----Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
KMC MP1110A---Station and Terminal Piping and Design
5.0
DEFINITIONS
Bolted Flange Joint Assembly (BFJA): two pipe flanges of the same ANSI class
and size which when joined with fasteners and sharing a single common gasket
provide a leak-free jointed assembly.
Lubricant: a nickel-based anti-seize paste. Copper-based not permitted.
Gasket: flat, ring shaped, pliable component which when properly compressed
between the flange raised-face sealing surfaces creates the leak-free joint.
Torque: The turning/twisting motion of the fastener(s) and/or more usually the
nut(s).
Fastener: the combination of stud or bolt and nut(s) and at times a hardened
washer(s) utilized in joining a flanged assembly.
Target-torque: the final design torque applied to each fastener for a given stud
size
Flange Alignment: The orientation of the two flange faces to be joined in relation
to each other and the design plane.
Bolt Tightening Sequences: a predetermined and numbered cross-pattern
tightening sequence of the flange fasteners utilized to ensure even and consistent
gasket seating pressure.
Hardened Washer: A washer that is through-hardened rather than surfacehardened.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 5 of 22
Working Surface: The gasket contact surface of both joint flanges as well as the
nut bearing surface on the back side of each flange where the fasteners nut
contacts.
Nut bearing face: The smooth working side of the nut which has no identification
markings to hinder the torquing process.
Hydraulic Torque wrench: An electrically or pneumatically driven hydraulic pump
with a variable pressure output attached via high-pressure flexible hoses to one,
two or four small hydraulic piston-driven head(s) that convert hydraulic energy into
measurable rotating mechanical energy.
Torque Increment: Incrementally increasing the torque of each successive bolt
tightening sequence to a greater torque value with the final sequence at 100% of
Target-torque.
Flange tracking records: Documentation which records and identifies any and all
relevant information pertaining to the flange assembly to assist in tracking and
quality assurance.
Refer to Appendix A for Flange Tracking sheet.
Expedient Assembly practices: Requirements for completing flanged
connections from initial assembly to final torquing in a continuous uninterrupted
process in order to avoid contamination and degradation of gasket sealing
surfaces.
Flange Rating: the pressure rating within a specified temperature range a flange
is designed to safely withstand as defined by ASME B16.5.
6.0
DOCUMENTATION
.
6.1
Contractors will submit a flange bolting procedure and inspection test plan
for approval by the responsible KMC project manager prior to undertaking
any flange work.
Refer to Appendix B for Contractor Qualification Guide.
6.2
All BFJA relevant information shall be recorded on the Flange Tracking

Sheet. Record will serve as a troubleshooting resource.
Refer to Appendix A for Flange Tracking Sheet.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 6 of 22

6.3
7.0
All final Target Torque sequential passes are to be witnessed by an

authorized KMC representative. Any deviation from the guidelines set
forth in this Standard are to be documented and approved in writing on
the Flange Tracking sheet by the authorized KMC representative.
Refer to Appendix A for Flange Tracking sheet.
BEST PRACTICES
7.1
To prevent the contamination of the gasket or flange sealing surface with

water or other foreign materials, BFJAs are not normally permitted to be
loosely assembled and then torqued to full Target Torque value at a later
time in the construction process. The exception to this is that any flange
loosely assembled during construction is clearly identified and tagged as
such. Prior to final torquing, the entire flange will be disassembled,
cleaned, inspected and reassembled with a new gasket. This additional
process will be clearly documented on the Flange Tracking Sheet as
complete and having been witnessed by the KMC representative.
7.2
Once final cleaning, inspecting and preparation of components and

gasket surfaces are complete, Bolted Flange Joints will be assembled
with a new gasket in addition to new fasteners which have been liberally
coated with a nickel-based anti-seize paste. The fasteners will then be
immediately taken through the incremental torquing sequence steps up to
full Target Torque value. Appropriate measures shall be taken to protect
the sealing surfaces from rain, snow or any other potential contaminants
during assembly.
7.3
For initial tightening of the flange fasteners, a pneumatic adjustable

impact tool may be utilized to a stepped torque value not to exceed 60%
of target torque. Misalignment shall not be corrected by force or
uneven bolt tightening. The same bolt numbering and cross-bolt
tightening pattern shall be utilized for all tightening methods. All remaining
torque sequential steps required to achieve 100% target-torque value
shall be done with a calibrated manual or hydraulic torque wrench.
7.4
When utilizing an insulating flange kit with only one fibrous washer,
tightening of the fastener nut shall be performed opposite the side that
has the fibrous insulating washer. For kits with fibrous washer on both
sides, smaller incremental torque steps should be observed to reach the
recommended torque value as recommended by the kit manufacturer.
Isolation kits will be type F Linebacker style for raised face flanges with
Glass Reinforced Epoxy retainer material (G.R.E or NEMA G-10) and
Viton Sealing element. Glass Reinforced Epoxy Single Washers and
Sleeves.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 7 of 22
8.0
7.5
All torque wrenches shall be properly calibrated to 2% of the full scale

reading. Torque wrenches shall be recalibrated after extensive usage or
at least every six months. The torque wrench reaction head shall be
disassembled and re-lubricated according to the manufacturers
recommendations; normally after every 8 hours of usage.
7.6
For correct disassembly of flanges and fasteners, adherence to ASME

PCC-1--2000, Section 15 must be followed.
FLANGE ALIGNMENT
8.1
Maximum Offset of Flange Faces
Prior to bolt-up, flange faces shall have the following maximum alignment
tolerances:
with raised faces separated by one gasket width at one edge, the
largest gap between the faces at any point shall not exceed that
listed in Table 8.3.A plus one gasket thickness if the faces are
separated by one gasket thickness at their closest point; and
flange holes shall be aligned within 3 mm maximum offset.

TABLE 8.3.A -- MAXIMUM OPENING AT RAISED FACE (mm)
Flange Rating
Pipe
Size
(NPS)
PN 20
(150#)
PN 50
(300#)
PN 100
(600#)
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
10
3.0
3.5
3.5
12
3.5
4.0
4.0
14
4.0
4.0
4.5
16
4.5
4.5
5.0
18
5.0
5.0
5.5
20
5.5
5.5
6.0
24
6.5
6.5
6.5
30
7.5
8.0
8.0

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 8 of 22
8.2
Piping Distortion
Alignment of piping shall be done by approved methods only. Any heating or

distortion of piping or equipment to bring it into alignment for joint assembly is
prohibited.
8.3
Flange Bolt Hole Orientation
Flanges shall be installed so that the bolt holes straddle the vertical centerline
of the pipe and the flange face is perpendicular to the longitudinal pipe centreline.
8.4
Equipment Connection
Where pipe is connected to rotating equipment, the equipment shall be

aligned prior to connection of the piping. After connection of the piping, the
coupling alignment shall remain within 0.05 mm (0.002") in each of the three
planes. (Axial, horizontal and vertical). Coupling alignment of rotating
equipment shall be rechecked and corrected as necessary following final
connection of piping.
9.0
FLANGE COMPONENTS
9.1
Flange Specifications
Flange construction will be in accordance with AMSE B16.5.
9.2
Flange Facings
Flange faces shall be inspected prior to assembly. Any damage to the gasket
sealing surface shall be repaired, or the flange shall be replaced.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 9 of 22

9.3
Flange Face Surface Finish
Flange working surface finish will be the same for both non-metallic
compressed graphite gaskets and semi-metallic spiral wound gaskets.
9.4
Stud Length
Studs shall extend completely through their nuts by at least two (2) threads.
Washers or other packing shall not be employed to use up excessive length
of flange bolts.
9.5
Nut Faces
Each nut shall be assembled onto the stud with the flat bearing face toward
the flange.
9.6
Gaskets
New gaskets shall be used for every assembly operation unless such
assembly is a temporary non-operational bolt-up intended solely for fitup. Gaskets shall be new, clean and free from foreign matter. One
gasket shall be used between faces when assembling a flanged joint
and no sealing compounds, lubricants, adhesives or any other
material shall be applied to the gasket.
Only one new gasket to be utilized per flange pair; stacking of multiple
gaskets to make-up excessive flange gap is not acceptable.
Warning:
When inserting a cone-strainer, startup-strainer or witches-hat

between two flange halves, two new gaskets must be used; one on
either side of the witches-hat locating ring. Two gaskets = twice
the gasket relaxation, therefore extra final re-torquing is necessary.
Warning:
Newly constructed piping that has non-permanent start-upstrainers installed to protect pump internals should not be
operated more than a MAXIMUM OF TWO MINUTES at low-flow
conditions with cone-strainers installed, otherwise severe internal
damage may occur.
Replacement gaskets for existing facilities which currently utilize

compressed carbon-fiber gaskets shall be 1.59 mm (1/16") thick, nonasbestos, non-metallic type manufactured in accordance with ASME
B16.21. The material shall be compressed carbon fiber. Approved
gasket materials include:
-
Garlock HTC 9850

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 10 of 22
Gaskets for all new construction shall incorporate 4.5 mm (0.175)

thick, semi-metallic, spiral wound gaskets manufactured in
accordance with ASME B16.20. Centering and support ring material
shall be carbon steel with flexible graphite filler material in the sealing
portion. Additionally, any Bolted Flange Joint Assemblies which
currently utilize spiral wound gaskets shall continue to utilize
replacement spiral wound gaskets which meet the above
specifications.
-
BFJAs located in non-pigable station or tank piping shall

utilize spiral wound gaskets incorporating a solid metal
outer centering ring and a solid metal inner support ring.
BFJAs located in pigable piping such as the mainline

shall utilize spiral wound gaskets incorporating a solid
metal outer centering ring but shall NOT have a solid
metal inner support ring.
BFJAs in non-pigable piping requiring unobstructed flow

conditions shall utilize spiral wound gaskets
incorporating a solid metal outer centering ring but shall
NOT have a solid metal inner support ring.
Examples of such piping arrangements are ultra-sonic
flow meters, flow straightening vanes and turbine meters.
Approved spiral wound gasket materials include:

-
GARLOCK-FLEXSEAL-RWI (outer centering ring and inner

support ring).
GARLOCK-FLEXSEAL-RW (outer centering ring only).
FLEXITALLIC-FLEXICARB-CGI (outer centering ring and
inner support ring).
FLEXITALLIC-FLEXICARB-CG (outer centering ring only).
LAMONS-SPIRASEAL-WRI (outer centering ring and inner
support ring).
LAMONS-SPIRASEAL-WR (outer centering ring only).
AR THOMPSON-CANFLEX-RWI (outer centering ring and
inner support ring).
AR THOMPSON-CANFLEX-RW (outer centering ring only).
QUEST GASKET AND SUPPLY INC-QUEST FLEX-SWI
(outer centering ring and inner support ring).

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 11 of 22

-
QUEST GASKET AND SUPPLY INC -QUEST FLEX-SW

(outer centering ring only).
Refer to Appendix C for Spiral wound Gasket selection

NOTE: Spiral wound gaskets shall be fully compressed within the Target-torque
value to the thickness of the centering ring material. This will not damage the
gasket or affect the sealing performance, since the rings are designed and
provided as a compression limiting stop.
9.7
Thread Compound
All engaged external threads of the stud and internal threads of the nut to be
rotated shall be liberally coated with a nickel-based anti-seize paste prior to
assembly. Additionally, the flat nut bearing faces which bear against the
flange will be liberally coated with the same nickel anti-seize paste prior to
assembly. Approved lubricants include:
-
Loctite Nickel Anti-Seize
Never-Seez Pure Nickel Special
Lub-O-Seal Nickel Grade Anti-Seize
Approved non-conductive lubricants used when assembling insulating kits

include:
-
Mobilgrease XHP 222 Special
Lub-O-Seal NM-91 Anti-Seize
This anti-seize paste may be applied only to the nut and fastener on the side
of the flange which will be rotated or torqued. The nut on the opposite side
may be left un-lubricated in order that it may bite preventing additional
rotation, facilitating the speed of the torquing process.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 12 of 22
10.0 BOLTING
10.1 Bolt Numbering:
Number each bolt location 1 through N in a clockwise direction (where N
is the total number of bolts for the flange). Eg: 1,2,3,4,5,6N.
10.2 Torquing:
Flange studs shall be tightened evenly in an alternating pattern as detailed
in this Standard to achieve a uniform gasket seating pressure. Only new
studs and nuts shall be used. All bolts and studs shall be tightened to the
target torque shown in Table 9.5.A.
NOTE: THE TARGET-TORQUE VALUES EXPRESSED IN TABLE 9.5.A SHALL
APPLY TO FASTENERS UTILIZED IN BFJAS CONTAINING EITHER
COMPRESSED CARBON-FIBER GASKETS OR SPIRAL WOUND GASKETS.
Warning: Use only nickel based anti-seize paste for lubrication. Substituting other
lubricant will seriously alter target-torque value!
TABLE 9.5.A -- RECOMMENDED TORQUES FOR B7 STUDS

Nominal Stud Size
Threads
per inch
Torque
(mm)
(inches)
(ft. lbs.)
12.7
13
60
15.87
1/2
5/8
11
120
19.05
3/4
10
210
22.22
7/8
350
25.4
500
28.57
1-1/8
750
31.75
1-1/4
1050
34.92
1-3/8
1400
38.1
1-1/2
1800
41.27
1-5/8
2350
44.45
1-3/4
2950
47.62
1-7/8
3650
50.8
4500
63.5
2-1/2
9905

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 13 of 22
11.0 TORQUE INCREMENT

Step
Loading
Install
Align bolt holes with two non-tapered drift pins at 180 degree separation.
Hand-tighten fasteners and check flange gap around circumference for
uniformity. Document gap in the Flange Tracking sheet.
Round 1
Following the bolt tightening sequence and utilizing a pneumatic

adjustable impact tool, tighten fasteners to approximately 30% of Target
Torque, Check flange gap around circumference to ensure continued gap
uniformity. Remove drift pins and replace with studs and nuts and tighten
to the same value as the others in place.
Round 2
Utilizing a pneumatic adjustable impact tool, tighten to approximately 60%

of Target Torque. Check flange gap around circumference to ensure
continued gap uniformity.
Round 3
With a calibrated hydraulic torque wrench, tighten to 80% of Target

Torque. Continue to monitor flange gap for uniformity.
Round 4
With calibrated hydraulic torque wrench, tighten to 100% of Target

Torque. Check flange gap around circumference to ensure uniformity.
Round 5
Continue tightening the bolts, but on a rotational clockwise pattern until

no further nut rotation occurs at the Round 4 Target Torque value.
CAUTION:
Upon completion of Round 5, flange and piping may be flooded and

returned to operational service. However, a final 6th re-torquing step
shall be completed during the next available downtime event.
WARNING:
Before performing Round 6 depressurize piping and ensure no-flow

conditions.
Round 6
Wait a minimum of 4 hours and repeat Round 5; this will restore the shortterm creep relaxation/embedment losses in the gasket and fasteners. If
the flange is subject to a subsequent test pressure higher than its rating,
round 6 should be repeated after the test is completed.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 14 of 22

12.0 BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Caution: Refer to Section 10.1 above for correct bolt numbering pattern
# of
bolts
BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
1-3-2-4
1-5-3-7 2-6-4-8
12
1-7-4-10 2-8-5-11 3-9-6-12
16
1-9-5-13 3-11-7-15 2-10-6-14 4-12-8-16
20
1-11-6-16 3-13-8-18 5-15-10-20 2-12-7-17 4-14-9-19
24
1-13-7-19 4-16-10-22 2-14-8-20 5-17-11-23 3-15-9-21

6-18-12-24
28
1-15-8-22 4-18-11-25 6-20-13-27 2-16-9-23 5-19-12-26

7-21-14-28 3-17-10-24
32
1-17-9-25 5-21-13-29 3-19-11-27 7-23-15-31 2-18-10-26

6-22-14-30 4-20-12-28 8-24-16-32
36
1-2-3 19-20-21 10-11-12 28-29-30 4-5-6 22-23-24

13-14-15 31-32-33 7-8-9 25-26-27 16-17-18 34-35-36
40
1-2-3-4 21-22-23-24 13-14-15-16 33-34-35-36 5-6-7-8

25-26-27-28 17-18-19-20 37-38-39-40 9-10-11-12
29-30-31-32
44
1-2-3-4 25-26-27-28 13-14-15-16 37-38-39-40 5-6-7-8

29-30-31-32 17-18-19-20 41-42-43-44 9-10-11-12
33-34-35-36 21-22-23-24
48
1-2-3-4 25-26-27-28 13-14-15-16 37-38-39-40 5-6-7-8

29-30-31-32 17-18-19-20 41-42-43-44 9-10-11-12
33-34-35-36 21-22-23-24 45-46-47-48
52
1-2-3-4 29-30-31-32 13-14-15-16 41-42-43-44 5-6-7-8

33-34-35-36 17-18-19-20 45-46-47-48 21-22-23-24
49-50-51-52 25-26-27-28 9-10-11-12 37-38-39-40

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 15 of 22
# of
bolts
BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
56
1-2-3-4 29-30-31-32 13-14-15-16 41-42-43-44 21-22-23-24

49-50-51-52 9-10-11-12 37-38-39-40 25-26-27-28
53-54-55-56 17-18-19-20 45-46-47-48 5-6-7-8 33-34-35-36
60
1-2-3-4 29-30-31-32 45-46-47-48 13-14-15-16 5-6-7-8

37-38-39-40 21-22-23-24 53-54-55-56 9-10-11-12
33-34-35-36 49-50-51-52 17-18-19-20 41-42-43-44
57-58-59-60 25-26-27-28
64
1-2-3-4 33-34-35-36 17-18-19-20 49-50-51-52 9-10-11-12

41-42-43-44 25-26-27-28 57-58-59-60 5-6-7-8 37-38-39-40
21-22-23-24 53-54-55-56 13-14-15-16 45-46-47-48
29-30-31-32 61-62-63-64
68
1-2-3-4 37-38-39-40 21-22-23-24 53-54-55-56 9-10-11-12

45-46-47-48 29-30-31-32 61-62-63-64 17-18-19-20
57-58-59-60 33-34-35-36 5-6-7-8 41-42-43-44 13-14-15-16
49-50-51-52 25-26-27-28 65-66-67-68
72
1-2-3-4 37-38-39-40 21-22-23-24 57-58-59-60 5-6-7-8

41-42-43-44 25-26-27-28 61-62-63-64 9-10-11-12
45-46-47-48 29-30-31-32 65-66-67-68 13-14-15-16
49-50-51-52 33-34-35-36 69-70-71-72 17-18-19-20
53-54-55-56

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 16 of 22
APPENDIX A:
Bolted Flange Joint Assembly Tracking Sheet

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 17 of 22
Bolted Flange Joint Assembly (BFJA)

Tracking Sheet
General Information:
Facility/Project:
Contractor:
Job/Project No:
Date:
Job description:
Weather Cond.:
Start Time:
Finish Time:
Technician(s):
KMC Rep.(s):
Assembly Information:
Assembly No.:
Flange Size:
Assembly Type:
Upstream Flange:
Downstream
Flange:
Gasket:
Studs:
Nuts:
Pipe to Pipe ___

Pipe to Valve ___
New ___
New ___
Equip./Valve No.:
Class/Rating:
Pipe to Pump ___ Pipe to Blind ___
Other:
Used ___
Used ___
As specified on drawing or
specification?
New, clean and dry?
Yes ___
No ___
Yes ___
No ___
specification?
Liberally coated with nickel anti-seize?
Extend 2-3 threads past full nut?
Yes ___
No ___
Yes ___
Yes ___
No ___
No ___
Yes ___
No ___
specification?

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 18 of 22

Lubricant on face & internal threads?
Flat face installed towards flange?
Yes ___
Yes ___
No ___
No ___
Offset ________
Gap ________
Flange Alignment:
Enter value in mm:
Angular _______
Flange Gasket Working Surface and Nut Bearing Surfaces:

Clean, smooth, free of burrs and scratches?
Yes ___
No ___
Hydraulic Torque Wrench:

Make and Model:
Serial Number:
Range:
Calibration Date:
Reaction Head(s)
recently serviced:
Yes___ No____
Reaction Head(s)
recently lubricated:
Yes___ No___
Torquing Record (Insert torque values for flange fastener size in ft-lbs):
Round 1
(30%)
Round 2
(60%)
Round 3
(80%)
Rounds 4, 5* & 6*
(100%)
* Final torquing pass to be witnessed by authorized KMC personnel.

FOUR HOUR MINIMUM WAIT FOR FINAL RE-TORQUE?
YES_________NO_________
IF FINAL RE-TORQUE TO BE PERFORMED LATER, STATE EXPECTED TIME OR
JOB EVENT________________________________________________________
TENSIONING MEASUREMENT or CALCULATION___________________________
KMC TENSION WITNESS AND AUTHORIZATION____________________________
Contractor Verification:
Name
Signature
Date
Kinder Morgan Canada Authorized Personnel Acceptance:

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010

Name
Signature
Date
Bolted Flange Joint Assembly (BFJA)

Tracking Sheet
Additional comments:
Page 19 of 22

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
APPENDIX B:
Contractor Qualification Guide
Page 20 of 22

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 21 of 22
Contractor Qualification Guide

Contractor shall:
Provide to KMC authorized personal a written BFJA assembly

procedure clearly adhering to the guidelines and practices set forth in
the above KMC Standard prior to beginning any assembly work.
Provide a BFJA disassembly procedure which adheres to the

guidelines set forth in ASME PCC 1-2000 if previously in-service
flanges are to be disassembled.
Ensure that all their employees and sub-contractors hired by them are
competently trained in the assembly of Bolted Flange Joints and willing
to following the practices and procedures outlined by KMC.
Provide documentation verifying the recent calibration of any torque or

tensioning devices utilized in the assembly of Bolted Flange Joints.
Be able to provide documentation on performing hydraulic torque

wrench reaction-head lubrication and maintenance adhering to its
manufacturers recommendations.
Follow any additional directives and guidances as directed by KMC

authorized personal.
Be able to provide a Bolted Flange Joint Assembly resume of past

successful BFJAs when requested by KMC.

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
APPENDIX C:
SPIRAL WOUND GASKET SELECTION
Page 22 of 22

MP3210
Revision 2
February 4, 2010
Page 23 of 22
SPIRAL WOUND GASKET SELECTION

Spiral wound gasket selection:
Spiral winding material to be 304 SS.
Filler material to be flexible graphite.
Outer centering ring to be Carbon Steel unless otherwise specified.
Inner ring, when required, is usually the same material as the winding
material. IE: 304 SS.
Standard as-new thickness is 4.5 mm (0.175) measured at the filler

material. The outer centering ring is 3.2 mm (0.125).
-The above gasket would be identified on the outer centering ring as yellow colored
(identifying the 304 SS winding material), with a grey stripe designating the graphite
filler material.
-The inner and outer centering ring material (if other than carbon steel) is identifiable by
stamped number identification.
-New construction for flanges incorporating spiral wound gaskets must be fabricated
with a gap between the flange working faces of between 3/16 to 1/4" to facilitate gasket
installation.
NOTE: For pigable piping, EXPRESS and PLATTE utilize a non-standard, special-order
spiral wound gasket with a large I.D. for than specified by ASME B16.20 and is
therefore not identified by the B16.20 marking.
Non pigable piping utilizes standard B16.20 spiral wound gaskets.

JOINING PROGRAM
MP3901, Revision 4, November 2003

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 1 of 13
Title: JOINING PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.1 General ............................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Format ................................................................................................................. 3
REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS ................................................................................. 4
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................. 5
3.1 Ambient Temperature ......................................................................................... 5
3.2 CE ....................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 Main Line Piping.................................................................................................. 5
3.4 NPS..................................................................................................................... 5
3.5 Station Piping ...................................................................................................... 5
3.6 WPS .................................................................................................................... 5
WELDING .................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Welding Materials................................................................................................ 6
4.1.1 Filler Metal ............................................................................................... 6
4.1.2 Low-Hydrogen Electrodes ....................................................................... 6
4.1.3 Welds Thicker Than 13 mm ..................................................................... 6
4.1.4 Backing Rings.......................................................................................... 6
4.2 Welding Preparation............................................................................................ 6
4.2.1 Joint Design ............................................................................................. 6
4.2.2 Joint Preparation ..................................................................................... 6
4.2.3 Alignment................................................................................................. 6
4.2.4 Grounding ................................................................................................ 7
4.2.5 Line-up Clamps ....................................................................................... 7
4.2.6 Ambient Weather Conditions ................................................................... 7
4.3 Production Welding ............................................................................................. 7
4.3.1 Removal of Line-up Clamps .................................................................... 7
4.3.2 Cleaning .................................................................................................. 7
4.3.3 Preheat .................................................................................................... 7
4.3.4 Interrupted Welding ................................................................................. 8
4.3.5 Filler and Finish Beads ............................................................................ 8
4.3.6 Weld Reinforcement ................................................................................ 8
4.3.7 Controlled Cooling ................................................................................... 8
4.4 Weld Repair ........................................................................................................ 8
4.4.1 Preparation .............................................................................................. 8
4.4.2 Preheat .................................................................................................... 8

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 2 of 13
5.0
4.4.3 Repair Welding ........................................................................................ 8

4.4.4 Inspection and Testing of Repairs ........................................................... 9
4.4.5 Repair of Cracks in Welds ....................................................................... 9
4.5 Standards of Acceptability of Welding Imperfections .......................................... 9
4.6 Qualification of Welding Procedures ................................................................... 9
4.6.1 General .................................................................................................... 9
4.6.2 Contractor Weld Procedures ................................................................. 10
4.7 Qualification of Welders .................................................................................... 10
4.7.1 General .................................................................................................. 10
4.7.2 Butt Welds ............................................................................................. 10
4.7.3 Fillet Welds ............................................................................................ 10
4.7.4 Pre-Qualification of Welders .................................................................. 10
4.7.5 Test Weld Configuration ........................................................................ 11
4.7.6 Qualification Intervals ............................................................................ 11
NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (NDE) ............................................................. 12
5.1 General ............................................................................................................. 12
5.2 Approval of NDE Procedures ............................................................................ 12
5.3 NDE Requirements ........................................................................................... 12
5.3.1 Butt Welds ............................................................................................. 12
5.3.2 Fillet Welds (empty piping) .................................................................... 12
5.3.3 Fillet Welds (liquid filled piping) ............................................................. 12
5.4 Qualification of NDE and Inspection Personnel ................................................ 12
5.4.1 Welding Inspectors ................................................................................ 12
5.4.2 Nondestructive Examination Technicians .............................................. 13
5.5 Authority of NDE Technicians ........................................................................... 13
APPENDICES
Appendix A:
Appendix B:
Appendix C:
Appendix D:
Appendix E:
Appendix G:
Appendix H:
Reference Index
Weld Procedure Specification TM-2
Glossary of Terms
Supplemental Notes on In Service Welding Procedures

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 3 of 13
1.0 SCOPE
1.1
General
This standard is Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.s joining program, as required by
section 16 of the Onshore Pipeline Regulations of the National Energy Board
Act. All welding shall be completed in accordance with Canadian Standards
standard contains requirements that are in addition to that specification. This
standard is limited to the joining of piping and components for Category I, Low
Vapour pressure piping systems. This standard includes the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
welding procedure specifications (section 4.0 and appendices);

repair procedures (section 4.4);
standards of acceptability of imperfections (section 4.5);
qualification of welding procedures (section 4.6);
qualification of welders (section 4.7);
NDE procedures (section 5.0);
qualification of test and inspection personnel (section 5.4).
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. has determined through documented review

(Ludwig & Associates Report, December 1996) that all of the welding
requirements of CSA Z662 including specification, qualification and inspection
and repair exceed those specified by API 1104. Recent changes to Z662 (2003)
and API 1104 (1999) have not affected this conclusion. Therefore, any
reference to Z662 can be interpreted as a reference to API 1104 where
applicable (i.e. welding performed in the United States).
1.2
Format
This standard includes all Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.s welding procedure
specifications (WPS) for butt-welding and fillet welding of pipe and fittings. The
welding procedures included with this standard are listed in Table 1.2.A.
TABLE 1.2.A
WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION SUMMARY
Appendix
WPS
Weld Type
Pipe Size (NPS)
Thickness (mm)
TM-2
Butt
12 - 30
1.5 - 12.7
TM-4
Butt
2 - 10
4.0 - 12.7
TM-8
Fillet - Sleeve (in

service)
TM-9
Fillet - Branch (in

service)
Pipe
12 - 30
6.35 - 12.7
Sleeve
12 - 30
6.35 - 12.7
Pipe
12 - 30
6.35 - 12.7
Branch
2 - 12
6.35 - 12.7

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 4 of 13

only in the context of this standard. All publications listed shall be the latest edition.
W48.1
Carbon Steel Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
W178.2
Certification of Welding Inspectors
Z662
Z245.11
Steel Fittings
Z245.12
Steel Flanges
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
48.9712
Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1998
Section VIII
Division 1, Rules, Basic Coverage
Section IX
Welding and Brazing Qualification
B31.3
Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
American Welding Society

A5.1
Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes
Department of Transportation, Research and Special Programs Administration,
Code of Federal Regulations
CFR 49, Part 195
Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by Pipeline
American Petroleum Institute

API 1104
Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 5 of 13
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
Ambient Temperature
3.2
CE
CE means Carbon Equivalent as contained in CSA standards and calculated
by the Yurioka Formula:
CE = C + F
Mn + Si + Cu + Ni + Cr + Mo + V + Nb
+ 5B
6
24
15
20
5
TABLE 3.2.A
COMPLIANCE FACTOR (F)
C. Content
C. Content
C. Content
C. Content
<0.06/0.06
.07
0.08
0.09
0.53/0.54
0.56
0.58
0.62
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.66
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.85
0.88
0.92
0.94
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.21/>0.21
0.96
0.97
0.98
0.99/1.00
3.3
Main Line Piping

Those items through which oil industry fluids are conveyed, which includes pipe,
components, and any appurtenances attached thereto, up to and including the
isolating valves used at stations and other facilities.
3.4
NPS
Engineers.
3.5
Station Piping
Any piping after the first valve off the mainline and before the last valve into the
mainline at a station.
3.6
WPS
WPS means weld procedure specification; the document which lists the
parameters to be used in the production of welds of a particular configuration in
accordance with applicable code requirements.

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 6 of 13
4.0 WELDING
The following information shall supplement the welding procedure specifications
contained in the appendices of this standard. Welding shall be performed by qualified
welders in accordance with qualified welding procedure specifications, CSA standard
Z662 and the following requirements.
4.1
Welding Materials
4.1.1 Filler Metal
Filler metals shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau as
Conforming to CSA Standard W48.1 or AWS Standard A5.1.
4.1.2 Low-Hydrogen Electrodes
Low-hydrogen electrodes are shipped in hermetically sealed containers,
which normally can be stored indefinitely without danger of moisture pickup. After removal from sealed containers, low-hydrogen electrodes shall
be stored in heated cabinets at temperatures from 120C to 150C.
4.1.3 Welds Thicker Than 13 mm
When the thickness of a butt weld exceeds 13 mm filler metals producing
low-hydrogen deposits shall be used. Cellulose coated electrodes may
be used for root passes.
4.1.4 Backing Rings
The use of backing rings is prohibited. Welding procedures requiring the
use of backing rings are unacceptable.
4.2
Welding Preparation
4.2.1 Joint Design
The ends of pipe and fittings shall be properly bevelled prior to welding.
Damaged ends will be re-cut and bevelled.
4.2.2 Joint Preparation
The surfaces to be welded shall be dry, smooth, uniform, free of fins,
laminations, tears, scale, slag, grease, paint and other foreign matter
which may adversely affect the welding.
4.2.3 Alignment
Alignment of abutting ends shall be such as to minimize the offset
between surfaces. For pipe of the same wall thickness, the maximum
allowable offset shall be 1.6 mm. Once welding of the root beads has
commenced, hammering at the joint shall not be permissible.

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 7 of 13

4.2.4 Grounding
Welding machine ground leads shall be securely fastened to the metal
being welded. No arcing will be permitted between the ground lead and
the metal, and under no circumstances shall the ground lead be welded
to the pipe.
4.2.5 Line-up Clamps
Line-up clamps shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the
WPS. Temporary fixtures welded to the pipe for purposes of alignment
shall not be permitted.
4.2.6 Ambient Weather Conditions
No welding shall be performed when ambient weather conditions (ie.
moisture, blowing sands, high winds, etc.) may affect the quality of the
completed weld. The use of tents or shelters shall be permitted to make
conditions of welding satisfactory.
4.3
Production Welding
4.3.1 Removal of Line-up Clamps
External line-up clamps, when used, shall not be removed until the
deposited root bead has been uniformly spaced around the pipe and shall
not have a cumulative length of not less than 50% of the pipe
circumference. Internal line-up clamps shall not be removed until the root
bead is complete.
4.3.2 Cleaning
Hand or power tools may be used. Oxides shall be thoroughly removed
from the edges to be welded for a distance of 13 mm on each side. Each
pass shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of slag, grease or dirt before
the commencement of the next pass. Inadequate cleaning can result in
inclusions, poor bead contour and lack of fusion. The completed weld
shall be free of slag and spatter.
4.3.3 Preheat
The wall thickness shall be heated uniformly for a minimum of 50 mm on
either side of the joint to the minimum temperature prescribed. The
preheat temperature shall be checked using temperature indicating
crayons, pyrometers or other suitable means. The preheat temperature
shall not exceed 200C, and shall be maintained until weld completion.

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 8 of 13

4.3.4 Interrupted Welding
If welding is interrupted, the rate of cooling shall be controlled to prevent
detrimental effects in the weld. The preheat specified in the WPS shall be
applied before welding is resumed.
4.3.5 Filler and Finish Beads
Weld beads shall not be commenced before the preceding bead has
been completed. Two consecutive beads shall not be started at the same
circumferential location. The hot pass shall be commenced within 5
minutes after the completion of the root bead.
4.3.6 Weld Reinforcement
The number of weld passes shall be such that completed welds are
convex and substantially uniform in cross section around their entire
circumferences. At no point shall the outside crown surface of welds be
below the surface of the adjacent base metal.
4.3.7 Controlled Cooling
When the ambient temperature falls below 0C all completed welds, or
partially completed welds shall be wrapped to prevent rapid cooling. The
wrapping shall remain in place for a minimum of four hours, or until
welding re-commences.
4.4
Weld Repair
4.4.1 Preparation
Before weld repairs are made, injurious defects shall be removed by
power grinding to clean metal. The contour of the section to be repaired
shall be consistent with the joint design of the repair WPS.
4.4.2 Preheat
Preheating to a temperature of at least 150C shall be used when
effecting repairs. Preheating shall extend to a distance of at least 150
mm from any point of the area to be repaired. Care shall be taken to
prevent overheating, and no part of the area shall be heated to
temperatures in excess of 200C.
4.4.3 Repair Welding
After preparation and preheating of the repair site, the effected area shall
be re-welded in accordance with the WPS used to produce the original
weld or with a repair WPS approved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 9 of 13

4.4.4 Inspection and Testing of Repairs
Repaired areas of welds shall be inspected by the same procedure
previously used. Where repairs are unacceptable, welds shall be
completely removed by cutting out cylinders containing the repaired
welds. The acceptability of repaired welds shall be determined in
accordance with the requirements of clause 4.5
4.4.5 Repair of Cracks in Welds
Where approved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. cracks in circumferential
butt welds may be removed by grinding. Complete removal of the crack
shall be confirmed by liquid penetrant or wet fluorescent particle
inspection by inspectors qualified in accordance with section 5.0 of this
standard.
4.5
Standards of Acceptability of Welding Imperfections

Welds completed in accordance with procedures qualified under CSA Z662 shall
be considered acceptable if they meet the inspection requirements of that
standard.
Welds completed in accordance with procedures qualified under ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX shall be considered acceptable if they
meet the inspection requirements of ASME standard B31.3
Welds completed in accordance with procedures qualified under API 1104 shall
be considered acceptable if they meet the inspection requirements specified by
Clause 9 of API 1104.
Welds not meeting the applicable standard, shall be rejected or repaired as
specified by Clause 4.4.
4.6
Qualification of Welding Procedures

4.6.1 General
Welding procedures shall be qualified in accordance with the
requirements of CSA Z662 or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX. Procedures established in accordance with the latter
standard shall be limited to piping welds that are:
a)
made at manufacturing plants or fabrication shops remote from site;
b)
made on station piping;
c)
joining pipe to components; or components to components.

(Note: this excludes pipe to pipe welds on main line piping)

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 10 of 13

4.6.2 Contractor Weld Procedures
Subject to specific approval, the Contractor's welding procedures may
be used, provided the following conditions are met.
4.7
a)
the WPS has been prepared, qualified and executed by a recognized

organization with expertise in the field of welding; and
b)
the Contractor has not made any change in the WPS; and
c)
the process is SMAW or GTAW or a combination there of; and
d)
the WPS does not require the use of backing rings; and
e)
by signature the Contractor accepts responsibility for both the WPS

and the procedure qualification record.
Qualification of Welders
4.7.1 General
Welders shall qualify by producing acceptable test welds in accordance
with specified procedures for the particular configuration involved. These
test welds shall be made in the presence of a Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
representative. Welders shall be tested in accordance with the standard
with which the procedure was established.
4.7.2 Butt Welds
A welders shall be qualified to produce butt welds for a given procedure if
the test weld meets the following requirements of CSA Z662:
a)
visual inspection requirements of clause 7.2.6.4 and;
b)
a radiograph of the weld meets the requirements of clause 7.2.9.
4.7.3 Fillet Welds

A welders shall be qualified to produce fillet welds for a given procedure if
the test weld meets the following requirements of CSA Z662:
a)
the visual inspection requirements of clause 7.2.6.4 and;
b)
destructive testing of the weld meets the requirements of 7.2.6.6.
4.7.4 Pre-Qualification of Welders

Subject to specific approval, previous welder performance qualifications
may be accepted if the following conditions are met:
a)
the welder has been continuously employed by the Contractor for at

least three months; and

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 11 of 13
b)
the qualification test was performed by the Contractor and meets the
applicable requirements of 4.7.2 or 4.7.3; and
c)
the welder has used the specific WPS within the last three months.
4.7.5 Test Weld Configuration

The test weld will consist of a complete circumferential weld made in the
configuration indicated in Table 4.7.5.A for the specified weld procedure.
TABLE 4.7.5.A
TEST WELD CONFIGURATIONS
WPS
Pipe Size
(NPS)
Thickness
(mm)
TM-2
12 S 24
6.35 t 12.7
full circumferential butt weld, two welders
TM-4
2 S 10
6.35 t 12.7
full circumferential butt weld
TM-8
TM-9
Carrier
24
12.7
Sleeve
24
9.5
Carrier
24
12.7
Branch
9.5
Configuration
The carrier pipe shall be filled with water to

simulate in service conditions and one end of a
complete encirclement sleeve shall be fillet welded
through its entire circumference.
The carrier pipe shall be filled with water to
simulate in service conditions and the branch shall
be welded to the side of the carrier pipe.
4.7.6 Qualification Intervals

Welders routinely employed by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. shall be requalified at intervals of not greater than 2 years.

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 12 of 13
5.0 NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (NDE)

5.1
General
All welded joints, as a minimum, shall receive non-destructive examination
(NDE) prior to being placed in service. All joints should also be hydrostatically
tested, but some tie-in welds are permitted, providing the attached components
and piping have been hydro tested.
5.2

Non-destructive examinations shall be conducted by qualified technicians in
accordance with written procedures approved by Kinder Morgan Canada Inc.
These procedures shall be in accordance with CSA Z662
5.3
NDE Requirements
Completed production welds shall be visually examined to confirm code and
engineering requirements for materials, components, dimensions, joint
preparation, alignment, welding and assembly. These welds shall then be
nondestructively examined as indicated below:
5.3.1 Butt Welds
Butt welds shall be radiographically inspected for 100% of their
circumference.
5.3.2 Fillet Welds (empty piping)
Fillet welds shall be examined by liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
method for 100% of their circumference.
5.3.3 Fillet Welds (liquid filled piping)
Fillet welds on liquid filled piping shall be examined by liquid penetrant or
magnetic particle method for 100% of their circumference. Filled welds
on sleeves shall then be ultrasonically inspected for 100% of their
circumference. These examinations shall completed not less that 48
hours after completion of the weld.
5.4
Qualification of NDE and Inspection Personnel

Personnel retained for the NDE and inspection of welded joints shall be qualified
in accordance with the following standards:
5.4.1 Welding Inspectors
Welding inspectors shall be certified in accordance with CSA W178.2.
Welding inspectors shall be certified to minimum of level II, but level III
qualifications may be required depending on the job complexity.

MP3901
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 13 of 13

5.4.2 Nondestructive Examination Technicians
Nondestructive examination technicians shall be qualified in accordance
with the requirements of level II of CGSB 48.9712-95.
5.5
Authority of NDE Technicians

The authority of the NDE technicians shall be limited to the acceptance or
rejection of weld quality. The NDE technician is not authorized to approve repair
procedures.

MP3901A
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 1 of 2

INTRODUCTION
MP3901 is a compilation of requirements that have been derived from different
sources. Where applicable this appendix lists the reference from which each clause
was developed.
Clause
Title
CSA Z662
Other
4.1 Welding Materials

4.1.1
Filler Metal
4.1.2
Low Hydrogen Electrodes
4.1.3
Welds Thicker than 13 mm
4.1.4
Backing Rings
7.2.4.2.1
7.2.4.2.2.2
4.2 Weld Preparation

4.2.1
Joint Design
7.2.7.6
4.2.2
Joint Preparation
7.2.7.1
4.2.3
Alignment
7.2.7.2
4.2.4
Grounding
7.2.7.3
4.2.5
Line-up Clamps
7.2.7.4
4.2.6
Ambient Weather Conditions
7.2.7.7
4.3 Production Welding

4.3.1
Removal of Line-up Clamps
7.2.7.4
4.3.2
Cleaning
7.2.7.9
4.3.3
Preheat
7.2.7.15.2
4.3.4
Interrupted Welding
4.3.5
Filler and Finish Beads
7.2.7.10.2.1
4.3.6
Weld Reinforcement
7.2.7.10.2.2*
4.3.7
Controlled Cooling
B31.3, 330.2.4
7.2.7.15.4
4.4 Weld Repair

4.4.1
Preparation
7.2.10.3.1
4.4.2
Preheat
7.2.10.3.2
4.4.3
Repair Welding
4.4.4
Inspection and Testing of Repairs
7.2.10.6
4.4.5
Repair of Cracks in Welds
7.2.10.5
4.5 Standards of Acceptability of Imperfections
7.2.1.5
OPR 16

MP3901A
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 2 of 2


Clause
Title
CSA Z662
Other
4.6 Qualification of Welding Procedures

4.6.1
General
4.6.2
Qualification of Welders
7.2.1.5
B31.3,328.2.2
4.7 Qualification of Welders

4.7.1
General
7.2.6.1.1
4.7.2
Butt Welds
7.2.6.1.3
4.7.3
Fillets Welds
7.2.6.1.3
4.7.4
Pre-Qualification of Welders
4.7.5
Test Configuration
4.7.6
Qualification Intervals
OPR 16
B31.3,328.2.3
7.2.6.2
5.0 NON DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (NDE)

5.1
General
OPR 17
5.2
OPR 16
5.3
NDE Requirements
7.2.8.1.2
5.4
NDE and Inspection Personnel
7.2.11.5.1
OPR 16
OPR
NEB Onshore Pipeline Regulations, 1999
B31.3
ASME B31.3, Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping, 1993
Former requirement of CSA Z662, 1996

MP3901B
Revision 4
November 10, 2003
Page 1of 1

Appendix B: Welding Procedure Specification TM-2
WELDING PROCESS AND METHOD
This procedure covers the butt-welding of pipe and
PQR
fittings. All supplemental requirements of section 4.0 of
Process
Kinder Morgan Canada Inc. Standard MP3901 shall
Method
apply to this procedure.
JOINT GEOMETRY
(7.2.5.2.2.1)
TM-2B-1/2
SMAW
Manual
BASE MATERIALS
(7.2.5.2.2.2)
CSA Z245.1, Z245.11, Z245.12;

API 5L; ASTM A53, A105, A106,
A234 WPB
241, 290, 317, 359, 413, 448B,
X42, X46, X52, X60, X65
Standard or
Specification
(P No.: P1)
Grade
Number of passes will vary depending on wall thickness

FILLER METALS
SMYS
CE
448 MPa maximum

0.49 maximum
Wall Thickness (mm)
1.5 - 12.7
Pipe Size (NPS)
12 - 30
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Current Type
(7.2.5.2.2.4)
CSA W48.1
Filler Metal F No.
(7.2.5.2.2.3)
Polarity
(7.2.5.2.2.9)
DC
Reverse
3.2 - 4.0
AMPS
Min/Max
96 - 144
Volts
Min/Max
21 - 33
Travel Speed
(cm/min)
14 - 27
Heat Input
(KJ/cm)
6.6 - 13.9
E55010 (E8010)
3.2 - 4.0
108 - 204
22 - 34
20 - 33
6.5 - 14.2
Fill
E55010 (E8010)
4.0 - 5.0
132 - 204
22 - 33
16 - 32
7.9 - 16.9
Cap
E55010 (E8010)
4.0 - 5.0
108 - 186
21 - 32
11 - 18
12.7 - 19.1
Pass
Electrode
Rod Size (mm)
Root
E41010 (E6010)
Hot
POSITION AND DIRECTION

(7.2.5.2.2.5)
Position
5G
Direction
Vertical Down
PREHEATING AND INTERPASS
(7.2.5.2.2.6)
TEMPERATURES AND CONTROLLED COOLING
Preheat Temp. (C)
150 - 175
Interpass Temp. (C)
150 - 175
Maximum Interval
Root to Hot Pass: 5 min.
Between Passes
Remainder 15 min.
Cooling
Controlled per 4.3.7 of MP3901
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT

None
(7.2.5.2.2.7)
TECHNIQUE
(7.2.5.2.2.10)
Number of Welders
Line-Up Clamps
2
Internal/External
Line-Up Clamp
Removal
Bead
No. Of Passes
Cleaning Methods
Removal after 50%

completion of root
Either String or Weave
3 minimum
Power brush and grind as
required
The second pass shall be started as soon as possible after

the completion of the first pass. The crown of the weld shall
not be below the surface of the adjacent base metal
TEST DATE:
December 18, 1998
WELDER:
L. Verbeek, M. Verbeek
TESTED BY:
Ludwig & Associates
APPROVED BY:
G.A. Toth

MP3901C
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 1of 1

Appendix C: Welding Procedure Specification TM-4

(7.2.5.2.2.1)
This procedure covers the butt-welding of pipe and fittings. All supplemental requirements of section 4.0 of Kinder Morgan C
MP3901 and Appendix H shall apply to this procedure.
Process
SMAW
JOINT GEOMETRY
Method
BASE MATERIAL
(7.2.5.2.2.2)
Material Specifications
CSA Z245.1; Z245.11, Z245.12; API 5

A106, A234 WPB
Pipe Size (NPS)
Wall Thickness (mm)
Grade
CE
Number of passes will vary depending on wall thickness

FILLER METALS
Filler Metal F No.
Pass
Electrode
(7.2.5.2.2.4)
CSA W48.1
3
Rod Size (mm)
Current Type
Polarity
AMPS Min/Max
Volts
Travel Speed
Min/Max
(cm/min)
80/110
24/28
20
E41010 (E6010)
3.2
E48010G (E7010)
3.2
110/140
26/30
24
E48010G (E7010)
4.0
120/150
26/30
16
E48010G (E7010)
4.8
120/150
24/30
16
E48010G (E7010)
4.8
115/145
24/30
14
E48010G (E7010)
4.8
115/145
24/30
12
POSITION
AND DIRECTION
Position
Direction
(7.2.5.2.2.5)
5G
Vertical Down
POSTWELD
(7.2.5.2.2.7)
HEAT TREATMENT
None
Number of Welders
Line-Up Clamps
TECHNIQUE
1
Internal/External
(7

(7.
TEMPERATURES AND CONTROLLED COO
Preheat Temp. (C)
90 - 1
Interpass Temp. (C)
95 - 1
Maximum Interval Between
Passes
Cooling
Root to Hot Pass: 5 min
Controlled per 4.3

(7.2.5.2.2.10)
Line-up Clamp Removal

Cleaning
Removal after 50% c

Power brush and grin
TEST DATE:
August 28, 1986
WELDER:
D. Hoffman
TESTED BY:
Alberta Welding Test Center
APPROVED BY:
G.A. Toth

MP3901D
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 1of 1

Appendix D: Welding Procedure Specification TM-8
(7.2.5.2.2.1)
This procedure covers the fillet welding of full encirclement sleeves to liquid filled pipe. All supplemental requirements
Terasen Pipelines (Trans Mountain) Inc. Standard MP3901 and Appendix H shall apply to this procedure.
Process
SMAW
JOINT GEOMETRY
Method
BASE MATERIAL
(7.2.5.2.2.2)
(7.2.
CSA Z245.1; API 5L; ASTM A53, A106, A5

Pipe Size (NPS)
12 - 3
Wall Thickness (mm)
Pass 3 concentrated on the pipe

Pass 4 concentrated on the sleeve
FILLER METALS
6.35 - 12.7 (Slee
Grade
359 m
CE
0.48 m
(7.2.5.2.2.4)
CSA W48.1
Current Type
Filler Metal F No.
Polarity
Pass
Electrode
Rod Size (mm)
AMPS Min/Max
Volts
Min/Max
Travel Speed
(cm/min)
E48018 (E7018)
3.2
140/150
28/30
17
E48018 (E7018)
3.2
140/150
28/30
7.5
E48018 (E7018)
2.4
100/105
25/27
7.5
E48018 (E7018)
3.2
125/135
26/28
10
POSITION
(7.2.5.2.2.5)

TEMPERATURES AND CONTROLLED COOLIN
AND DIRECTION
Position
2G,5G
Preheat Temp. (C)
150
Direction
Vertical Up
Interpass Temp. (C)
55 - 150
POSTWELD
(7.2.5.2.2.7)
HEAT TREATMENT
None
Maximum Interval Between

Passes
Cooling
TECHNIQUE
Root to Hot Pass: 3

Remainder: 5 m
Controlled per 4.3.7 o
(7.2.5.2.2.10)
Number of Welders
Line-up Clamp Removal
Removal after 50% comp
Line-Up Clamps
Clamp or Tack
Cleaning
Power brush and grind aft
TEST DATE:
June 21, 1988
WELDER:
W. Edlund, K. Robertson
TESTED BY:
Coast Testing
APPROVED BY:
R.T. Ballantyne

MP3901E
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 1of 1

Appendix E: Welding Procedure Specification TM-9
(7.2.5.2.2.1)
This procedure covers the welding of branch connections to pipe filled with liquid. All supplemental requirements of
section 4.0 of Terasen Pipelines (Trans Mountain) Inc. Standard MP3901 and Appendix H shall apply to this
procedure.
Process
SMAW
JOINT GEOMETRY
Method
Manual
BASE MATERIAL
(7.2.5.2.2.2)
(7.2.5.2.
2.3)
(P No.:
P1)
CSA Z245.1, Z245.11, Z245.12; API 5L;ASTM

A53, A105, A106, A234 WPB
Pass 3 & 5 shall be concentrated on the carrier pipe

Pass 4 & 6 shall be concentrated on the branch
Branches over NPS 2 require reinforcement
FILLER METALS
Attribute
Branch
Carrier
Pipe Size (NPS)
2 - 12
12 - 30
Wall Thickness (mm)
6.35 - 12.7
6.35 - 12.7
Grade
359 max.
CE
0.47 max.
(7.2.5.2.2.4)
(7.2.5.2.
2.9)
Filler Metal F No.
Pass
Electrode
1
E48018 (E7018)
CSA W48.1
4
Rod Size
(mm)
2.4
E48018 (E7018)
2.4
90/110
26/28
10
30
E48018 (E7018)
3.2
120/140
28/30
10
30
E48018 (E7018)
2.4
95/120
28/30
30
E48018 (E7018)
2.4
95/110
28/30
30
E48018 (E7018)
2.4
95/110
28/30
30
AMPS
Min/Max
90/125
POSITION
(7.2.5.2.2.5)
AND DIRECTION
Current Type
Polarity
Volts
Travel Speed
Min/Max
(cm/min)
25/27
10
DC
Reverse
Burn Off Rate
cm/min)
30

(7.2.5.2
.2.6)
TEMPERATURES AND CONTROLLED COOLING

Position
2G,5G
Vertical Up or
Horizontal
Direction
POSTWELD
(7.2.5.2.2.7)
HEAT TREATMENT
None
Preheat Temp. (C)
150
Interpass Temp. (C)
50 - 150
Maximum
IntervalBetween
Passes
Cooling
TECHNIQUE
Root to Hot Pass: 5 min.

Remainder 15 min.
Controlled per 4.3.7 of MP3901
(7.2.5.2.2.10)

MP3901E
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 2of 1

Appendix E: Welding Procedure Specification TM-9
Number of Welders
Line-Up Clamps
Tack Weld
TEST DATE:
May 6, 1991
TESTED BY:
Coast Testing
Line-up Clamp
Removal
Cleaning
WELDER:
APPROVED
BY:
Not applicable
Power brush and grind after each
pass
G. Poncelet, W. Edlund, A. MacDougal, K.

Robertson
K.L. Lien

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 1 of 9

APPENDIX G: Glossary of Terms
INTRODUCTION
This appendix defines basics terms used in welding technology.
G.1
Arc Welding
A group of welding processes where fusion is produced by heating with an
electric arc or arcs, with or without the application of pressure and with or
without the use of filler metal. The filler metal is usually deposited in a
series of passes, or a single progression of the welding along a joint, weld
deposit or substrate. The result of the weld pass is a weld bead, layer or
spray deposit.
FIGURE G.1.A -- WELD PASS NOMENCLATURE
G.2
Backing Ring
Backing in the form of a ring that can be used in the welding of piping to
prevent weld spatter from entering a pipe and to assure full penetration of
the weld to the inside of the pipe wall.
G.3
Base Metal
The metal to be welded, brazed, soldered or cut. It is also referred to as the
parent metal.
G.4
Bevel Angle
A bevel is a type of edge or end preparation. The bevel angle is the angle
formed between the prepared edge of a member and a plane perpendicular
to the surface of the member.
G.5
Bond
The junction of the weld metal and the base metal or the junction of the
base metal parts when weld metal is not present. See Figure G.14.A.

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 2 of 9

G.6
Butt-Joint
A joint between two members lying in the same plane. Other common joint
types are shown in Table G.6.A.
TABLE G.6.A -- TYPES OF JOINTS
Butt
Tee
Corner
Lap
Edge
G.7
Covered Electrode
A filler metal electrode, used in arc welding, consisting of a metal core wire
with a relatively thick covering which provides protection for the molten
metal from the atmosphere, improves the properties of the weld metal, and
stabilizes the arc.
G.8
Defect
A flaw or imperfection of such size, shape, orientation, location or properties
as to be rejectable. A flaw is an imperfection or unintentional discontinuity
which is detectable by a nondestructive examination.
G.9
Deposited Metal
Filler metal that has been added during a welding operation.
G.10 End Preparation

The contour prepared on the end of a pipe, or fitting for welding.
G.11 Filler Metal
Metal to be added in welding, soldering or brazing.
G.12 Fillet Weld
A weld of approximately triangular cross-section joining two surfaces
approximately at right angles to each other in a lap joint, tee joint, corner
joint or socket weld. See Figure G.30.A.
G.13 Flux
Material used to dissolve, prevent accumulation of, or facilitate removal of
oxides or other undesirable substances during welding, soldering or brazing.

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 3 of 9

G.14 Fusion
The melting together of filler and base metal, or base metal only, which
results in coalescence. The depth of fusion is the distance that fusion
extends into the base metal from the surface melted during welding. The
fusion zone is the area of base metal melted. Incomplete fusion is a
condition in which fusion is less than complete and which does not result in
melting completely through the thickness of the joint.
FIGURE G.14.A -- WELD FUSION
G.15 Groove
Weld
A weld made in a groove between two members to be joined, such as a butt
weld. The groove angle is the included angle of the groove between the
parts to be joined. The groove face is the surface included in the groove.
Other common weld types are shown in Table G.15.A. Also see Figure
G.25.A.
TABLE G.15.A -- TYPES OF GROOVE WELDS
Type of Weld
Single
Double
Square
Bevel Groove
V-Groove
J-Groove
U-Groove

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 4 of 9

G.16 Heat Affected Zone (HAZ)

That portion of the base metal which has not been melted but whose
mechanical properties have been altered by heat of welding or cutting.
FIGURE G.16.A -- WELDING ZONES
G.17 Joint Penetration

The minimum depth a groove weld extends from its face into a joint,
exclusive of reinforcement. See Figure G.25.A.
G.18 Nondestructive Examination (NDE)
Inspection by methods that do not destroy the item, part or component to
determine its suitability for use. The most common forms of NDE are:
G.18.1 Liquid Penetrant Examination
This method finds discontinuities that are open to the surface of
solid and nonporous materials. This method is based on the effect
of capillary action or attraction on the surface of a liquid. A liquid
penetrant (usually a red dye) is applied to the clean surface of the
specimen. Time is allowed for the penetrant to seep into the
opening. Excess penetrant is removed from the surface. A
developer, normally white in colour, is applied to aid in drawing the
penetrant out to the surface. The red penetrant is drawn out of the
discontinuity, and is located by contrast against the white
background of the developer.
G.18.2 Magnetic Particle Examination
This method locates surface and subsurface discontinuities in ferromagnetic materials. The presence of these defects is detected by
use of finely divided ferromagnetic particles applied over the
surface. Some of these magnetic particles are gathered and held
by the magnetic leakage field created by the defect. The particles

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 5 of 9

gathered at the surface generally indicate the location, size, shape
and extent of the defect.
G.18.3 Radiographic Examination
This method uses short wave length radiations, such as x-rays or
gamma rays, to penetrate objects for detecting the presence and
nature of macroscopic defects or other structural discontinuities.
The shadow image of defects or discontinuities is recorded either
on a fluorescent screen or on photographic film.
G.18.4 Ultrasonic Examination
This method uses beams of high frequency sound waves to detect
surface and subsurface flaws. The sound waves travel through the
material with some attendant loss of energy and are reflected at
interfaces. The reflected beam is detected and analyzed to define
the presence and location of flaws.
G.19 Polarity
The direction of flow of current with respect to the welding electrode and
workpiece.
G.19.1 Reverse Polarity
The arrangement of direct current arc welding leads with the work
as the negative pole and the electrode as the positive pole of the
welding arc; or direct current electrode positive.
G.19.2 Straight Polarity
The arrangement of direct current arc welding leads with the work
as the positive pole and the electrode as the negative pole of the
welding arc; or direct current electrode negative.
G.20 Porosity
The presence of gas pockets or voids in metal
G.21 Postweld Heat Treatment
Any heat treatment subsequent to welding.
G.22 Preheating
The application of heat to a base metal prior to a welding or cutting
operation.

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 6 of 9

G.23 Purging
The displacement during welding, by an inert or neutral gas, of the air inside
piping underneath the weld area in order to avoid oxidation or contamination
of the underside of the weld. Gases commonly used are argon, helium and
nitrogen.
G.24 Reinforcement Weld
Weld metal on the face of a groove weld in excess of the metal necessary
for the specified weld. See Figure G.25.A.
G.25 Root Face
The portion of the groove face adjacent to the root of the joint. This portion
is also referred to as the Root Land.
FIGURE G.25.A -- GROOVE JOINT NOMENCLATURE
G.26 Root of Joint

That portion of the joint to be welded where the members to be joined
approach nearest to each other. In cross section, the root of a joint may be
a point, a line or an area. See Figure G.25.A.
G.27 Root Opening
The separation, between the members to be joined, at the root of the joint.
See Figure G.25.A.
G.28 Root Penetration
The depth which a groove weld extends into the root of a joint as measured
on the centerline of the root cross section. See Figure G.25.A.

9I
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 7 of 9

G.29 Seal Weld
A fillet weld used on a pipe joint primarily to obtain fluid tightness as
opposed to mechanical strength; usually used in conjunction with a
threaded joint.
G.30 Size of Weld
FIGURE G.30.A FILLET WELD

NOMENCLATURE
For a groove weld, the joint

preparation which is the
depth of chamfering plus the
root penetration (see Figure
G.25.A). For fillet welds, the
leg length of the largest
isosceles right triangle which
can be inscribed within the
fillet weld cross section.
G.31 Slag Inclusion
Nonmetallic solid material entrapped in weld metal or between weld metal.
G.32 Socket Weld
Fillet-type seal weld used to join pipe to valves and fittings or to other
sections of pipe. Normally used for piping NPS 2 or smaller.
G.33 Spatter
In arc welding, the metal particles expelled during welding that do not form
part of the weld.
G.34 Stringer Bead
A type of weld bead made by moving the electrode in a direction essentially
parallel to the axis of the bead. There is no appreciable transverse
oscillation of the electrode. See also Weave Bead.
G.35 Tack Weld
A small weld made to hold parts of a weldment in proper alignment until the
final welds are made.

MP3901G
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 8 of 9

G.36 Underbead Crack

A crack in the HAZ or in previously deposited weld metal paralleling the
underside contour of the deposited weld bead and usually not extending to
the surface.
FIGURE G.36.A -- WELD CRACKS
FIGURE G.37.A -- WELD UNDERCUT
G.37 Undercut
A groove melted into the base material adjacent the toe or root of a weld
and left unfilled by weld metal.
G.38 Weave Bead
A type of weld bead made with oscillation of the electrode transverse to the
axis of the weld as contrasted to a stringer bead.
G.39 Weld Metal
That portion of a weld which has been melted during welding. The portion
may be filler metal, base metal or both.
G.40 Welding Method
Common welding methods are defined as follows:
G.40.1 Manual Welding
Welding wherein the entire welding operation is performed and
controlled by hand.
G.40.2 Semi-Automatic Welding
Arc welding with equipment which controls only the filler metal feed.
The advance of the welding is manually controlled.

MP3901G
Revision 1
November 10, 2003
Page 9 of 9

G.40.3 Automatic Welding
Welding with equipment which performs the entire welding
operation without constant observation and adjustment of the
controls by an operator. The equipment may or may not perform
the loading and unloading of the work.
G.41 Welding Process
Welding processes common to pipeline welding are defined as follows:
G.41.1 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
An arc welding process in which fusion is produced by heating with
an electric arc between a covered metal electrode and the work.
Shielding is obtained from decomposition of the electrode covering.
Pressure is not used and filler metal is obtained from the electrode.
This type of welding is commonly referred to as stick welding.
G.41.2 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
An arc welding process that employs a continuous solid filler metal
(consumable) electrode. Shielding is obtained entirely from an
externally supplied gas or gas mixture. This type of welding is
commonly referred to as MIG welding (metal inert gas).
G.41.3 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)
An arc welding process that employs a tungsten (nonconsumable)
electrode. Shielding is obtained entirely from a gas or gas mixture.
Pressure may or may not be used and filler metal may or may not
be used. This type of welding is commonly referred to as TIG
welding (tungsten inert gas).
G.41.4 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)
An arc welding process that produces fusion of metals by heating
them with arc or arcs drawn between a bare metal electrode or
electrodes and the base metals. The arc is shielded by a blanket of
granular fusible material. Pressure is not used and filler metal is
obtained from the electrode. The type of welding process is
commonly used to join the long seam on line pipe.

MP3901H
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 1 of 3

APPENDIX H: Supplemental Notes on In Service Welding Procedures
INTRODUCTION
This appendix supplements welding procedure specifications (WPS) TM-8 and
TM-9. These procedures have been specifically designed for welding attachments
to pipelines while in service (full of static liquid under reduced pressure).
H.1
General
The major objective of WPS TM-8 and TM-9 is to control the cooling rate of
the heat affected zone where the toe of the fillet weld meets the pipe. This
is accomplished through control of heat input and bead placement. The
pipe material in this case can have relatively high carbon equivalent. When
subjected to the severe thermal cycles created by the welding operation,this
region can be hardened to the extent of being crack sensitive. Because of
this, a great degree of care must be exercised regarding welding procedure
control.
H.2
Hydrogen Cracking
The area most prone to cracking is the coarse grained heat affected zone at
the toe of the weld in the carrier pipe. Cracks formed in this area are
hydrogen related. In order for hydrogen cracks to occur, the following
conditions must be present:
a)
a source of hydrogen;
b)
a cooling rate which will produce susceptible microstructures;
c)
high restraint and/or stress acting on the weld.
Since the fillet weld does not lend itself to the control of restraint and stress
by procedure, control of cracking can be most effectively achieved by
addressing the first two points.
H.3
Hydrogen
Hydrogen may be present in the base metal, welding consumables, the
environment or any combination of the three.
H.3.1
Preheat
Although not totally effective because of the heat sink created by
the product filled line, it can be extremely useful in removing any
moisture from the surfaces to be welded.

MP3901H
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 2 of 3

H.3.2
Consumables
Low hydrogen electrodes, by the nature of their coating, are very
sensitive to moisture pick-up. If exposed to atmospheric conditions
for more than 2 - 3 hours they can absorb enough moisture to make
them unsuitable for this application. Therefore portable electrode
stabilizing ovens are essential. These ovens should have good
door seals and be capable of holding a temperature of 120C to
150C. When dispensing electrodes from the ovens, welders
and/or helpers should take no more than enough electrodes to
complete 30 minutes of welding. The electrodes should be handled
with clean gloves as bare hands are a source of moisture,
particularly on warm humid days.
H.4
Control of Cooling
The critical area is in the heat affected zone of the pipe material at the weld
toe. It is therefore very important to cool this area down as slowly as
possible to minimize the formation of martensite (a brittle crack sensitive
microstructure). The procedure is designed to slow the cooling rate by
putting as much welding heat into the pipe as possible on the last weld pass
on the pipe.
FIGURE H.4.A -- WELD PASS CONFIGURATION
This pass must put as much heat as possible
into the pipe. The intent is to favour the pipe
surface rather than passes 1 & 2.
Passes 1 & 2 are placed more on the sleeve

(or branch connection). This allows room for
pass 3 to be concentrated on the pipe.
In order to accommodate more of the third pass on the pipe and still achieve
an acceptable profile, it may be desirable to place more of passes 1 & 2 on
the sleeve (or branch). This would leave more room on the pipe for pass 3.
2.4 mm (3/32") electrodes were chosen for the third pass so the welder can
go as slow as possible and place most of the bead on the pipe. Larger
diameter electrodes wound not give the same degree of weld pool control
and at the slow travel speeds would be prone to undercut and excessive
convexity.

MP3901H
Revision 2
November 10, 2003
Page 3 of 3

H.5
Note:
Summary
In order to reduce the risk of hydrogen cracking when welding on liquid
filled, line pipe, the following points must be exercised:
a)
Eliminate all potential sources of hydrogen by preheating, properly

storing and handling the consumables, making sure the material is
clean and sheltering the operation from the environment.
b)
Put as much heat into the pipe as possible, particularly on the last pass
which touches the pipe. This can be done by placing most of that pass
on the pipe and travelling as slow as possible (not more than 7.5
cm/sec.).
c)
Close control on the welding procedure must be maintained at all

times.
In spite of the fact that TM-9 is not a simple fillet weld (it is a combination bevel and fillet weld,
with the fillet weld providing reinforcement for the bevel weld) the principles behind the
development of the procedure are the same.

STATION HYDROSTATIC TEST STANDARD

MP4111, Revision 3, May 2009

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 1 of 15
Title: STATION HYDROSTATIC TEST STANDARD
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
1.1
General ...................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Category .................................................................................................... 3
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 3
3.1
ANSI .......................................................................................................... 3
3.2
3.3
3.4
Main Line Piping ........................................................................................ 4
3.5
MOP........................................................................................................... 4
3.6
NPS ........................................................................................................... 5
3.7
PN .............................................................................................................. 5
3.8
Station Piping ............................................................................................. 5
3.9
SMYS......................................................................................................... 5
TEST REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 5
4.1
General ...................................................................................................... 5
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
4.3
Stresses at Test and Operating Pressures ................................................ 5

Test Medium .............................................................................................. 6
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
Piping Exposed During Testing ................................................................. 7

Piping Buried During Testing ..................................................................... 7
Atmospheric Drain Systems ...................................................................... 7
Test Equipment .......................................................................................... 8

4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
5.0
General ...................................................................................................... 6
Additives .................................................................................................... 7
Other Test Media ....................................................................................... 7
Test Pressures and Duration ..................................................................... 7

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.5
Test Supervision ........................................................................................ 5

Safety ........................................................................................................ 5
Equipment Required .................................................................................. 8

Equipment Calibration ............................................................................... 8
Certification................................................................................................ 9
Instrumentation Arrangement .................................................................... 9
Test Head Assemblies............................................................................... 9
TEST PREPARATION ........................................................................................ 10

5.1
Cleaning................................................................................................... 10
5.2
Bolting, vents and Drains ......................................................................... 10

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 2 of 15
6.0
7.0
8.0
5.3
Insulation ................................................................................................. 11
5.4
Temperature Recorders ........................................................................... 11
TEST PROCEDURES ........................................................................................ 11
6.1
General .................................................................................................... 11
6.2
Filling ....................................................................................................... 11
6.3
Temperature Stabilization ........................................................................ 12
6.4
Pressurization .......................................................................................... 12
6.5
Strength Test ........................................................................................... 12
6.6
Relief of Test Medium .............................................................................. 12
6.7
Visual Inspection ...................................................................................... 12
6.8
Depressurizing ......................................................................................... 13
6.9
Freezing Protection .................................................................................. 13
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................. 13
7.1
Test Pressure .......................................................................................... 13
7.2
Reconciliations ......................................................................................... 13
RECORDING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................................ 13
8.1
Test Data Logging ................................................................................... 13
8.2
Hydrostatic Test Record .......................................................................... 14
8.3
Hydrostatic Test File ................................................................................ 15

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 3 of 15
1.0 SCOPE
1.1
General
This standard covers the mandatory hydrostatic test requirements for
station piping systems.
This standard shall be limited to systems
transporting low vapour pressure (LVP) liquid hydrocarbons.
The scope of this standard includes all pressure pipe, fittings and fabricated
assemblies used in station piping systems. This standard excludes
pneumatic testing and hydrostatic testing of valves, main line piping
systems or buried station piping.
1.2
Category
This standard covers piping systems intended for ASME B31.4 or Category
1 service per CSA Z662.

supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific requirements in this standard;
reference publications should therefore be applied only in the context of this
standard.
CSA Z662
ASME B31.4
Pipeline Transportation Systems for

Liquid Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids
Pipeline Safety Regulations Part 195
Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by

Pipeline
API RP1110
Pressure Testing of Liquid Petroleum

Pipelines
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1
ANSI
ANSI means American National Standards Institute and for the purposes of
this standard refers to the ANSI system of nominal pressure class
designation as referenced in ANSI/ASME B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 4 of 15
3.2
Fabricated Assemblies
Fabricated assemblies shall include prefabricated components such as:
piping spools; scraper traps; and main line block valves with end extensions
and associated by-pass piping. The term excludes such manufactured
components as: valves; strainers; and pump casings.
3.3
Hydrostatic Testing
Hydrostatic testing is the application of internal pressure above the normal
or maximum operating pressure to a segment of piping or pressure
containing component. This pressure is applied under no flow conditions for
a fixed period of time, utilizing a liquid test medium.
3.4
Main Line Piping

Main line piping includes those items through which LVP liquid hydrocarbon
products are transported, which includes pipe, components, and any
appurtenances attached thereto, up to and including the isolating valves
used at pump stations and other facilities.
Figure 3.3.A TYPICAL PUMP STATION VALVING
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.5
APPLICATIONS
Station Sectionalizing
Station Isolation
Unit or Main Line Pump Isolation
Main Line Sectionalizing
Main Line Sectionalizing By-Pass
MOP
MOP means Maximum Operating Pressure expressed in kPa or psi. The
MOP shall not be greater than 80% of the test pressure.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 5 of 15

3.6
NPS
NPS means Nominal Pipe Size, and the NPS system of nominal size
3.7
PN
PN means Pressure Nominal and the PN system of nominal pressure class
designation is contained in standards prepared by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO).
The numerical part of the
designation approximates the maximum cold working pressure rating in bars
(100 kPa).
3.8
Station Piping
Station piping includes all pipe, components and any appurtenances at
Pump Stations, Tank Farms and Terminals between the station isolating
valves off the main line.
3.9
SMYS
SMYS means Specified Minimum Yield Strength. This is the minimum yield
strength prescribed by the specification or standard under which the
material is purchased.
4.0 TEST REQUIREMENTS

4.1
General
4.1.1 Test Supervision
All testing shall be performed under general supervision of a Kinder
Morgan designated representative who shall witness the test, review
test records, and accept the results pursuant to Section 7.0 of this
standard. The designated representative shall be independent of
any contractor who carries out the pressure testing and any
contractor who constructed the piping or any component intended for
use in the piping. The designated representative shall be familiar
with the requirements of this standard.
4.1.2 Safety
Piping under hydrostatic test contains considerable stored energy
which can pose a safety hazard to employees, contractors, and the
public. Necessary precautions are provided in the Kinder Morgan
Safety Standards Manuals or the project specific safety plans as
applicable.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 6 of 15

4.2
Stresses at Test and Operating Pressures

The pressures and hoop stresses (listed as a percent of SMYS) in Table
4.2.A are based on the material grades and pipe wall thicknesses specified
in Kinder Morgan Canada Standard Piping Classes listed in Table A.1.A of
MP1110A, Station and Terminal Piping Design, Appendix A. For instances
where the test pressure produces a hoop stress equal or greater than 100%
of SMYS, a PV plot is required in accordance with Section 6.4.1 of Kinder
Morgan Canada Standard MP4121.
TABLE 4.2.A -- THE RELATIONSHIP OF TEST AND DESIGN PRESSURES
TO HOOP STRESS
4.3
Piping Class A (PN 20)
Piping Class B (PN 50)
Pipe
Size
(NPS)
Press.
@
100%
SMYS
(kPa)
Press.
@
100%
SMYS
(kPa)
% SMYS @
Piping Class C (PN 100)
Press.
% SMYS @
@
100%
Test
MOP SMYS Pressure MOP
(kPa)
% SMYS @
Test
Pressure
Test
Pressure
MOP
70,585
3.4
2.7
70,585
8.8
7.0
70,585
17.6
14.1
65,662
4.3
2.9
65,662
9.5
7.6
65,662
18.9
15.1
50,695
4.7
3.7
50,695
12.2
9.8
50,695
24.5
19.6
44,283
5.4
4.3
44,283
14.0
11.2
44,283
28.0
22.4
29,283
8.0
6.4
29,283
20.9
16.7
29,283
41.7
33.4
25,386
9.4
7.5
25,386
24.5
19.5
25,386
48.9
39.1
20,363
11.7
9.3
20,363
30.5
24.4
20,363
61.0
48.8
17,995
13.2
10.6
17,995
34.5
27.6
17,995
69.0
55.2
10
16,361
14.5
11.6
16,361
38.0
30.3
16,361
75.9
60.7
12
14,182
16.7
13.4
14,182
43.8
35.0
18,899
65.7
52.5
14
12,917
18.4
14.7
12,917
48.1
38.4
17,214
72.1
57.7
16
11,303
21.0
16.8
11,303
54.9
43.9
18,125
82.4
65.9
20
9,042
26.3
21.0
9,042
68.7
54.9
17,950
85.6
68.5
24
7,530
31.5
25.2
7,530
82.5
65.9
14,949
83.1
66.4
30
6,028
39.4
31.5
8,033
77.3
61.7
11,967
103.7
83.0
36
5,026
47.3
37.8
6,697
92.7
73.2
9,977
124.4
99.5
Test Medium
4.3.1 General
The preferred test medium is water without additives. All practical
steps shall be taken to use water as a test medium before

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 7 of 15

considering other test media. The reconciliation equations included
in Appendix A of MP4121 are valid for water only.
4.3.2 Additives
All necessary disposal arrangements and/or permits must be in place
prior to introduction of any additives to hydrotest water.
4.3.3 Other Test Media
Use of any other test media shall require prior written approval from
Kinder Morgan.
4.4
Test Pressures and Duration

4.4.1 Piping Exposed During Testing
Where a complete visual inspection is conducted to detect leaks, the
test duration and pressure shall be at least 1 hour at a minimum test
pressure of 1.25 times MOP as specified in Table 4.4.A. Four hour
test durations are required on systems regulated under the United
States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Part 195. The
maximum pressure for piping during testing shall not be greater than
105% of the test pressure. Any excursions above 102.5% of the test
pressure shall be reported to the Kinder Morgan designated
representative immediately. In no case shall the pressure be allowed
to exceed 105% of the pressure corresponding to 100% of the SMYS
of the pipe.
4.4.2 Piping Buried During Testing
Buried piping shall be tested in accordance with Kinder Morgan
Canada Standard MP4121 Main Line Hydrostatic Test Procedure.
4.4.3 Atmospheric Drain Systems
Where a complete visual inspection is conducted to detect leaks, the
test duration shall be at least 1 hour at a minimum test pressure of
700 kPa (100 psi).

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 8 of 15
TABLE 4.4.A MINIMUM TEST PRESSURES AND DURATION FOR EXPOSED

STATION PIPING
Test Duration
(hr)
Test Configuration
Exposed
Piping
(1.25 x MOP)
Can
US
(kPa)
(psi)
Class A, PN 20 (150 ANSI)
2375
344
Class B, PN 50 (300 ANSI)
6210
900
Class C, PN 100 (600 ANSI)
12,415
1800
700
100
Atmospheric Drain Systems
4.5
Test Pressure
Test Equipment
4.5.1 Equipment Required
The numbers of recorders, gauges, pumps, and other necessary
equipment are a function of the scope of a hydrostatic test. The
equipment listed in Table 4.5.1.A is the minimum required for a test
of prefabricated piping in a shop or yard.
TABLE 4.5.1.A -- MINIMUM EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Equipment
Quantity
Plunger type squeeze pump with or without revolution counter

as required
Pressure recorder scaled for 1.5 x test pressure
Temperature recorder to record pipe and ambient temperatures
Dead weight tester accurate to 5 kPa (0.5 psi)
Pressure gauge scaled for 1.5 x test pressure
Thermometer accurate to 0.1C ( 0.2F)
Calibrated liquid measure to 10 ml
4.5.2 Equipment Calibration

All recorders and gauges shall be calibrated to 1% of full scale as
checked by dead weight tester and certified thermometers and/or ice
bath.
All recorders and gauges used for the hydrostatic test shall be
calibrated within 90 days of the test date. Calibration reports shall
include model, serial number, certified calibration accuracy, date of

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 9 of 15

certification, and shall be signed by the technician of the third-party
testing company.
In addition to the above, pressure recorders will require a pre-test
and post test calibration. The tests will be completed at the test
location just prior to and after completion of the test by a qualified
technician. Any equipment calibration discrepancy discovered
between the pre test and post test calibration checks greater than +/2.5% of test pressure shall be recorded and reported to the Kinder
Morgan designated representative. All calibration documents are to
be signed by the qualified technician and the designated
representative.
All pressure recorders shall have a five point calibration at 0, 25, 50,
75, and 100% of calibrated span.
4.5.3 Certification
Dead weight testers to be used for hydrostatic testing shall be
certified to a traceable standard within 1 year of the date of the test.
Calibrated thermometers to be used for hydrostatic testing shall be
certified to a traceable standard within 10 years of the date of the
test. Documentation shall be provided.
4.5.4 Instrumentation Arrangement
Refer to Figures 4.5.A for a typical instrumentation arrangement.
4.5.5 Test Head Assemblies
Test head assemblies shall not be pressurized to a stress exceeding
75% of the SMYS of the test head material. The ancillary piping shall
not be pressurized to a stress exceeding 50% of the SMYS of the
piping.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 10 of 15
FIGURE 4.5.A -- HYDROSTATIC TEST SET-UP, FULLY EXPOSED PIPING
TEST SECTION
LEGEND:
TR
PR
PI
DWT
*
Temperature Recorder
Pressure Recorder
Pressure Gauge
Dead Weight Tester
Locate in shade
5.0 TEST PREPARATION

5.1
Cleaning
Welding slag, sand and construction debris shall be removed from the test
section prior to commencement of the test.
5.2
Bolting, Vents and Drains

Check and tighten bonnet flange bolts, valve flange bolts, and packing of all
valves in test section. Remove and plug any bonnet relief valves which may
be vented to atmosphere. Check all plugged connections.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 11 of 15

5.3
Insulation
If ambient conditions (eg. wind, rain, sunlight) may have adverse effects on
the test results, the piping shall be insulated and/or covered and heated.
5.4
Temperature Recorders
All test equipment shall be installed prior to filling the section with water.
One recorder is installed with the temperature sensor attached to the pipe
and insulated. A second recorder shall be used to record the ambient air
temperature.
6.0 TEST PROCEDURES

6.1
General
The test procedure covers five distinct phases. These phases include:
filling, temperature stabilization, pressurization, strength test and
depressurization. These phases are illustrated in Figure 6.1.A.
FIGURE 6.1.A -- HYDROSTATIC TEST PHASES
6.2
Filling
Long lines, such as tank lines, should be filled with water using a new
urethane pig ahead of the fill water. If filling with a pig, a back pressure
should be maintained ahead of the pig to prevent the pig from running away
from the water when it is travelling down hill. This can be achieved by
controlling the rate at which air leaves the opposite end of the test section.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 12 of 15

If possible, test sections should be sloped so that air will migrate to high
points.
6.3
Temperature Stabilization
After the majority of free air as has been removed using high point vents,
the test section shall be pressurized to 60% of the final test pressure and
held until the temperature stabilizes.
6.4
Pressurization
Upon completion of the temperature stabilization period, the pressure shall
be raised to the test pressure. Pressurizing shall be conducted in such a
manner to prevent surges and vibrations. All hydrostatic tests shall
commence on the hour or half hour. All personnel should be located in
accordance with the requirements of subsection 4.1.3 of this standard until
completion of the strength test.
6.5
Strength Test
Upon reaching the specified test pressure, the test section shall be isolated.
This may include disconnecting the pump. After transient pressure
conditions in the test section have dissipated, the strength test shall begin.
6.6
Relief of Test Medium

Test medium shall be withdrawn prior to the pressure exceeding the lessor
of 102.5% of the design test pressure or the pressure corresponding to
100% SMYS of the pipe. If relief of the test medium is required, this volume
may be re-injected later should the pressure decrease. All interim
withdrawals shall be measured, logged, and reconciled. Leaks which
appear at flanged or threaded connections must be immediately repaired as
they appear. The pressure should be reduced to at least 60% of the test
pressure before leaking connections are tightened.
6.7
Visual Inspection
Upon completion of the strength test, the pressure shall be reduced to a
maximum of 115% of MOP and a visual inspection of the piping shall be
performed to confirm the absence of leaks. No visible leakage is permitted.
There shall be no visible evidence of drops or wetting of external surfaces.
Any evidence of leaks will require the test to be restarted. After completion
of the inspection, the test section can be depressurized. No visual
inspection shall be conducted within 15 metres (50 feet) of the pipe
while the test pressure exceeds 115% of MOP.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 13 of 15

6.8
Depressurizing
After successful completion of the strength test the pressure shall be bled
down. Depressurizing should be carried out slowly to prevent hydraulic
surges and avoid excessive pipe vibration.
6.9
Freezing Protection
Dead legs, low points, and drain connections shall be emptied of water or
alternately displaced of water by methanol if freezing temperatures may
occur prior to placing the test section in service.
7.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

The hydrostatic test will be considered acceptable if the conditions listed in
subsections 7.1 and 7.2 are maintained during the test period and complete
records are created and validated by the Kinder Morgan designated
representative.
7.1
Test Pressure
The hydrostatic pressure in the test section does not fall below 100% of the
test pressure.
7.2
Reconciliations
The following circumstances shall be reconciled with the test data within the
accuracy limits of the instrumentation.
a)
the recorded pressure changes with the recorded temperature

changes;
b)
the additions and withdrawals of test medium that are required to

maintain the test pressure;
A copy of the reconciliation computations are required for regulatory

approval of the hydrostatic test.
8.0 RECORDING AND DOCUMENTATION

8.1
Test Data Logging

During the first hour of the test, the data listed below shall be recorded
every 15 minutes and every 30 minutes thereafter for the balance of test.
a) time that the reading is taken;
b) the ambient temperature indicated by the recorder;

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 14 of 15

c) the ambient temperature indicated by a mercury thermometer;
d) the pipe temperature indicated by the recorder;
e) the test pressure indicated by the deadweight tester;
f) the test pressure indicated by the recorder;
g) any remarks, such as weather conditions, phase of testing and volume
additions and withdrawals.
8.2
Hydrostatic Test Record

In addition to the test data log, all station hydrostatic tests shall be
documented with a Test Record certificate. This test record shall include:
a) the time and date of the test;
b) pipe standards or specification for the section tested;
c) location of the test section;
d) the test medium used;
e) the test duration;
f) location and cause of leaks or failures and the description of the repair
action taken;
g) test equipment identification log stating function, equipment type, and
serial numbers;
h) signatures of contractors and/or Kinder Morgan representatives
responsible for the test.

MP4111
Revision 3
May 2009
Page 15 of 15

8.3
Hydrostatic Test File

Quality records shall be compiled and maintained as objective evidence that
all testing was completed in accordance with project specifications,
governing standards, and regulations.
Quality records shall be legible, identifiable, and traceable to the piping
systems tested. The test records shall be inclusive of the following:
a)
the test data logs;
b)
the hydrostatic test record;
c)
the elevation profile (if applicable);
d)
the pressure and temperature recording logs;
e)
the pressure-volume plot and data sheet (if required);
f)
a highlighted P&ID indicating the piping system or portion thereof

included within the test;
g)
isometrics or test maps clearly identifying the pipe spools and

appurtenances included within the hydrostatic test inclusive of test
blinds and jumpers;
h)
copies of calibration charts and certification papers for all testing

equipment used;
DATE
MP4111
START OF
TEST
KINDER MORGAN
HYDROSTATIC TEST RECORD
END OF TEST
Station Piping
TEST NUMBER
TEST LOCATION
TEST MEDIUM
EQUIPMENT AND/OR SPOOLS INCLUDED WITHIN TEST
PIPE DESIGN DATA

Specification
and Grade
Design Factor
Wall Thickness
(mm)
OD (mm)
SMYS (MPa)
Design
Pressure (kPa)
CRITICAL TEST POINTS

Location
Point
km
Elevation
(m)
Minimum
kPa
%SMYS
Maximum
KPa
%SMYS
Test Point
High Point1
Low Point1
TEST EQUIPMENT RECORD

Function
Type of Equipment
Serial Number
SIGNATURE
DATE
SIGNATURE
DATE
Comments:
TEST FIRM REPRESENTATIVE

(PLEASE PRINT)
KINDER MORGAN REPRESENTATIVE

(PLEASE PRINT)
1) This data is only required for long test sections, such as tank lines.
MP4111
HYDROSTATIC TEST DATA LOG
DATE
Station Piping
PAGE
MINIMUM TEST PRESSURE
kPa
TEST LOCATION
MAXIMUM TEST PRESSURE
kPa
TEST MEDIUM
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (C)

TIME
RECORDER
THERMOMETER
PIPE
TEMPERATURE
(C)
DEAD
WEIGHT
TESTER
(kPa)
PRESSURE
RECORDER
(kPa)
OF
REMARKS
TEST FIRM REPRESENTATIVE (PLEASE PRINT)
SIGNATURE
DATE
KINDER MORGAN REPRESENTATIVE (PLEASE PRINT)
SIGNATURE
DATE

PROJECT MANAGEMENT STANDARDS AND PRACTICES
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE

PM-3501, Revision A, September 2, 2009
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
A
Prepared by/
Date
F. Siwak & G. Hill/
2009-09-02
Reviewed by/
Date
Approved by/
Date
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 13
Title: MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
2.0
3.0
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 3
4.0
5.0
3.1
3.2
Acceptance Criteria ................................................................................... 3

Authorized Inspector (AI) ........................................................................... 3
3.3
3.4
Carrier ........................................................................................................ 3
Certifying Authority (CA) ............................................................................ 3
3.5
3.6
Contractor .................................................................................................. 3
Customer ................................................................................................... 3
3.7
3.8
Expediter.................................................................................................... 4
Purchase Order (PO) ................................................................................. 4
3.9
3.10
Quality Assurance (QA) ............................................................................. 4

Quality Control (QC) .................................................................................. 4
3.11
3.12
Receiver..................................................................................................... 4
Request for Quotation (RFQ) ..................................................................... 4
3.13
3.14
Resident Inspector ..................................................................................... 4

Sub-Vendor................................................................................................ 4
3.15
3.16
Traceability ................................................................................................ 4
Vendor ....................................................................................................... 4
SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ........................................ 5

4.1
4.2
Material List (ML) ....................................................................................... 5

Technical Data Sheet (TDS) ...................................................................... 5
4.3
Vendor Drawing and Data Requirements Checklist (VDDRC) ................... 5
SHOP INSPECTION, TESTING, & SHIPPING..................................................... 6

5.1
Source Inspection Plan .............................................................................. 6

5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.2
Level 0 No Inspection ........................................................................... 6

Level 1 Release for Shipment Inspection.............................................. 6
Level 2 Limited Scope Inspection ......................................................... 6
Level 3 Full Scope Inspection ............................................................... 6
Level 4 Daily or Residency Inspection .................................................. 6
Material Test Report (MTR) Review .......................................................... 6

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 2 of 13

5.3
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) .................................................................. 7

5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.4
Identification and Traceability .................................................................... 9

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
6.0
7.0
ITP Format and Content .......................................................................... 7

Inspection Points and Activities ............................................................... 8
Inspection Frequencies ........................................................................... 9
Combination of Inspection Points, Activities, and Frequencies ................ 9
Philosophy............................................................................................... 9
Tagging and Labeling .............................................................................. 9
Pressure Retaining Elements .................................................................. 9
5.5
Non-Conformance ..................................................................................... 9
5.6
Packaging and Shipping .......................................................................... 10
INSPECTION OF RECEIVED GOODS .............................................................. 10

6.1
Identification and Accounting for Quality Documentation ......................... 10
6.2
6.3
Missing MTR ............................................................................................ 10

Materials and Equipment Inspected at Source ........................................ 10
6.4
6.5
Materials Not Inspected at Source ........................................................... 11

Positive Recall ......................................................................................... 11
REPORTING ...................................................................................................... 11
7.1
7.2
Obvious Damage or Discrepancies ......................................................... 11

Material Receiving Report (MRR) ............................................................ 11
7.3
7.4
Overage, Shortage, or Damage Report (OSDR) ..................................... 12

Non-Conformance Report (NCR) ............................................................. 12
7.5
Completed Shipments.............................................................................. 13
APPENDICES
Appendix A .........................Technical Data Sheet (TDS) - Trunnion Mounted Ball Valve

Appendix B ........................ Vendor Drawing and Data Requirement Checklist (VDDRC)
Appendix C ......................................................... Sample Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
Appendix D ............... Common Inspection Point, Activity, and Frequency Combinations
Appendix E .................................................................. Material Received Report (MRR)
Appendix F ............................................... Overage, Short, and Damage Report (OSDR)
Appendix G .................................................................. Non-Conformance Report (NCR)

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 3 of 13
1.0
SCOPE
This standard is intended to establish quality assurance philosophies and
procedures for use by project managers and project engineers, procurement
specialists (including buyers, expediters, and receivers), quality control
specialists (including inspectors), and suppliers during the procurement of
materials (including fabricated assemblies) and equipment. While many of the
principles apply, this standard is not intended to be used during the purchase of
large diameter transmission pipe (also known as line-pipe), which requires its
own project-specific quality assurance program.
2.0
None
3.0
DEFINITIONS
3.1
Acceptance Criteria
Defined limits placed on the characteristics or attributes of materials or
equipment.
3.2
Authorized Inspector (AI)

A person authorized by the Customer to perform visual or dimensional
inspections, witness tests, and documentation audits on materials or
equipment.
3.3
Carrier
A transportation firm engaged by the Vendor or the Customer to deliver
materials or equipment from the Vendors production or warehouse facility
to the Customer or Contractors marshalling facility or construction site.
3.4
Certifying Authority (CA)

A specialty firm, engaged by the Customer to carry out specific QC checks
independently from the Vendor.
3.5
Contractor
A construction firm engaged by the Customer to install materials or
equipment supplied by the Vendor.
3.6
Customer
KMC or its affiliated asset owning entities or an engineering and
procurement (EP) firm acting as an agent for KMC or its affiliated asset
owning entities.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 4 of 13

3.7
Expediter
A person designated by the Customer to verify that materials or equipment
are being manufactured and shipped on schedule.
3.8
Purchase Order (PO)

A contract between the Customer and Vendor for the supply of materials
or equipment.
3.9
Quality Assurance (QA)

A systematic inspection approach that provides a high level of confidence
that materials or equipment will conform to specifications. A QA Plan
establishes methods for verifying and auditing manufacturing, testing, and
installation.
3.10
Quality Control (QC)

Inspection and test activities that verify that specific attributes of materials
or equipment meet or exceed acceptance criteria. Weld examinations and
pressure testing are examples of QC checks.
3.11
Receiver
A person designated by the Customer or the Contractor to receive,
account, and report on materials or equipment arriving at the Customer or
Contractors warehouse, marshalling facility, or construction site.
3.12
Request for Quotation (RFQ)

A document package sent to the Vendor to solicit pricing and technical
information related to the Vendors materials or equipment offerings.
3.13
Resident Inspector
A person designated by the Customer to represent the Customers
interests at the construction site at which the materials or equipment
supplied by the Vendor are intended to be installed.
3.14
Sub-Vendor
A firm providing the Vendor with components or services associated with
the manufacture of materials or equipment.
3.15
Traceability
The ability to determine the history of a part by means of unique identifiers
and linked records.
3.16
Vendor
A manufacturer or provider of materials or equipment to the Customer.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 5 of 13
4.0
SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

4.1
Material List (ML)

An ML is required for the procurement of all bulk order items and shall be
included with an RFQ. An ML for pipe and fabricated components shall
include information relating to quantity, size, pipe or component type,
material standard, grade, wall thickness, end configuration, and any other
pertinent information related to the physical nature of the materials.
4.2
Technical Data Sheet (TDS)

A TDS is required for the procurement of mechanical equipment, electrical
equipment, and instrumentation, and shall be included with an RFQ. A
TDS shall include information relating to design criteria, materials, physical
configuration, appurtenances, coatings, testing requirements, and any
other pertinent data related to the physical nature of the equipment.
A sample TDS from KMC MP-2300 for the specification of valves is
included in Appendix A.
4.3
Vendor Drawing and Data Requirements Checklist (VDDRC)

A VDDRC is required for the procurement of mechanical equipment,
electrical equipment, and instrumentation. A VDDRC shall clearly define
what information is required at various stages of the procurement process.
Typical stages and information requirements are:
at Proposal (RFQ response) preliminary drawings, design

calculations or confirmations, proposed material compositions,
recommended spare parts lists, etc.
for Approval certified dimensional drawings, technical design data,

ITP (see Section 5.3), material composition confirmation, etc.
upon Delivery material test reports, non-destructive examination

results, heat treatment results, hydro-testing reports, functional testing
reports, as-built drawings, installation instructions, operations and
maintenance manuals, etc.
A sample VDDRC for procurement of pipeline valves is shown in

Appendix B.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 6 of 13
5.0
SHOP INSPECTION, TESTING, & SHIPPING

5.1
Source Inspection Plan

For all materials and equipment, in consideration of the complexity or
criticality (to performance or schedule) and the Vendors historical
performance, the Project Team shall determine and specify in RFQ and
PO documents, the extent of inspection required at each Vendors
production facility, according to the following levels:
5.1.1 Level 0 No Inspection
No quality inspection required.
5.1.2 Level 1 Release for Shipment Inspection
Final inspection to ensure that the materials or equipment are:
in apparent compliance with the purchase order or contract
properly identified and tagged
adequately prepared for shipment
include completed documentation
5.1.3 Level 2 Limited Scope Inspection

In addition to the inspection activities outlined under Level 1, a prefabrication visit (to review the quality requirements established by
the PO) and presence at Hold Points outlined in the ITP (see
Section 5.3).
5.1.4 Level 3 Full Scope Inspection
In addition to the inspection activities outlined under Level 2,
random inspection visits during the production cycle to verify the
Vendors compliance with the PO and their QA / QC program.
5.1.5 Level 4 Daily or Residency Inspection
In addition to the inspection activities outlined under Level 3, daily
inspection visits during the production cycle or a continuous
inspection presence.
5.2
Material Test Report (MTR) Review

For pipe and piping components, the MTR shall be reviewed for
compliance with the material specifications prior to the release of item for
shipment.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 7 of 13

5.3
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)

An ITP is required for all fabricated assemblies, mechanical equipment,
and electrical equipment, unless expressly waived by the Customer. An
ITP shall be initially prepared by the Vendor in response to the
requirements provided in the PO, and in accordance with the specified
inspection level (see Section 5.1).
5.3.1 ITP Format and Content
A sample ITP format is included in Appendix C. Alternate formats
are acceptable provided that the required elements are included.
Each page of the ITP shall be signed by the Customer or
Authorized Inspector and the Vendors authorized representative as
indication of approval of the ITP.
The title block or cover page of the ITP shall identify the Customer,
Vendor, project, PO number, Vendors ITP reference number,
revision number, and issue date. Sub-Vendors may be listed along
with the Vendor.
The body of the ITP or Activity Sheet shall include the following:
Activity Number as assigned by the Vendor for each process,

inspection, or test activity.
Process Description and Inspection or Test Activity to include

drawing reviews, design approvals, procedural approvals,
material approvals, in-process inspections, and tests.
Control Document(s) typically a standard, specification,

drawing, or Vendor procedure, with the applicable section or
page identified.
Acceptance Criteria stated in detail or by reference to the

document in which the criteria are specified, for example, 1 hour
@ 12,415 kPa or Specification TMPSE-MP4111, Station
Hydrostatic Test Procedure, Section 7.0, Acceptance Criteria.
Verifying Documents the documents which will be generated

to certify compliance, for example, an MTR for evidence of
material compliance, a pressure test chart for a hydrostatic test,
etc.
Data Book Content the documents that will be submitted to

the Customer in the final documentation package, for example,
drawings, material certificates, NDE reports, test reports,
maintenance and equipment manuals, etc. in accordance with
the PO or contract.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 8 of 13
Inspection, Test, and Witness Activities subdivided into

activities to be completed by the Vendor, Sub-Vendor, Certifying
Authority, and Customer.
5.3.2 Inspection Points and Activities

The ITP shall include a legend for all inspection points and
activities, typically identified as follows:
Hold Point (H) the Vendor shall not proceed with the
production process or test activity without the presence of the
Certifying Authority (CA) or Authorized Inspector (AI), as
applicable. Note: a Hold Point should be used when it is
considered imperative that specified characteristics of the
materials or equipment be verified to ensure final quality
(incorrect or over use of hold points can cause schedule delays
or cost impacts).
Witness Point (W) the Vendor should expect that the

production process or test activity will be being witnessed by the
CA or AI, as applicable, however, if CA or AI is unavailable the
Vendor may proceed without delay. Note: a Witness Point
should be used when it is considered that specified
characteristics of the materials or equipment have a significant
bearing on final quality.
Monitoring (M) the Vendor, CA, or AI, as applicable will

observe a portion of a repetitive process or similar processes.
Note: Monitoring should be used when it is considered
important that specific characteristics of a repetitive process,
such as welding, be verified.
Dimensional (D) and Visual (V) Inspection the Vendor, CA, or

AI, as applicable may complete dimensional and visual
inspections to differing levels, typically the Vendor to 100% and
the CA or AI to something less. Note: unless a Hold Point is
also specified these inspections are not intended to interrupt the
production process.
Examine / Endorse Records (E) the CA or AI will physically

examine and endorse the quality record applicable to an
inspection or test activity. Note: unless a Hold Point is also
specified these examinations / endorsements are not intended
to interrupt the production process.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 9 of 13
Submit Documents to Customer (S) inspection or test

documents generated during a production or testing activity
shall be submitted to the Customer for approval. Note: unless a
Hold Point is also specified these submissions are not intended
to interrupt the production process.
5.3.3 Inspection Frequencies

Inspection frequencies for repetitive or similar processes shall be
expressed as a percentage of production time, as a percentage of
production units, or as a percentage of another appropriate unit of
measure. A special case is where the Initial Process (I) only will be
subject to inspection.
5.3.4 Combination of Inspection Points, Activities, and Frequencies
Appendix D indicates various common combinations of inspection
points, activities, and frequencies, with additional clarification of the
requirement.
5.4
Identification and Traceability

5.4.1 Philosophy
Materials and equipment shall be assigned unique identifiers which
link them to PO, and design, manufacturing, inspection, test,
certification, and shipping documents.
5.4.2 Tagging and Labeling
Pipe and piping components shall at all times have the unique
identifiers applied to them via stencils or labels. Mechanical
equipment, electrical equipment, and instrumentation shall at all
times have tags bearing the unique identifiers attached to them.
5.4.3 Pressure Retaining Elements
100% material traceability is required for pressure retaining
elements. Materials and equipment shall be traceable to the
identifiers (i.e. steel plate heat numbers) of the raw components
from which they were manufactured.
5.5
Non-Conformance
The AI shall complete and issue a Non-Conformance Report (NCR) (see
Section 7.4) whenever discrepancies (that are not immediately
correctable by the Vendor) are identified during production, testing, or
documentation activities.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 10 of 13

5.6
Packaging and Shipping

Packaging and shipping requirements shall be specified in the RFQ and
PO documents. Custody, control, and care of goods by the Vendor and
Customer shall be clearly identified.
The Vendor shall complete and have the Certifying Authority or Authorized
Inspector, as applicable, sign any required Shipping Releases. A copy of
the Shipping Releases and any other quality documents required by the
PO (i.e. the VDDRC) shall be included with the Vendors Packing Slips.
Vendor Packing Slips shall match, on an item by item basis, the
Customers ML and PO for ease of cross-reference. For mechanical
equipment, electrical equipment, and instrumentation, the unique
identifiers shall be clearly indicated on the Packing Slips. For pipe and
piping components, the heat numbers or manufacturers codes shall be
additionally indicated on the packing slip. Each MTR shall be compiled in
the order that the materials are listed on the Packing Slip and shall
accompany the shipment.
6.0
INSPECTION OF RECEIVED GOODS

6.1
Identification and Accounting for Quality Documentation

After the materials or equipment have been unloaded, the Receiver shall
compare them to those listed on the Packing Slip, account for Shipping
Releases and quality documentation required by the PO (i.e. in the
VDDRC), and report in accordance with Section 7.0.
6.2
Missing MTR
Materials received without an MTR shall be quarantined and tagged
accordingly. Where an MTR cannot be located, the material in question
shall be identified as non-conforming and remain in quarantine until it is
disposed of.
6.3
Materials and Equipment Inspected at Source

Materials and equipment that have been inspected at their source (i.e. the
Vendors facility), in accordance with Section 5.0, need only be
additionally inspected by the Receiver for damage suspected to have
been caused during transit. The Receiver shall tag and segregate
damaged materials and equipment and generate an OSDR in accordance
with Section 7.3.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 11 of 13
7.0
6.4
Materials Not Inspected at Source

Materials and equipment that have not been inspected at their source (i.e.
Level 0 Inspection) shall need to be additionally inspected by the Receiver
for apparent compliance with the PO specifications and documentation
requirements, for proper identification, and for damage suspected to have
been caused during transit. The Receiver shall tag and segregate
deficient and / or damaged materials and equipment and generate an
NCR in accordance with Section 7.1.3 and / or an OSDR in accordance
with Section 7.3.
6.5
Positive Recall
Undamaged materials or equipment that are not adequately identified or
are accompanied by incomplete documentation may be provisionally
accepted for installation on a positive recall basis. If a positive recall
option is deemed necessary for expediency, the Customer shall establish
a formal Positive Recall System with clear criteria under which positive
recall can be invoked. A key criterion shall be that the materials or
equipment in question can be easily removed from the work if subsequent
inspection shows that they do not comply with the PO specifications or
documentation requirements.
REPORTING
7.1
Obvious Damage or Discrepancies

Obvious damage or discrepancies shall be identified by the Receiver on
the packing or delivery slip and co-signed by the Carriers driver. If there
is insufficient time for the Receiver to open the packaging for inspection
and accounting, the Packing Slip shall be legibly marked material received
subject to inspection and count. A copy of the annotated Packing Slip
shall be given to the given to the Carriers driver.
7.2
Material Receiving Report (MRR)

The Receiver shall complete an MRR within 48 hours of the receipt of
materials or equipment. An example of an MRR form is include in
Appendix E. Copies shall be sent to the Expediter and the Resident
Inspector. It is imperative that the PO number (and PO revision or release
number, if applicable) be noted. The Receiver shall also note whether the
receipt is for the entire order or some portion of it.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 12 of 13

7.3
Overage, Shortage, or Damage Report (OSDR)

Discrepancies in quantities or damage shall be reported by the Receiver
on an OSDR within 48 hours of the receipt of materials or equipment. In
cases where a claim against the Carrier is anticipated, the OSDR should
be completed within 24 hours. An example of an OSDR is included in
Appendix F. An OSDR is required whenever any of the following are
identified:
quantities do not match those listed on the Packing Slip
quantities are in excess of those listed on the PO
quantities are less than those on the PO, but the Vendor has indicated
that the delivery is to be considered complete
damage
In the case of damage, the Receiver shall take photographs showing the
extent of the damage, retain all packaging as evidence for inspection by
the Carriers representative, and attach copies of the following
documentation, as applicable, to the OSDR:
Bill of Lading
Waybill
Packing Slip
The Receiver shall retain the original OSDR, with copies sent to:
7.4
the Buyer
the Resident Inspector
the Expeditor, when a Carrier claim is anticipated
Non-Conformance Report (NCR)

An NCR is to be used by the AI (see Section 5.5) or the Receiver. An
example of an NCR is included in Appendix G.
Non-conformances in physical attributes, material composition or
characteristics, performance, or documentation (that cannot be easily and
immediately rectified by the Vendor) shall be reported by the AI on an
NCR as soon as the non-conformance is identified.
Non-conformance in other than quantities or damage (i.e. insufficient wall
thickness, missing parts, etc.) shall be reported by the Receiver on an
NCR within 48 hours of the receipt of materials or equipment.

PM-3501
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 13 of 13

The AI or Receiver, as applicable, shall keep an NCR Log and retain the
original NCR, with copies sent to:
the Buyer
the Expediter
the Resident Inspector (for received items)
The Buyer shall have appropriate members of the Customers project

team review and determine the solution to each non-conformance prior to
acceptance of the materials or equipment for installation.
7.5
Completed Shipments
Once all items in the PO are received and deemed to be in conformance,
the PO shall be marked as complete and retained with the original MRR,
OS&D, and NCR reports, as applicable. At the end of the project, these
records shall be submitted to the Customer for inclusion in the project
records.

PM-3501
Appendix A
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET (TDS) TRUNNION MOUNTED BALL VALVE
Pressure Class (PN or ANSI
rating)
Size (NPS)
Application (check one)
Porting (check one)
Pattern (check one)
End Configuration (check
one)
Mainline
Station
Regular Bore
Full Bore
Regular
Short
Flanged
Weld End
API 6D
TMPSEMP4301
Matching Pipe Wall

Thickness (specify units)
Design Standard (check one)

Body Style (check one)
Operator (check one)
Motor Orientation (check one
if applicable)
CSA Z245.15
API 6D
Top Entry
End Entry
Manual
MOV
Right Hand
Left Hand
Handwheel Elevation (specify

units)
(specify standard)
Options (check all that apply)

Position Indicating Switches
Stem Extension
Extended Piping for Sealant Injection
Locking Device
Trunnion Cavity Drain Port
Glycol Flush Prior to Shipping

Body
Ball
Stem/Adaptor
Seats
Gaskets
Elastomers
Springs
Seat Inserts
Bolting
Packing
Spare Parts List Included

(check one)
Body Cavity Relief (check
one)
Yes
No
Integral
External
Dimensional Drawing
Maximum Allowable Stem
Thrust or Torque
Number of Handwheel Turns
for Full Travel
Yes
No

PM-3501
Appendix B
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1

VENDOR DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT CHECKLIST (VDDRC)
VENDOR INFORMATION REQUIRED
Information Provided With Proposal
Information Provided For Approval
Information Provided Upon Delivery
Flow coefficient for liquids (Cv);
Confirmation that the valve design includes integral pressure relief,

or if an external relief connection is required;
Identification of the cleaning and priming system provided per

subsection 4.3.1;
Maximum allowable stem thrust or torque at maximum differential
pressure at 15C (59F), and number of turns for full travel;
Recommended spare parts list and corresponding pricing;

Outline dimensional drawing including a detail of the seat design;
Identification of all materials used for pressure-containing parts;
Identification of all materials used in the valve trim;
Identification of all elastomers and non-metallic valve parts;
(1)
Inspection and Test Plan

Heat or product analysis for all elements given in Section 5.0 and
other intentionally added elements;
(1)
Tensile test results for yield strength, tensile strength, and

elongation for all pressure-containing parts;
(2)
Pressure test results for all testing requested;

Torque values for all bolting on bonnet, body, etc;
Complete parts list;
Report outlining the non-destructive inspection completed on any
welded components and the results;
An engineered, certified outline dimensional drawing;
An operation and maintenance manual.
(1)
If information is unavailable two weeks after the order date, it shall be provided at the earliest
possible date.
(2)
The Certified outline dimensional drawing shall be submitted within two weeks after the return
to Vendor of the approval drawings.

PM-3501
Appendix C
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1

INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (ITP)
Inspection and Test Plan Activity Sheet
Product or Service:
Page
Vendor or Sub-Vendor:
Project:
Customer:
PO No.:
of
Vendors ITP Ref. No.:
ITP Approval
Vendor:
Customer:
Date:
Date:
Location:
Activity
No.
Process
Description
and Inspection
or Test Activity
Control Document
Specification,
Drawing or
Standard
Page or
Section
Reference
Acceptance
Criteria
Verifying
Document
To be
Included
in Data
Book
Inspection, Test and Witness Activities

Vendor or
SubVendor
Activity
Certifying
Authority
Activity
Customer Activity
Activity
Frequency
Signature
Legend: Inspection, Test and Witness Activities

D: Dimensional Inspection
E: Examine/Endorse Records
H: Hold Point
I: Examine Initial Process
% Extent of Inspection or Test
S: Submit Documents to
Customer for Approval
M: Monitor on a Random
Basis
V: Visual Inspection
W: Witness
Point

PM-3501
Appendix D
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1

COMMON INSPECTION POINT, ACTIVITY, AND FREQUENCY COMBINATIONS
Combination
Point or
Activity
Frequency
HV
Mandatory presence of the CA or AI, as applicable, during

the initial process.
Mandatory visual inspection by the CA or AI, as
applicable, to the percentage specified, during the process
or test activity.
Mandatory dimensional inspection by the CA or AI, as

applicable, to the percentage specified, during the process
or test activity.
HD
Requirement
HE
Mandatory visual and dimensional inspection by the CA or

AI, as applicable, to the percentage specified, during the
process or test activity.
Mandatory examination and endorsement of quality
records by the CA or AI, as applicable, during the process
or test activity.
HS
Mandatory submission of documents for Customer

approval prior to the process or test activity.
HVD
Anticipated inspection of the initial process by the CA or

AI, as applicable.
Random observation of the process or test activity by the

Vendor, CA, or AI, as applicable, to the percentage
specified (should not be less than 20%).
I, %
Random observation of the initial process by the Vendor,

CA, or AI, as applicable.
Random observation of the initial process or test activity
by the Vendor, CA, or AI, as applicable, and continuing
random observations to the percentage specified (should
not be less than 20%).
Visual inspection by the Vendor, CA, or AI, as applicable

to the percentage specified.
Dimensional inspection by the Vendor, CA, or AI, as

applicable, to the percentage specified.
VD
Visual and dimensional inspection by the Vendor, CA, or

AI, as applicable, to the percentage specified.
Examination and endorsement by the CA or AI, as

applicable, to the percentage specified.

PM-3501
Appendix E
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1
MATERIAL RECEIVING REPORT (MRR)
MRR No.:
Project Name:
Project No.:
PO No.:
Date:
Vendor:
Storage Location:
Date Received:
Carrier:
Prepaid
Collect
OSDR No.:
Freight/Pro-Bill No.:
PO Item
Date:
Qty.
Purchase Order is:
Amount:
Description
COMPLETE
THE ABOVE MATERIAL HAS BEEN RECEIVED AND CHECKED BY THE

UNDERSIGNED; SUBSTITUTIONS HAVE NOT BEEN ACCEPTED; OVERAGES,
SHORTAGES, OR DAMAGE ARE REPORTED ON THE ABOVE NOTED OSDR.
INCOMPLETE
NAME AND SIGNATURE:

RECEIVED:

PM-3501
Appendix F
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1
OVERAGE, SHORTAGE, & DAMAGE REPORT (OSDR)

OSDR No.:
Date:
Project Name:
Storage Location:
Claim to be Made Against (Vendor, Carrier, etc.):

Customer:
PO No.:
Vendor:
B/L No.:
Packing Slip No.:
Carrier:
Freight/Pro-Bill No.:
REASON FOR CLAIM

1. Overage
Item No.
2. Shortage
3. Damage
Description of Goods or Waybill Details
4. Other (Specify Reason)

Qty.
Full Nature and Extent of Damage:
Status of the Damaged Goods:
Action to be Taken:
Additional Remarks:
Receivers Name:
Receivers Signature:
Comments

PM-3501
Appendix G
Revision A
September 2, 2009
Page 1 of 1

NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT (NCR)
SECTION 1
ISSUED TO:
DATE:
JOB NO.:
EQUIP./DWG. NO.:
NCR LOG NO.:
NCR TAG NO.:
DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMANCE:
AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR:
DISPOSTION REQD BY:

YY / MM / DD
SECTION 2
PROPOSED DISPOSTION
REPAIR
REWORK
USE
AS IS
SCRAP
DESCRIPTION OF PROPOSED DISPOSITION:
DISPOSITIONED BY:
DATE:
YY / MM / DD
QC INSPECTOR ACCEPTANCE:
DATE
YY / MM / DD
CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE:
DATE
YY / MM / DD
AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR ACCEPTANCE:
DATE
YY / MM / DD
SECTION 3
COMPLETION OF DISPOSITION VERIFIED:
DATE:
AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR:
YY / MM / DD
DATE
QA MANAGER:
YY / MM / DD
DATE
PROJECT MANAGER:
YY / MM / DD
TRANS MOUNTAIN PIPELINES L.P.

EXPANSION PROJECT SPECIFICATION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
TMPSE-42EF0006, Revision 1, August 16, 2007
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
A
B
0
1
Prepared by/
Date
P. Aldridge/
24-Jan-06
P. Aldridge/
07-Apr-06
P. Aldridge/
19-May-06
S. Woodside/
16-Aug-07
Reviewed by/
Date
J. Buckle/
14-Mar-06
J. Buckle/
07-Apr-06
J. Buckle/
19-May-06
VECO Approved by/

Date
D. Blackadar/
13-Apr-06
D. Blackadar/
19-May-06
KMC Approved/
Date
F. Siwak/
30-Mar-06
T. Delong/
13-Apr-06
T. Delong/
19-May-06
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review
Issued for Bid
Issued for Construction
Terasen References
removed

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 2 of 34
Title: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 5
2.0
3.0
2.1
2.2
Building Codes and Regulations ................................................................ 5

American Concrete Institute (ACI) ............................................................. 5
2.3
2.4
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ................................. 6

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) ............................................ 7
2.5
2.6
Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC) ........................................ 7

CSA Standards .......................................................................................... 7
2.7
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specifications ............................................ 8
QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................... 8

3.1
General ...................................................................................................... 8
3.2
3.3
Supplier Qualifications ............................................................................... 9

Inspection and Testing ............................................................................... 9
3.4
3.5
Tolerances ................................................................................................. 9
Submittals .................................................................................................. 9
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
4.0
General ................................................................................................... 9
Product Data ........................................................................................... 9
Formwork ...............................................................................................10
Reinforcement ........................................................................................10
Concrete.................................................................................................10
Certificates .............................................................................................11
Shop Drawings .......................................................................................11
Concrete Placement Maps .....................................................................11
3.6
Environmental Conditions ........................................................................ 11
3.7
3.8
Protection................................................................................................. 12
Sequencing and Scheduling .................................................................... 13
3.9
Grouting ................................................................................................... 13
MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 13
4.1
General .................................................................................................... 13
4.2
Formwork Materials ................................................................................. 13

4.2.1
4.2.2
Formwork ...............................................................................................13
Tubular Column Forms ...........................................................................14

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 3 of 34

4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.3
Reinforcement ......................................................................................... 14
4.4
Concrete Materials ................................................................................... 15

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.5
4.6
Curing Materials .....................................................................................16

Bonding Agent ........................................................................................16
Joint Filler ...............................................................................................16
Joint Sealant ..........................................................................................16
Waterstops .............................................................................................17
Damp-Proof Membrane ..........................................................................17
Concrete Accessories .............................................................................. 17

4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.7
Cement ..................................................................................................15
Water .....................................................................................................15
Aggregates .............................................................................................15
Admixtures .............................................................................................16
Concrete Related Materials ..................................................................... 16

4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
Anchor Bolts ...........................................................................................17

Epoxy and Adhesive Anchors .................................................................17
Embedded Steel .....................................................................................17
Welded Stud Anchors .............................................................................18
Stainless Steel Plate and Stainless Steel Bars .......................................18
Product Delivery and Handling ................................................................ 18

4.7.1
4.7.2
5.0
Falsework ...............................................................................................14
Form Ties ...............................................................................................14
Form Coating and Release Agents .........................................................14
Proprietary Products ...............................................................................18

Concrete Reinforcement.........................................................................18
EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 19
5.1
5.2
Concrete Mix Design................................................................................ 19

Formwork, Shoring, and Scaffolds ........................................................... 20
5.3
5.4
Fixing of Reinforcement ........................................................................... 20

Concrete Accessories .............................................................................. 22
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
Anchor Bolts and Inserts ........................................................................22

Joint Sealants .........................................................................................22
Embedded Items ....................................................................................23
Vapour Barriers ......................................................................................23
5.5
Settlement Observations.......................................................................... 23
5.6
Placing of Concrete ................................................................................. 23

5.6.1
General ..................................................................................................23

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 4 of 34

5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.7
Vibration of Concrete ............................................................................... 26
5.8
Curing ...................................................................................................... 27
5.9
5.10
Concrete Finishes .................................................................................... 28

Removal of Formwork .............................................................................. 29
5.11
Repairs / Modifications to Concrete ......................................................... 30

5.11.1
5.11.2
5.11.3
5.11.4
6.0
General ..................................................................................................30
Drilling Openings ....................................................................................31
Crack Repair ..........................................................................................31
Modifications to Concrete .......................................................................32
CONCRETE TESTING ....................................................................................... 32

6.1
6.2
General .................................................................................................... 32
Testing ..................................................................................................... 32
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.3
Sampling Concrete .................................................................................32

Frequency of Tests.................................................................................33
Acceptance Criteria ................................................................................33
Defective Concrete .................................................................................. 33

6.3.1
6.3.2
7.0
Construction Joints .................................................................................24

Control Joints .........................................................................................25
Isolation Joints........................................................................................26
Drilled Core Test ....................................................................................34

Load Test ...............................................................................................34
QUALITY RECORDS ......................................................................................... 34

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 5 of 34
1.0
SCOPE
This specification provides the requirements for cast-in-place concrete
construction as shown on the drawings and specified herein. This scope shall
include, but not be limited to:
Design, supply, installation, and removal of formwork
Supply and installation of all embedded items inclusive of equipment and

building anchor bolts
Batching, supply, placing, testing, and curing of all plain and reinforced
concrete work
Erection and maintenance of all hoardings or shelters as necessary to

complete the work.
Any discrepancies found on the drawings or within this specification shall be

brought to the immediate attention of the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative who shall submit to the Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Engineer for resolution. No deviations shall be permitted from
the drawings without written approval from the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative.
2.0
supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific requirements in this specification;
specification.
2.1
Building Codes and Regulations

Alberta Building Code 1997
British Columbia Building Code 1998
National Building Code of Canada 2005 (Structural Commentaries
(Part 4) From the NBC 1995)
2.2
American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 305R
Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R
Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 308R
Guide to Curing Concrete

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 6 of 34
2.3
ACI 308.1
Standard Specification for Curing Concrete
ACI 318M
Building Code Requirement for Structural

Concrete and Commentary
ACI 350M
Environmental
Engineering
Structures and Commentary
ACI SP-66
ACI Detailing Manual
Concrete
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A36
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
ASTM A82
Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for

Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A167
Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
ASTM A185
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
ASTM A276
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars

and Shapes
ASTM A307
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts

and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A320
Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and

Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low
Temperature Service
ASTM A496
Standard Specification for Steel

Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A497
Standard Specification for Steel-Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Deformed for Concrete
ASTM A575
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon,

Merchant Quality, M-grades
ASTM A663
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon,

Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties
ASTM C171
Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for

Curing Concrete
ASTM C233
Standard Test Method for Air- Entraining

Admixtures for Concrete
Wire,

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 7 of 34

ASTM C260
Standard Specification
for
Air-Entraining
ASTM C309
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete
ASTM C494
Standard
Specification
ASTM C1077
Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing

Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in
Construction and Criteria for Laboratory
Evaluation
ASTM D994
Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)
ASTM D1751
Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
for
Chemical
2.4
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

CGSB 51.34
Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in
Building Construction
2.5
Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)

CISC
Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel
(as applicable to anchor bolts and embedded
items)
2.6
CSA Standards
CSA A23.1
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction
CSA A23.2
Methods of Test and Standard Practices for

Concrete
CSA A23.3
Design of Concrete Structures
CSA A23.4
Precast Concrete Materials and Construction
CSA A283
Qualification
Laboratories
CSA A3000
Cementitious Materials Compendium
CSA G30.18
Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
Code
for
Concrete
Testing

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 8 of 34
2.7
CSA G40.21
General Requirements for Rolled or Welded

Structural Quality Steel
CSA G164
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped

Articles
CSA S16.1
Limit States Design of Steel Structures
CSA S269.1
Falsework for Construction Purposes
CSA S269.2
Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes
CSA S269.3
Concrete Formwork
CSA W47.1
Certifications of Companies for Fusion Welding

of Steel
CSA W59
Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
CSA W178.2
CSA W186
Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced

Concrete Construction
CSA/CAN3 A266.1M
Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
CSA/CAN3 A266.4
Guidelines for the Use of Admixtures in

Concrete
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specifications

TMPSE-42EF0008
Structural Steel
TMPSE-CIV-135
3.0
Grouting
QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.1
General
All concrete material and work shall comply with the applicable
requirements of CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction.
All embedded steel material and work shall comply with the applicable
requirements of CSA G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel; CSA S16.1, Limit States Design of Steel
Structures; and Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specification TMPSE42EF0008, Structural Steel.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 9 of 34

Welding of embedded steel items shall comply with the requirements of
CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding), and Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specification TMPSE-42EF0008, Structural Steel.
3.2
Supplier Qualifications
Concrete shall be obtained from a Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.approved ready-mix supplier.
3.3
Inspection and Testing

Prior to proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall develop and submit
to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative an
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) for approval. The ITP shall identify all
Contractor and Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. hold points as required to
maintain specification and contractual compliance throughout the work.
During construction, an independent testing agent certified in accordance
with CSA A283, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories,
shall be engaged by the Contractor to inspect, sample, prepare, and test
concrete materials and ensure the production of concrete is in accordance
with CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction. The testing agent shall be pre-approved by Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
All welding inspection shall be performed by qualified inspectors certified
to CSA W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors, for the relevant class
of inspection.
3.4
Tolerances
Tolerances shall be according to CSA-A23.1, Concrete Materials and
Methods of Concrete Construction, Clauses 10, 12.8, 13.3, and 22.1.
3.5
Submittals
3.5.1 General
The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of all submittals to the
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative for
review and approval.
3.5.2 Product Data
The Contractor shall submit Manufacturers product data for
specified concrete-related materials and accessories including
Manufacturers installation instructions to Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Representative for review prior to delivering
materials to site.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 10 of 34

3.5.3 Formwork
Upon request, details of intended formwork and falsework material,
including certificates and test reports of the material, shall be
submitted to the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
Upon request, formwork design calculations signed by a
professional engineer registered in the province for which the work
is intended shall be submitted to the Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Representative for review and approval.
3.5.4 Reinforcement
The Contractor shall submit certified mill test reports for concrete
reinforcement to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative for review and approval prior to installation.
The Contractor shall submit bending schedules and placement
drawings prepared in accordance with recommendations in ACI
SP-66, ACI Detailing Manual, to the Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Representative for review and approval.
3.5.5 Concrete
The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of all proposed concrete
mix designs to the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative, who shall submit to the Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Engineer for approval. The submittal shall be a
minimum of 14 days prior to placement of any concrete.
All laboratory and field-testing of concrete shall be completed by
the Contractors pre-approved third party testing firm. Field-testing
and reports shall include but not be limited to the following:
Slump tests
Air entrainment testing
Compressive strength testing.
Reports for the field testing shall be inclusive of but not limited to:
Date and location of pour
Truck / batch ticket number
Mean daily temperature
Name and signature of certified inspector

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 11 of 34
Concrete Placement Maps
3.5.6 Certificates
The following certificates shall be submitted to the Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative:
Steel mill test reports for embedded metals and anchor bolts
prior to incorporating into the work
Third-party testing firms certification for concrete testing and

applicable technicians certification
Welding firm certification and personnel qualifications verifying

compliance to CSA W47.1, Certifications of Companies for
Fusion Welding of Steel.
3.5.7 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings for all concrete accessories specified on the
drawings to be embedded in concrete shall be submitted to the
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative for
review and approval. This shall include embedded structural steel,
anchor bolts, and reinforcing steel. Shop drawings for
reinforcement steel shall be as noted within Section 3.5.4 of this
specification.
Drawings shall indicate bar size, spacing, location, and quantities of
reinforcing steel, mesh, chairs, spacers, and metal hangers, with
identifying code marks to permit correct placement without
reference to the design drawings. The Contractor shall provide
details to indicate placement of reinforcing where special conditions
occur.
The Contractor shall be responsible for completeness and accuracy
of work and conformity with the design drawings and this
specification. Note that any costs associated with the preparation
of the above submittals will be borne by the Contractor.
3.5.8 Concrete Placement Maps
Placement or pour maps or colour coding of design drawings shall
be maintained by the Contractor to enable cross-referencing to
field-testing.
3.6
Environmental Conditions
Cold weather requirements shall apply when the air temperature is below
5C and shall comply with ACI 318M, Building Code Requirement for
Structural Concrete and Commentary and ACI 306R, Cold Weather

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 12 of 34

Concreting. Obtain approval from the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative by submitting a construction procedure for
approval of the proposed equipment and methods before concreting in
cold weather.
Hot weather requirements shall apply when air temperature is above 25C
and shall comply with ACI 318M, Building Code Requirement for
Structural Concrete and Commentary and ACI 305R, Hot Weather
Concreting. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative by submitting a construction
procedure for approval of the proposed equipment and methods before
concreting in hot weather.
The Contractor shall protect concrete from drying according to CSA A23.1,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, Clause
21.2.2.3.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment on site, ready for
use, when concrete is placed during hot, cold, or severe drying conditions.
3.7
Protection
Concrete materials, metal fabrications, and concrete reinforcement shall
be protected before, during, and after installation.
Reinforcing bar identification shall be maintained after bundles are broken.
Contamination of the reinforcing steel from dirt, oil and grease must be
prevented.
Shop painted or galvanized surfaces of metal fabrications must be
protected from damage. Contamination of painted surfaces or surfaces
specified to be painted must be prevented.
Metal fabrications to be embedded in concrete shall not be used as a
means of temporary support. Metal fabrications must be protected from
marking and distortion.
Mechanical disturbances of concrete immediately after placement and
during the specified curing period, as well as damage to finished concrete,
must be prevented by means of protection acceptable to Trans Mountain
The Contractor shall not place equipment or structures on concrete within
seven (7) days of pouring unless written approval has been received from
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 13 of 34
4.0
3.8
Sequencing and Scheduling

Placing of concrete shall be sequenced as shown on the design drawings
or drawings provided by the Contractor approved by Trans Mountain
3.9
Grouting
Unless specified otherwise, epoxy grouting shall not commence until the
concrete has cured for a minimum 28 days, see Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P. Specification TMPSE-CIV-135, Grouting.
MATERIALS
4.1
General
Concrete material and reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of
CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.
Steel for embedded metal fabrications shall comply with CSA G40.21,
General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel,
Grade 300W unless otherwise specified.
Alternate products conforming to the applicable CSA / ASTM standards
may be submitted to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative for review and approval. Products that are not listed within
Section 4.0 of this specification shall not be used without written approval
from Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
Products shall meet applicable Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) and
environmental regulations.
4.2
Formwork Materials
4.2.1 Formwork
All formwork shall conform to the requirements of CSA A23.1,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction and
CSA S269.3, Concrete Formwork.
Forms shall be tight fit, well-braced or shored, and capable of
supporting the fluid pressure of concrete and other construction live
loads.
Formwork materials shall be suitable to impart concrete finishes
within the specified tolerances. Unless specified otherwise on the
drawings, forms for concrete above grade shall be of plywood,
metal, "Sonotube"-type, preformed cylinders, or similar approved
material.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 14 of 34

4.2.2 Tubular Column Forms
Tubular column forms shall be round, spirally wound laminated fibre
forms, internally treated with release material or approved
equivalent.
4.2.3 Falsework
All falsework shall conform to the requirements of CSA A23.1,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, and
CSA S269.1 , Falsework for Construction Purposes.
Materials shall bear grademarks or be accompanied with
certificates, test reports, or other proof of conformity.
4.2.4 Form Ties
Form ties shall be removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or
adjustable length, and free of devices leaving holes larger than
25 mm diameter in concrete surfaces.
Plastic or wood cone-type ties or threaded interior disconnecting
type ties are preferred. Tie wires shall not be used. The Contractor
shall install according to the Manufacturer's recommendations.
After removal of the forms, no metal shall be left within 25 mm of
the concrete surface.
4.2.5 Form Coating and Release Agents
Form coatings or release agents shall not impair or prevent
adhesion of required surface treatments or stain or discolour the
concrete surface. Form release agent is to be applied in strict
accordance to the Manufacturers recommendations.
4.3
Reinforcement
All concrete reinforcement shall be deformed billet steel bars in
accordance with CSA G30.18, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement, or welded wire fabric in accordance with ASTM A496,
Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
Reinforcement shall be free of loose coating that would adversely affect its
bonding capacity. Yield strength of the reinforcing steel shall be 400 MPa
and of the welded wire fabric shall be 450 MPa or as specified on the
drawing.
Wire for tying reinforcement shall be 1.52 mm (16 gauge), black annealed
wire complying with ASTM A82, Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 15 of 34

Reinforcing steel supports shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, Clause 12.7;
steel supports and chairs shall be supplied with a rustproof finish.
Written approval from the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative is required prior to any welding, heating, or flame cutting of
reinforcement steel. Reinforcing steel shall be cold bent; rebending of
hooks shall not be permitted.
Corrosion-resistant, factory-coated deformed bars shall be used in
corrosive environment or when specified on the drawing.
4.4
Concrete Materials
4.4.1 Cement
Type 50 (Sulphate Resistant) Portland cement in accordance with
CSA A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium, shall be used
unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Any special cement (eg.
high alumina cement) shall not be used without prior approval.
4.4.2 Water
Water shall comply with CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and
Methods of Concrete Construction, Clause 4. Water used for
concrete mixing shall be clear and free from oil, acid, alkali, or
organic matter. Use of untreated wash water shall not be
permitted.
4.4.3 Aggregates
All aggregates used in concrete work shall be in accordance with
CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction, Clause 5. Normal density fine and coarse aggregates
shall be from a source capable of delivering the supplies of
consistent quality. Coarse aggregate shall be the maximum size,
but not larger than:
1/3 the diameter of concrete pump hose,
1/5 the narrowest dimension between forms,
3/4 of the minimum clear space between bars,
3/4 of the clear space between rebar and form,
1/3 depth of slab, or
In no case larger than 40 mm (1 ).

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 16 of 34

4.4.4 Admixtures
All admixtures shall be in accordance to CSA/CAN3 A266.4,
Guidelines for the Use of Admixtures in Concrete, and be preapproved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer.
An air-entraining admixture shall be used and shall conform to
CSA/CAN3 A266.1-M, Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
Water reducing and accelerating admixtures shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C494, Standard Specification for Chemical
Admixtures for Concrete.
Air-entraining and water-reducing admixtures used in the same
batch shall be products of the same Manufacturer.
Admixtures to reduce the amount of cement required shall not be
used in concrete exposed to the weather.
4.5
Concrete Related Materials

4.5.1 Curing Materials
Liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall comply with
ASTM C309, Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete, Type 2, Class A. Sheet materials for curing concrete
shall comply with ASTM C171, Standard Specification for Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete.
4.5.2 Bonding Agent
Bonding Agent shall be Sikatop Armatec 110 or approved equal
unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
4.5.3 Joint Filler
Backup materials and preformed joint fillers shall be non-absorbent,
non-rotting, and compatible with good adhesion to sealant. Joint
filler shall be Rodofoam PR grade or approved equal.
4.5.4 Joint Sealant
The sealant shall be two-part polysulphide or polyurethane base,
elastomeric non-sag type compound, installed in strict accordance
with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Joint sealant shall be
Sikaflex 2C NS/SL or approved equal.
The joint sealant shall be compatible to surface temperatures of
minus 45C to plus 45C and be resistant to oil chemicals.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 17 of 34

4.5.5 Waterstops
All waterstops shall be ribbed and be constructed of extruded PVC,
unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Sizes shall be as
indicated on drawings.
4.5.6 Damp-Proof Membrane
Polyethylene film shall conform to CGSB 51-GP-51M, Vapour
Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building, and have a
thickness of 0.15 mm (6 mil).
4.6
Concrete Accessories
4.6.1 Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel; ASTM A307,
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength; or ASTM A320, Standard Specification for
Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low
Temperature Service, Grade L7, as specified on the drawings.
Anchor bolts for pumps and equipment foundations shall be
supplied with Wilson sleeves or approved equal if shown on the
drawings.
4.6.2 Epoxy and Adhesive Anchors
Where specified on the drawings, epoxy anchors shall mean
anchor rods installed in existing concrete with epoxy grout. Anchor
rods shall be fully threaded bar conforming to ASTM A307,
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength, or ASTM A36, Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
Epoxy grout for the epoxy anchors shall be as specified on the
drawings. Length of anchor rod, drilled anchor hole diameter, and
depth shall be as per the Manufacturers recommendation or as
specified on the drawings.
Adhesive anchors shall be installed as per the Manufacturers
recommendations and only used if specified on the drawings.
4.6.3 Embedded Steel
All embedded steel parts shall conform to CSA G40.21, General
Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel, Grade
300W, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 18 of 34

All embedded steel shall be galvanized in accordance to
CSA G164, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles,
unless noted otherwise.
4.6.4 Welded Stud Anchors
Stud anchors shall be Nelson Stud as supplied by TRW or
approved equal.
4.6.5 Stainless Steel Plate and Stainless Steel Bars
Stainless steel plate for embedded parts shall comply with
ASTM A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip, Type
316L, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
Stainless steel bars for anchor bolts and epoxy anchors shall
comply with ASTM A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel
Bars and Shapes, Type 316L, unless noted otherwise on the
drawings.
4.7
Product Delivery and Handling

4.7.1 Proprietary Products
Deliver the specified proprietary products in original, unopened
containers with the Manufacturers name, labels, product
identification, and batch numbers.
Store and condition the specified products as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
4.7.2 Concrete Reinforcement
Deliver bars to site firmly tied in bundles each containing bars of
one (1) diameter and length only and each clearly marked with the
number, diameter and length of the bars it contains.
Deliver welded steel wire fabric in flat sheets, which are to be
clearly marked with CSA Standard or Manufacturers reference
number and the nominal weight per square metre.
All steel shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent
deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 19 of 34
5.0
EXECUTION
All concrete construction shall conform to CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and
Methods of Concrete Construction.
5.1
Concrete Mix Design

Concrete shall be composed of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, water, and approved admixtures.
The Contractor, at his expense, shall have an approved testing and
inspection laboratory prepare the design of mixes. The concrete shall be
designed to provide the minimum 28-day compressive strength 30 Mpa,
unless noted otherwise on the drawings. The concrete shall be so
designed that the concrete materials will not segregate and excessive
bleeding will not occur. Leancrete for underground support of piping and
cover of below grade cables or sleeves shall have a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 15 MPa, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
The Contractor shall submit copies of the concrete mix design to Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer as indicated within Section
3.5.5 of this specification. All intended admixtures shall be noted on the
concrete mix design prior to forwarding to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Engineer for approval. Maximum water cement ratio by weight
shall be 0.45 unless authorized otherwise in writing by Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer.
Maximum slump of concrete shall be as follows, unless noted otherwise
on the drawings:
Foundations, substructures, and floor slabs on grade and sidewalks:

75 mm
Paving around process areas or subject to vehicular traffic: 50 mm
Amount of air entrainment shall be as follows unless noted otherwise on

the drawings:
Concrete exposed to the elements: 6% +/- 1%
Other concrete: 4% +/- 1%
Areas receiving a floor hardener: 3% maximum or as specified by the

hardener Manufacturer
In the oil containment areas, the concrete shall be impervious and the mix
design shall be based on ACI 350M, Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures and Commentary.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 20 of 34

Ready-mix concrete shall be freshly mixed, unhardened concrete supplied
to the requirements of CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of
Concrete Construction. Compressive strength of the concrete shall be as
specified herein unless noted otherwise on the drawings. The Contractor
shall ensure that the mix design being used has been approved by Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer and that the mix design
identifier is indicated on the truck ticket. Failure to meet this requirement
will result in rejection of the load at site.
5.2
Formwork, Shoring, and Scaffolds

Formwork shall be detailed, erected, braced, and stripped in accordance
with CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction, and CSA S269.3, Concrete Formwork.
Before proceeding with formwork, lines and levels shall be verified to
ensure dimensions correspond with the drawings. For formwork material
selection see Section 4.2 of this specification. Earthen forms are
unacceptable unless accepted otherwise in writing by Trans Mountain
After erecting the formwork within the specified tolerances, the forms shall
be coated with a suitable form-release agent prior to placing of reinforcing
steel. Exterior corners and edges exposed to view including horizontal
edges shall be fitted with 25 mm x 25 mm chamfers.
Vertical forms for beams, girders, and lintels may be constructed so that
they can be removed without disturbing the bottom form or its support.
Shoring and scaffolds, where required, shall be in accordance with
Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, CSA S269.1, Falsework for
Construction Purposes and CSA S269.2, Access Scaffolding for
Construction Purposes.
5.3
Fixing of Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel shall be cut, bent, and placed in accordance with
CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction;
ACI 315, ACI Detailing Manual; and CSA A23.3, Design of Concrete
Structures, and as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall not field
bend reinforcement except where indicated on the drawings or authorized
by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
Reinforcement steel must be clean of salt, oil, grease, dirt, and other
foreign matter that may reduce or destroy bond with concrete prior to
placing. Reinforcing steel shall be securely tied at intersections with tie
wire or clips and held in position by spacers, chairs, or other supports
approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
For placement on grade, the reinforcement shall be supported on precast

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 21 of 34

concrete blocks, spaced at intervals as required by the size of
reinforcement to maintain the specified cover. Wherever necessary, to
prevent unsightly rust stains on exposed under-surfaces of concrete slabs,
all such supports for reinforcing steel shall be made of non-corrodible or
plastic encased metal. The Contractor shall set tie wires so ends are
directed into the concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
The Contractor shall continue reinforcing through construction joints
unless noted otherwise on the drawings. In the event conduits, piping,
inserts, sleeves, or other items interfere with reinforcement placing, the
Contractor shall immediately notify Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative and obtain approval for adjustments.
Reinforcing steel shall be placed and spliced only as shown on the
drawings. Necessary splices not shown on the drawings shall be lapped
sufficiently in accordance to CSA A23.3, Design of Concrete Structures,
Clause 12; welding of splices is not permitted. Any variations including
welding or torch cutting of reinforcement shall be done only with the prior
written approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
Welded wire fabric shall be installed in as long of lengths as practicable.
The Contractor shall lap adjoining pieces at least one (1) full mesh and
lace splices with wire. The Contractor shall offset end laps in adjacent
widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
Unless otherwise specified, minimum concrete cover for reinforcement
shall be as follows:
Reinforcement in structural members poured directly against ground

shall be: 75 mm
Reinforcement in surfaces of structural members that, after the

removal of formwork, are to be in contact with ground or exposed to
the weather: for 20 m bars and larger - 50 mm; for 15 m bars and
smaller - 40 mm
Reinforcement in surfaces not exposed to ground or weather shall be

as follows: slabs, walls and joists - 20 mm; beams, girders and
columns - 40 mm; joists - 25 mm; over column ties - 40 mm
Welded wire fabric for paving slabs - surface in contact with ground:
40 mm
Concrete cover shall in all cases be no less than the diameter of the
bar.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 22 of 34

5.4
Concrete Accessories
5.4.1 Anchor Bolts and Inserts
Anchor bolts and inserts, including joint filler and water stop where
indicated on the drawing, shall be securely attached to prevent
displacement during placing and setting of concrete.
All anchor bolts shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor as
per the drawings. All anchor bolts must be set accurately and
secured with a template while concrete is being placed. In addition,
further securing shall be placed at or near the base of the anchor
bolts to prevent tilting during placing. Tolerances for anchor bolts
shall be +/- 3 mm horizontally and vertically. The waterstop shall be
tied at its upper and lower extremities to the rebar at 600 mm
intervals with tie wire. The waterstop shall be fitted accurately so as
to be continuous at all corners and intersections. All joints shall be
fuse welded. Rebar shall be depressed or bent locally to
accommodate waterstops.
Joint filler shall be securely held in place and bonded to the
previously placed concrete face using a bonding agent
recommended by the joint filler Manufacturer. Unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings, the Contractor shall use 13 mm thick
joint filler to separate slab-on-grade from vertical surfaces and shall
extend the joint filler from the bottom of slab to within 6 mm of the
finished slab surface.
Holes drilled for epoxy and adhesive anchors shall be to the
diameter and depth as shown on the drawings. Deeper holes shall
be required if fissures or poor quality rock is encountered; the depth
shall be as directed by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative. Drilled holes shall be cleaned from loose cuttings,
dust, soil, or moisture and air purged prior to Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representatives inspection. The grout
shall be in accordance with the drawings and Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P. Specification TMPSE-CIV-135, Grouting and shall be
installed as specified by the Manufacturer.
5.4.2 Joint Sealants
Sealant shall be applied where shown on the drawings or as
specified herein in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions,
see Section 4.5.4 of this specification.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 23 of 34

5.4.3 Embedded Items
Unless detailed on the drawings, prior approval must be obtained
from Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative to
use embedded items. All embedded items shall conform to the
requirements of CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of
Concrete Construction.
Embedded parts must be rigidly secured against displacement
during concreting.
Any displacement, whether caused by
movement of forms or movement of embedded parts relative to the
forms, shall be corrected to their specified location. Tolerances for
embedded items shall be +/- 6 mm horizontally and vertically.
Methods used to secure embedded parts in position and to ensure
that they are held in their required position shall be subject to
review by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
5.4.4 Vapour Barriers
Vapour barrier shall be installed under concrete slab-on-grade
where shown on the drawings. Vapour barrier shall be lapped a
minimum 150 mm at joints and sealed according to Manufacturers
instructions. Punctures in vapour barrier shall be sealed prior to
placing concrete, using patch material at least 150 mm larger than
puncture.
5.5
Settlement Observations
When specified, reference pins for settlement observations shall consist of
10 mm diameter stainless steel bolts or threaded rods placed at locations
as shown on the drawing and shall project slightly above the top of the
concrete just enough to be located. Elevations of the pins shall be taken
as specified on the drawings.
5.6
Placing of Concrete
5.6.1 General
Placement of concrete shall be in accordance to CSA A23.1,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. The
temperature of plastic concrete, as placed, shall not exceed 32C.
During cold weather, as placed, temperature shall not be less than
10C. For concreting in hot or cold weather conditions, see Section
3.6 of this specification.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 24 of 34

Approval shall be obtained from Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative for methods of conveying, spreading,
consolidating, finishing, curing, and protecting concrete.
The Contractor shall convey concrete from the mixer to the place of
deposit by methods that will ensure the required quality of concrete.
Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying
concrete shall be of such size and design as will ensure a
continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation
of materials. The Contractor shall place concrete in approximately
horizontal layers as close to final location as possible. Vertical free
fall shall not exceed 1500 mm in unexposed work or 1000 mm in
exposed work.
The Contractor shall place concrete as a continuous operation,
stopping only at construction joints as indicated on the drawings.
The Contractor shall reseat, and correct improperly positioned
reinforcing, immediately before placing concrete. During concrete
placement operations, the Contractor shall ensure all reinforcing
remains properly positioned.
Where concrete is to be placed to previously hardened concrete or
rock surfaces, and shown to be bonded on the drawings, surfaces
shall be prepared in accordance with CSA A23.1, Concrete
Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, Clause 19.5. To
ensure proper placement and bonding of concrete, all contact areas
in which concrete will be placed must be cleaned thoroughly. This
may include steel brush or bush hammering of previously hardened
concrete, removing wood scraps and debris from the area, and
cleaning all concrete reinforcement and bedrock surfaces. The
bonding agent shall be mixed and brushed on in accordance with
the Manufacturer's instructions.
5.6.2 Construction Joints
Construction joints not indicated on the drawings shall be as
approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative. Preferred variance for construction joints shall be
as follows:
At midspan of suspended slabs, beams, or girders, unless a

beam intersects a girder in that location. In such cases, the joint
in the girder shall be offset a distance at least equal to the depth
of the beam.
In walls and columns, immediately above or below floor

construction

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 25 of 34

Concrete slabs on ground shall be placed as a continuous pour in
alternating strips utilizing construction and control joints only as
Whenever a concrete pour is interrupted for more than 30 minutes,
a construction joint shall be provided unless retarding additives
extend the above noted time limit. Retarding additives shall only be
used with prior approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative, see Section 4.4.4 of this specification.
Should the concrete operation require the placement of a preapproved construction joint, the concrete shall be struck off square
with any adjoining structure. The surface of the set concrete shall
be cleaned of laitance and foreign matter, dampened, and properly
keyed where required before placing new concrete.
Bonding agent or waterstops shall be used where required or
5.6.3 Control Joints
Horizontal crack control joints for slabs on grade or paving shall be
a continuous slot saw cut to the thickness of the slab or 40 mm,
whichever is greater (do not cut into or through reinforcing).
Sawing shall be done as soon as the concrete has sufficiently
hardened to prevent ravelling of the edges, but in no case later than
24 hours after the concrete slab has been placed.
Alternatively, the control joints may be formed by placing strips in
the forms or by hand tooling of plastic concrete.
Control joints at continuously reinforced slabs or paving shall be as
shown on the drawings. Joints shall be cleaned and filled with a
joint sealant, see Section 4.5.4 of this specification.
Spacing of control joints shall follow a square pattern where
feasible. Table 5.6.3.A shall serve as a guide for spacing of control
joints in un-reinforced slabs or paving.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 26 of 34

TABLE 5.6.3.A - SPACING OF CONTROL JOINTS /
ISOLATION JOINTS UNREINFORCED SLAB
Slab Thickness
mm
inches
100
4
125
5
150
6
175
7
200
8
225
9
250
10
Spacing
metres
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
feet
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
5.6.4 Isolation Joints

Isolation joints shall be provided as shown on the drawing or as
approved to separate floor slabs, paving and sidewalks from walls,
foundations, or other construction.
5.7
Vibration of Concrete
Concrete, when placed, shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly by
means of hand tamping tools, vibrators, or finishing machines to obtain a
dense, homogeneous structure, free of cold joints, fill planes, voids, and
honeycomb. Formed surfaces shall be smooth and free from large air and
water pockets. The concrete shall be well bonded to all reinforcing steel,
hardware anchors, waterstops, and other embedded parts.
Internal vibrators shall be used wherever practical for consolidating the
concrete, having regard to the size and spacing of reinforcement in the
form and may be supplemented by external form vibrators or vibrating
screeds.
Vibrators shall be applied systematically and at such spacing intervals that
the zones of influence overlap and the depth of penetration of the vibrator
enters the upper part of the previously placed lift of the concrete.
The vibrator shall be inserted into the concrete in as nearly a vertical plane
as possible and shall be withdrawn slowly in a vertical direction to facilitate
the removal of entrapped air bubbles.
The vibrator shall be applied, at any one (1) location, until the concrete is
consolidated, but not to the extent that segregation of the concrete will
occur.
Vibrators shall be used only for consolidation purposes and shall not be
used to move concrete more than a short distance.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 27 of 34

5.8
Curing
Concrete shall be cured in accordance with CSA A23.1, Concrete
Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. Beginning immediately
after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying,
excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury, and shall be
maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature
during the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of
the concrete. Materials and methods of curing shall be subject to the
approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
The concrete shall be continuously moist-cured by one (1) of the following
methods:
Wet-cure by fully covering the surface with wet burlap kept

continuously wet.
Wet-cure by fully covering the surface with plastic sheeting or

waterproof paper.
If approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated

Representative, curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with
the Manufacturer's recommendations, see Section 4.5.1 of this
specification.
Minimum cure time shall be the lesser of Column A (min. cure time) or
Column B (min. % specific strength) as shown in Table 5.8.A during which
the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete shall be kept above
10C. When necessary, arrangement for heating, covering, insulating, or
housing the concrete work shall be made by the Contractor in advance of
concrete placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required
temperature range between 10C and 21C without injury due to
concentration of heat.
The time during which concrete surfaces are in contact with wood or metal
forms may be considered as curing time. Wood forms shall be maintained
in a moist condition until removal. Should the wood forms be removed
before the end of the complete curing period, concrete surfaces no longer
in contact with the forms must continue to be cured by continuous
sprinkling or use of wet absorbent matting or fabric.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 28 of 34

TABLE 5.8.A MINIMUM CURE TIME
Description of Concrete
Surfaces
Foundations, pile caps, piers,
grade walls, pedestals, columns,
equipment bases
Walls for liquid containment
vessels
Edges of elevated slabs
Top surfaces of slabs
Sides of beams and girders
7 days
Column B
Min. % Specified
Compressive Strength
70%
7 days
70%
Column A
Min. Cure Time
7 days
70%
See Note 4
7 days
70%
Notes:
1) The Contractor may determine the Minimum % Specified Strength by testing field cure cylinders or by
other non-destructive testing which is acceptable to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
2) Cure times shown are based on minimum ambient temperatures of 10C. For lower temperatures the
Contractor may need to extend the cure times to the satisfaction of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
3) For accelerated strength concrete mixes cure times shall correspond to the minimum specified
strength defined in the Table. 5.8.A.
4) Surfaces of slabs shall be wetted immediately after final finishing and covered with 6 mil polyethylene
membrane, clear or white, and secured in place with weights so as to prevent exposure of concrete
surfaces during curing period. Place the membrane flat, without wrinkles, to minimize mottled
discoloration. Provide traffic protection to protect the concrete surfaces and the curing membrane.
Leave the curing membrane undisturbed for minimum of 7 days and maintain a film of water under
the membrane and add water as required.
5.9
Concrete Finishes
The following finishes shall be used, as applicable, unless noted otherwise
on drawings:
Class A: Bush hammer or scratched finish - for surfaces under

equipment or structures that are intended to receive grout.
Class B: Non-Slip Swirl (screeded, mechanically floated, smooth steel

trowel passes, one (1) swirl steel trowel pass) - all process floors that
are rarely wetted with water or other as shown on the drawings.
Class C: Broom (surface shall be given a course transversed scored

texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface, the
operation shall follow immediately after mechanical floating) - exterior
concrete slabs with significant vehicular or people traffic.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 29 of 34
Class D: Smooth form finish (shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform

texture on the concrete; have all tie holes and effects patched; and have
all fins completely removed) - all exposed surfaces not otherwise
specified such as exterior and interior walls, equipment pedestals, etc.
Class E: Rough form finish (shall be reasonably true-to-line and plane

with no special provision for selected facing materials and shall have all
tie holes and effects patched) - all concrete surfaces not exposed to
view.
Unless shown otherwise on the drawings or directed in writing by Trans

Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative, only the types of
finishes listed above are permitted. All exposed surfaces shall have a
smooth, dense finish free from cracks, pits, honeycombing, etc. Unless
otherwise specified or permitted by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative, tie holes, honeycombs, and other concrete
surface defects shall be repaired in accordance with CSAA23.1, Concrete
Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, Clause 24.2, as soon as
practicable after form removal while concrete is still green. Patches
exposed to view shall blend with surrounding surfaces.
Exposed formed surfaces shall receive a sack and rub finish unless noted
otherwise. Tops of formed walls shall be struck smooth and floated to a
smooth flat surface.
Finish slab surfaces shall be true plan surfaces with a tolerance of 6 mm in
3 m, unless otherwise indicated.
Floor slabs shall be sloped to drain as shown on the drawings.
Adequate provision shall be made by the Contractor to protect the floor from
traffic or damage from time of placement to end of construction activities.
Any areas damaged shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Trans Mountain
5.10
Removal of Formwork
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or with written approval from the
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative, falsework
and formwork shall not be removed prior to the lapsed time after concrete
placement (Minimum Stripping Time), in accordance with Table 5.10.A.
Immediately after removal of forms, bolts, ties, nails, and similar embedded
metals shall be removed or cut back 15 mm from the concrete surface and
the surface made good.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 30 of 34

Minimum stripping times are the lesser of Column A (Minimum Stripping
Time) or Column B (Minimum % Specified Strength) as shown on
Table 5.10.A.
TABLE 5.10.A LAPSED TIME FOR FORMWORK REMOVAL
AFTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Formwork Location
Foundation pile caps, piers, grade
walls, pedestals, columns, equipment
bases
Soffits of slabs without construction
loads and sides of beams and girders
Soffits of slabs with construction loads
and bottom of beams and girders
without construction loads
Bottom of beams and girders with
construction loads
Column A
Min. Stripping Time
(Curing Period
Above 10C)
4 days
Column B
Min. % Specified
Compressive
Strength
60%
7 days
70%
14 days
85%
21 days
90%
Notes:
1) The minimum stripping times defined in the Table 5.10.A above may have to be extended if retention of
formwork is chosen as a means of curing and protection.
2) Stripping times shown are based on minimum ambient temperatures of 10C (50F). For lower
temperatures the Contractor must extend the times to the satisfaction of Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Representative.
3) Stripping times shown are based on no significant superimposed construction loads. The Contractor
shall ensure concrete is not loaded in excess of its design capacity after reaching its specified
compressive strength.
4) Stripping times shall be extended if more than 10% of supplementary cementitious material is
incorporated in the mix. The planned extended times must be submitted to Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Representative who shall submit to the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Engineer for review and approval.
5.11
Repairs / Modifications to Concrete

5.11.1 General
Repair of voids, honeycombing, sandpockets, excessive finnings,
and other similar gross imperfections shall be completed as soon
as practical after removal of the forms. Curing procedures shall not
be delayed or interrupted while making such repairs.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 31 of 34

Honeycomb, voids, sandpockets, and damaged areas shall be
cleaned out to sound concrete by chipping so as to provide a
square shoulder not less than 20 mm deep all around.
Dry-pack shall be used to fill cleaned out voids nominally not
exceeding 150 mm in depth or 0.03 m3 in volume. Concrete of the
same mix characteristics as the concrete to be repaired shall be
used to fill larger voids, where, in the opinion of the Contractor, a
sounder patch can be achieved than by the use of dry-pack.
Procedures shall be employed that will ensure complete filling of
the void with dense dry-pack or concrete, and a satisfactory finish
on exposed surfaces. Dry-pack mix shall consist of one (1) part
Portland Cement to two and a half (2-1/2) parts of volume of sand
with just sufficient water to produce a still consistency that can be
efficiently rammed into place without sagging.
For large repairs generally exceeding 150 mm in depth or 0.03 m3
in volume, a coating of epoxy resin concrete adhesive shall be
neatly applied over the surface of void to be patched, immediately
before placing dry-pack or repair concrete.
The adhesive
compound shall be Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod as manufactured by Sika
Chemicals of Canada Ltd. or approved equal. Applications shall be
in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
Acceptability of appearance of the concrete work shall be made
immediately after the forms have been removed and before any
repairs have been made. Honeycombs or air pockets shall only be
minor and cannot expose any reinforcing. Any exposed reinforcing
is grounds for rejection of the entire structure. Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative must approve all repairs
before they are started.
5.11.2 Drilling Openings
Core drilling in hardened concrete, in lieu of inserts for piping and
other services, shall not be done without prior approval of Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative, who will
review the procedure submitted by the Contractor for drilling and
repairing the concrete.
5.11.3 Crack Repair
Approved injection resins shall be used per the Manufacturer's
instructions to gravity feed or pressure inject and seal cracks.
Only cracks adversely affecting integrity, impermeability, or
durability of the structure as determined by Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative shall be repaired.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 32 of 34

Tightly closed cracks subject to light traffic may be left unaltered
with approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
5.11.4 Modifications to Concrete
Design modifications will be permitted only after receipt of Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representatives written
approval and shall provide an installation equivalent to the basic
intent of the design without incurring additional cost to Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P. Requests for deviations shall be supported
by design calculations and drawings stamped by a Professional
Engineer registered in the province in which the work is intended.
6.0
CONCRETE TESTING
6.1
General
The Contractor, at his expense, shall engage an independent CSACertified Laboratory approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative to sample and test delivered concrete in
accordance with CSA A23.2, Methods of Test and Standard Practices for
Concrete. Copies of test reports shall be submitted to Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative immediately upon them
becoming available for review and approval.
6.2
Testing
6.2.1 Sampling Concrete
When concrete is conveyed from delivery equipment to point of
deposition, samples will be taken at point of deposition.
For a compressive strength test, three (3) standard 150 mm x
300 mm long test cylinders shall be made. One (1) cylinder shall
be tested at an age of seven (7) days and two (2) cylinders at an
age of 28 days. The seven (7) day result shall be used as an
indicator of the expected 28-day result. The test result shall be the
average of the strengths of the two (2) specimens tested at an age
of 28 days, except if any specimen shows definite evidence, other
than low strength, of improper sampling, moulding, handling,
curing, or testing, than it shall be discarded and the strength of the
remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result.
Slump shall be measured before addition of superplasticizers.
When concrete is to be placed by pump, slump and air properties
shall be measured at discharge from the hose. For pumping
purposes, the sand content of the pump mix, as a ratio by weight of

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 33 of 34

total aggregate, shall not be increased more than 3% from the
conventionally placed concrete.
6.2.2 Frequency of Tests
Not less than one (1) compressive strength test will be made for
each 30 m3 or portion thereof for concrete placed and in no case
will there be less than one (1) compressive strength test for each
class of concrete or each separate type of structural component
placed on any one (1) day.
Slump tests and air content determinations shall be made with
every delivered load of concrete.
Deviation from this requirement would require a written permission
from Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
6.2.3 Acceptance Criteria
The concrete shall be considered to have met strength
requirements if the average of every set of three (3) consecutive
tests for each class of concrete exceeds the specified strength and
no individual test is more than 3.5 MPa below the specified
strength.
For acceptance criteria of maximum allowable slump and air
entrainment percentage, see Section 5.1 of this specification.
6.3
Defective Concrete
Concrete failing to meet the strength requirements may be required to be
removed and replaced with concrete meeting the strength requirements.
Delivered loads of concrete not meeting either the slump or air
entrainment requirements shall be a cause of rejection at the discretion of
Concrete with inadequate protection from extremes of temperature during
early stages of hardening or inadequate curing shall be subject to further
tests as specified by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative. In lieu of removing and replacing the defective concrete
structure or any member thereof, the Contractor may carry out drilled core
tests per CSA A23.2, Methods of Test for Concrete, or load testing of the
structure of the member in question if feasible and acceptable, as per
CSA A23.3, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings, and
requirements of this specification.

TMPSE-42EF0006
Revision 1
August 16, 2007
Page 34 of 34

6.3.1 Drilled Core Test
At least three (3) representative cores, 100 mm minimum in
diameter, shall be taken from the member or area in question and
the member or area made good with approved method.
Cores shall be drilled away from the critical sections and the
principal reinforcement and as directed by Trans Mountain
The concrete in question shall be deemed structurally adequate if
the average compressive strength of the cores is equal to at least
85% of the specified strength and no single core has less than 75%
of the specified strength.
6.3.2 Load Test
Loading and unloading of the structure or the member shall be
done in stages up to 150% of the design load (including the selfweight of the structure or the member) to the satisfaction of Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
7.0
QUALITY RECORDS
Quality records shall be completed and maintained as objective evidence that
products were procured, manufactured, delivered, installed, and tested in
accordance to the project drawings, specifications, applicable codes, standards,
regulations, and contract document.
Quality records shall be legible, identifiable and traceable to materials, products,
services and persons involved.
Upon project completion, the Contractor shall index and submit their quality
documents to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative. They
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Material test reports for embedded materials (inclusive of structural steel,

rebar, and anchor bolts)
Approved third-party certification and technicians qualifications
Concrete mix designs
Concrete test records (inclusive of compressive, slump and air entrainment)
As-built drawing records (inclusive of structural steel, rebar and anchor bolts,
concrete placement)
Signed off and accepted Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)

STRUCTURAL STEEL
TMPSE-42EF0008 Revision 3, August 16, 2007
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
A
B
0
1
2
Prepared by/
Date
J. Buckle/
08-Nov-05
J. Buckle/
11-Nov-05
J. Buckle/
18-Nov-05
J. Buckle/
27-Jan-06
J. Buckle/
07-Mar-06
S. Woodside/
16-Aug-07
Reviewed by/
Date
VECO Approved by/

Date
KMC Approved/
Date
Pages Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review
R. Pillai/
11-Nov-05
R. Pillai/
07-Mar-06
D. Blackadar/
18-Nov-05
D. Blackadar/
27-Jan-06
D. Blackadar/
07-Mar-06
F. Siwak/
16-Nov-05
T. Delong/
21-Nov-05
T. Delong/
27-Jan-06
T. Delong/
07-Mar-06
Issued for Approval

Minor formatting changes
Changes to Sections 3.0,
7.6, and 8.9 and addition
of Section 8.10
Terasen References
removed

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 2 of 15
Title: STRUCTURAL STEEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 4
2.0
RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................................................ 4
3.0
4.0
DESIGN ................................................................................................................ 5
5.0
MATERIALS ......................................................................................................... 5
6.0
7.0
8.0
5.1
5.2
General ...................................................................................................... 5
Structural Bolts and Nuts ........................................................................... 5
5.3
5.4
Grating ....................................................................................................... 6
Handrails and Toeplates ............................................................................ 6
CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................... 7
6.1
6.2
General ...................................................................................................... 7
Welding Connections ................................................................................. 8
6.3
Bolting Connections ................................................................................... 8
FABRICATION ..................................................................................................... 9
7.1
General ...................................................................................................... 9
7.2
7.3
Grating ....................................................................................................... 9
Shop Welding ............................................................................................ 9
7.4
7.5
Surface Preparation ................................................................................... 9

Galvanizing .............................................................................................. 10
7.6
7.7
Surface Coating ....................................................................................... 10

Delivery .................................................................................................... 10
ERECTION ......................................................................................................... 10
8.1
8.2
General .................................................................................................... 10
Supply ...................................................................................................... 10
8.3
8.4
Field Repairs............................................................................................ 10
Surface Repairs ....................................................................................... 11
8.5
8.6
Field Welding ........................................................................................... 11

Erection Tolerances ................................................................................. 11
8.7
Alignment and Fitting ............................................................................... 11

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 3 of 15

8.8
8.9
High Strength Bolting ............................................................................... 12

Base Plates and Grouting ........................................................................ 12
8.10
Field Coating Repairs .............................................................................. 12
9.0
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ......................................................................... 12
10.0
INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 13
11.0
DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................ 14
11.1
General .................................................................................................... 14
11.1.1 Fabrication Drawings ..............................................................................14
11.1.2 Erection Drawings ..................................................................................14
12.0
QUALITY RECORDS ......................................................................................... 15

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 4 of 15
1.0
GENERAL
This specification covers the design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel
structures, herein referred to as structures.
Unless stated otherwise, structural elements shall be designed and fabricated using metric units. Any imperial dimensions shown are for reference only.
2.0
RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the fabrication, transportation,
and erection of all structural steel to the lines and levels shown on the drawings
and in accordance with the requirements of this specification.

Where reference is made to other publications, such references shall be considered to refer to the latest edition and any revisions thereto approved by the
organization issuing that publication. Some reference publications are supplemented or qualified, or both, by specific requirements in this specification;
specification.
2005 National Building Code of Canada with supplements (NBC)
1997 Alberta Building Code
1998 British Columbia Building Code
ANSI B18.2.1
Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, including Askew

Head Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Lag Screws
ANSI B18.2.2
Square and Hex Nuts
ASTM A53
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless
ASTM A135
Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel

Pipe
ASTM A139
Specification for Electric-Fusion (ARC) - Welded Steel

Pipe (Sizes 4 in. and over)
ASTM A307
Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded

Standard Fasteners
ASTM A325M
Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural

Steel Joints
CISC Code for Standard Practice for Structural Steel

CSA G40.20
General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 5 of 15
4.0
CSA G40.21
Structural Quality Steels
CSA G164
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
CSA S16
Limit States Design of Steel Structures
CSA S136
Cold Formed Steel Structural Members
CSA W47.1
Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of

Steel Structures
CSA W48.1
Carbon Steel Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal

Arc Welding
CSA W59
Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
CSA W178.1
Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations
CSA W178.2
TMPSE-45ES0012
External Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves,

Equipment, and Structural Steel
TMPSE-45ES0012A
Field Touch-Up and Supplementary Schedule for External Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves,
TMPSE-CIV-135
Grouting
DESIGN
The design of all structures shall be in accordance with CSA S16 and the requirements of this specification
5.0
MATERIALS
5.1
General
Materials other than those listed in this specification may be considered;
but their use is contingent upon written approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer. All materials shall be of new stock.
All structural steel (rolled shapes, plates, and flats) shall conform to the
requirements of CSA G40.21. All steel, other than W, WWF, and Hollow
sections shall be grade 300W. Hollow structural sections shall conform to
CSA G40.21, Grade 350W, Class C. All W and WWF sections shall be
Grade 350W.
5.2
Structural Bolts and Nuts

Standard bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A307
and A563, respectively.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 6 of 15

High strength bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A325M.
Cadmium-plated bolts and nuts shall be used throughout. Type 304 stainless steel bolts may be used in lieu of cadmium-plated bolts for bolt sizes
10 mm (3/8") in diameter and less.
Bolt heads shall be of the regular semi-finished hexagon series and nuts
shall be of the heavy semi-finished hexagon series conforming to ANSI
B18.2.2.
5.3
Grating
Unless otherwise specified, all grating shall be "Standard Flow Forge Steel
Grating" - Type 19-4, or approved equal. All grating shall be clipped,
banded, and galvanized.
In exterior areas, open-type serrated grating shall be used.
Grating shall be a minimum of 25 mm (1") deep, with 5 mm (3/16") rectangular bearing bars spaced on 30 mm (1 3/16") centers and cross bars
spaced on 100 mm (4") centers. Other bearing bar sizes shall be 32 mm
(1 ) x 5 mm (3/16"), 38 mm (1 ) x 5 mm (3/16") and 76 mm (3) x 9.5
mm (3/8).
Grating size shall be shown on the drawings.
All grating shall be fastened to its supporting steel with saddle-type fasteners secured with 10 mm (3/8") self-tapping hexagon head stainless
steel bolts.
Steel stair treads shall be of the same make and type as the grating and
be supplied with checkered plate nosing.
5.4
Handrails and Toeplates

Handrails shall extend around edges of all platforms, landings, walkways,
ladders, and stairways, as indicated, and shall be bolted to supporting
members.
Where not dimensioned, the location of handrail posts is approximate.
Maximum spacing shall be 1800 mm.
Toeplates shall extend continuously around edges of all platforms, landings, and openings except at stair and ladder accesses.
Toeplates shall extend around columns and shall have 25 mm (1") minimum clearance from column or from column fireproofing.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 7 of 15
6.0
CONNECTIONS
6.1
General
Fabrication shall conform to the requirements of CSA S16, the CISC Code
for Standard Practice for Structural Steel, the drawings, and this specification.
The Contractor is responsible for the strength and adequacy of all connection details. Sketches and calculations shall be submitted for special
details at the request of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer. All design shall be performed by a Contractors registered structural
engineer. Relevant drawings and design notes shall be stamped by the
Contractors structural engineer performing the work, licensed to practice
in the province where the structure is located.
Member connections shall be designed to resist the loads shown on the
design drawings, unless they are governed by the minimum requirements
outlined below.
Moment connections shall be designed for the forces shown on the drawings. Where forces are not indicated, connection shall be designed to
develop the full bending capacity of the weakest member.
Shear connections shall be designed for the values given. Where reactions are not given, the connection shall be designed to resist not less
than the factored reaction of the uniform beam load, which would result in
a bending moment equal to the bending capacity of the section.
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, bracing shall be connected for
the loads indicated or 50% of factored tension capacity on the net section,
whichever is greater. In all cases, the minimum number of bolts shall be
as follows:
Structural Tees
Four (4) bolts
Angle Bracing
Two (2) bolts
Horizontal bracing shall be fastened to intermediate beams, if possible, in

order to eliminate sags. Cross bracing shall be connected at the intersection point.
Gusset plates and stiffener plates shall be a minimum of 10 mm (3/8")
thick.
Unless otherwise noted, all field connections shall be bolted and all shop
connections welded. Handrailing shall be considered a field-connected
part.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 8 of 15

Each part of the structure shall be properly aligned before completing field
connections. All members in completed frames shall be true to line and
free from bends, twists, kinks, and open joints.
The Contractor shall not cut, drill, or otherwise alter the work to accommodate other trades unless the work is clearly specified in the design
drawings or specifications. Any subsequent cutting, drilling, or other alteration of the structural steel performed by the erector shall be agreed to in
writing by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative,
prior to the alteration being made.
6.2
Welding Connections
The Contractor's welding procedures shall be submitted to Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative prior to commencing fabrication. Welding procedures that conform in all respects to CSA W59 shall be
deemed as pre-qualified and are exempt from tests for qualifications. Other procedures may be acceptable but shall be qualified by tests as
prescribed in CSA W59. The test records shall be submitted to Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
Welding shall be performed only by welders who have been qualified in
accordance with CSA W59. Welder qualification test records shall be
made available upon request to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
All butt welds shall be full penetration welds.
6.3
Bolting Connections
All bolted connections shall be bearing type, except at joints where slippage cannot be tolerated or where otherwise indicated on the design
drawings. Minimum bolt size shall be M20 (3/4" diameter) bolts, with
threads assumed in the shear plane, unless noted otherwise on the drawings or limited by the size of the connection.
Slip resistant (Friction-type) connections shall be designed using appropriate values corresponding to a 5% probability of slip.
Bolts for all members, except for secondary framing, shall conform to
ASTM A325M. Bolts for secondary framing shall conform to ASTM A307.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 9 of 15
7.0
FABRICATION
7.1
General
Only new steel shall be used.
Fabrication shall be in accordance with CSA S16, the requirements of this
specification and the CISC code of standard practice for structural steel.
Bolt holes shall be made by drilling only.
Base plates over 0.3 m2 (3 square feet) shall be provided with grout holes.
Shop splices of members will not be permitted without the prior written approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer. When
approval is given, shop splices must develop 100% of the capacity of the
member. Costs of splicing shall be borne by the Contractor. Nondestructive testing shall be done at the discretion of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
All members shall be fabricated with natural camber up.
Unless otherwise specified by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Engineer, all shop connections shall be made by continuous welding.
The Contractor shall ensure all burrs and sharp edges on hand railings,
ladders, and safety cages have been removed.
7.2
Grating
The grating bearing bars will span in one (1) common direction. The grating bearing bars, banding bars, and twisted cross bars in adjacent panels,
shall be aligned in their respective directions.
7.3
Shop Welding
All welding processes, welders' qualifications, and process qualifications
shall be in accordance with CSA W47.1 and CSA W59.
Structures that are galvanized must be continuously seal welded.
All welding is to be completed prior to painting or galvanizing.
7.4
Surface Preparation
All surface preparation shall be as per Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.
Specification TMPSE-45ES0012, External Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves, Equipment, and Structural Steel.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 10 of 15

7.5
Galvanizing
Hot dip galvanizing: galvanize steel, where indicated, to CSA G164, minimum zinc coating 600 g/m2.
7.6
Surface Coating
The primer and the topcoat (finish paint) shall be applied within a shop environment. Coating application shall be as per Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P. Specification TMPSE-45ES0012, External Coating of Aboveground
Piping, Valves, Equipment, and Structural Steel.
7.7
Delivery
Steelwork shall be properly protected during shipping so that parts will not
be bent, broken, deformed, strained, or otherwise damaged.
Damage to any part of the work due to lack of proper handling or shipping
by the Contractor shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
8.0
ERECTION
8.1
General
Erection shall be in accordance with CSA S16, the requirements of this
specification, and CISC code of standard practice for structural steel.
8.2
Supply
The Manufacturer shall supply all pre-fabricated structures, erection bolts,
nuts, washers, load indicator washers, shims, wedges, and leveling plates
required for proper fit-up.
The Erector shall furnish all other materials, tools, labour, equipment, and
supervision required to install the structure(s).
8.3
Field Repairs
All field repairs or alterations must be approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
Bolt holes shall be made by drilling. Holes made by burning are not permitted.
Any cut member shall be dressed and have a smooth edge and shall be
regalvanized or repainted in accordance with original finish.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 11 of 15

8.4
Surface Repairs
Repairs to painted or galvanized areas may be accepted if repairs are
made by a method that will provide equal protection and is approved by
8.5
Field Welding
Field welds shall be made by welders who have been qualified in accordance with CSA W47.1.
All field welding shall be in accordance with CSA W59.
Before field welding on galvanized or painted surfaces, remove the surface coating within 90mm (3 ") of welds 20 mm (3/4") or greater and
within 50 mm (2") of welds less than 20 mm (3/4").
8.6
Erection Tolerances
Fabrication tolerances for finished parts shall be as specified in Section
28.9 of CSA S16.
Rolling tolerances for profile dimensions permitted under CSA G40.20.
Individual members of structural steel frames shall be considered as being
plumb, level, and aligned when the deviation from the dimensions shown
does not exceed 1 in 500.
8.7
Alignment and Fitting

Each part of the structure shall be properly aligned before completing field
connections.
Holes not supplied by the structural steel fabricator and required for erection shall be drilled. No hole enlargement shall be made with a torch.
Minor misfitting may be remedied and corrected by a moderate amount of
reaming, as directed by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative. All shop errors shall be reported and the proposed method of
correction shall be submitted for approval to Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Engineer. Fitting-up bolts and drift pins shall not be
used to bring improperly fabricated members and parts into place, thus
causing a strain on bolts in finished work. Drift pins shall not be driven with
such force as to deform adjacent metal.
No flame cutting will be permitted on main members. Flame cutting on
secondary members may be permitted if not loaded and following the written approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 12 of 15

No packing, shimming, or wedging will be permitted to correct imperfect
work, unless approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
8.8
High Strength Bolting

Bolts shall be tightened by the calibrated wrench method in accordance
with the provisions of CSA S16. A device capable of measuring direct bolt
tension shall be available on the job throughout the course of the work in
order to maintain proper wrench calibration.
During assembly, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt
heads or nuts, shall be free of burrs, dirt, and other foreign material that
would prevent solid seating of parts. The assembly and inspection of bolted structural joints shall meet the requirements of CSA S16.
All bolts shall be installed with a hardened washer under the element (nut
or bolt head), which is being turned during the bolt tightening operation.
8.9
Base Plates and Grouting

Base plates shall be set and shimmed to the correct positions and elevations, as shown on the design drawings. The final position of each plate
shall be subject to the approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.
Following erection of the structural steel, the base plates shall be grouted
as specified in Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specification TMSPE-CIV135, Grouting.
8.10
9.0
Field Coating Repairs

Surface preparation and touch-up coating repairs of painted surfaces shall
be in accordance to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specification TMPSE45ES0012A, Field Touch-Up and Supplementary Schedule for External
Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves, Equipment, and Structural Steel.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

The materials and products used shall be marked in compliance with CSA
G40.20 and CSA G40.21. If the identification of a piece is removed during fabrication, the piece shall be remarked in compliance with the above standards to
show the grade and designation of the material.
A record of certified Manufacturer's tests performed in compliance with CSA
G40.21 covering all specified materials shall be kept by the fabricator.
Fabrication and erection is to be performed by a company having full approval of
the Canadian Welding Bureau in conformance with CSA W47.1, subject to the
approval of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 13 of 15

All welding will be performed by CWB-certified Division 1 or Division 2 firms only.
The Fabricator shall submit CWB-approved datasheets as well as copies of all
certificates at least three (3) weeks before start of fabrication.
10.0 INSPECTION
The Fabricator shall establish a shop inspection procedure (Inspection Test Plan
ITP) to perform sufficient inspections and tests to assure conformance to contract requirements. The Fabricator's quality control program and ITP shall be
submitted in writing to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative for review prior to proceeding with any scope of work. It shall include
sufficient detail to describe those items to be inspected, the manner of inspection, and shall adequately describe all fabrication quality control activities
contemplated, including provision for adequate documentation of the fabricator's
performance of such quality control and inspection. Records of inspections and
certified reports of tests performed shall be retained by the fabricator and submitted to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative when
requested.
Random testing shall be performed on field bolted connections to ensure proper
tightening and installation techniques, as specified in CSA S16.
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative reserves the right to
inspect any or all parts of the work during fabrication and erection. Such inspection shall in no way relieve the contractor of responsibility for the adequacy of the
work.
If errors in fabrication are discovered during erection or installation, the Contractor shall repair them at no cost to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.
Certified copies of all mill test reports covering the chemical analyses and physical properties of the steel, as described in the applicable ASTM and CSA
standards shall be submitted upon request to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
The Contractor shall provide Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative with suitable and safe access to all places of work for purposes of
inspection at all times. Materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at
any time.
All structural welds may be visually examined by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative. Where additional non-destructive testing is required,
such testing shall be carried out in accordance with requirements of CSA W59.
All faulty welding discovered during non-destructive tests shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative at no
extra cost to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 14 of 15
11.0 DRAWINGS
11.1
General
The Manufacturer shall prepare and submit copies of all detail and erection drawings complete in every detail for the structures being furnished.
Detail and erection shop drawings shall be submitted to Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer for review prior to fabrication. If corrections are required, the Contractor shall make and clearly mark such
corrections and resubmit the drawings for final approval within seven (7)
calendar days.
Review of detail and erection drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the completeness and accuracy of all dimensions and details.
After approval, the Manufacturer shall forward five (5) copies of "As Fabricated" drawings to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer.
11.1.1 Fabrication Drawings
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer (including the
Engineer for Design-Build packages) will furnish drawings that will
give all information required for the shop detailing of the steel.
The Contractor's erection drawings shall be referenced to Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineers drawings. Shop
drawings shall be referenced to the related erection drawings.
11.1.2 Erection Drawings
Before the start of the work, drawings marked "Issued for Construction" will be supplied to the Contractor by Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Engineer. The latest revisions of these drawings
shall be used.
The Contractor shall prepare erection diagrams and shop drawings
for structural steel and miscellaneous metal based on the design
drawings and specifications. Shop and erection drawings shall be
stamped by a professional engineer registered in the province
where the work is located. The Contractor shall furnish four (4)
prints of the following shop drawings to Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Engineer, as well as electronic files.
Erection Drawings showing clearly the marking and position of

each member.
Details of all members and their connections.

TMPSE-42EF0008
Revision 3
August 16, 2007
Page 15 of 15

Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer will review
the shop drawings for conformance to the drawings. One (1) print
will be returned to the Contractor reviewed by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer with notations requiring any
change. If corrections are required, the Contractor shall make and
clearly mark such correction and resubmit the drawings for final review within seven (7) calendar days after receipt from Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer.
12.0 QUALITY RECORDS

Quality records shall be compiled and maintained by the Contractor as objective
evidence that products were procured, manufactured, delivered, installed, and
tested in accordance to the project drawings, design specifications, applicable
codes and standards, regulations, and contract documents.
Quality records shall be legible, identifiable, and traceable to materials, products,
services, and persons involved.
Upon project completion, the Contractor shall index and submit their quality documents to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative. They
As-built drawings, including shop fabrication details, and erection drawings
Material data, including catalogued Mill Test Reports (MTRs) and other product data sheets (coatings, etc.)
Welding data, including fabricator / installer certifications, welding procedures,

complete with data sheets, and welder and welder operator qualification certificates
NDE data (if applicable), including third-party certifications and NDE Reports
Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

STEEL PIPE PILES

TMPSE-42EF0015, Revision 2, August 16, 2007
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
A
B
0
1
2
Prepared by/
Date
P. Aldridge/
24-Jan-06
P. Aldridge/
28-Mar-06
P. Aldridge/
15-May-06
P. Aldridge/
12-Jun-06
S. Woodside/
16-Aug-07
Reviewed by/
Date
J. Buckle/
10-Mar-06
J. Buckle/
28-Mar-06
J. Buckle/
15-May-06
J. Buckle/
12-Jun-06
VECO Approved by/

Date
D. Blackadar/
30-Mar-06
D. Blackadar/
15-May-06
D. Blackadar/
12-Jun-06
KMC Approved/
Date
F. Siwak/
23-Mar-06
T. Delong/
30-Mar-06
T. Delong/
15-May-06
T. Delong/
12-Jun-06
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review
Issued for Bid
Minor Revision to Section
3.1
Terasen References
removed

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 2 of 11
Title: STEEL PIPE PILES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 3
2.0
3.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................... 4

3.1
General ...................................................................................................... 4
3.2
3.3
3.4
Supplier - Installer Qualifications ............................................................... 4

Tolerances ................................................................................................. 4
Welding ...................................................................................................... 5
3.5
Submittals .................................................................................................. 5
3.5.1
3.5.2
4.0
PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 6
4.1
Materials .................................................................................................... 6
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
5.0
6.0
Prior to Installation .................................................................................. 5

Upon Completion of Pile Installation ........................................................ 5
Steel Piles ............................................................................................... 6

Structural Steel........................................................................................ 6
Welding ................................................................................................... 6
Delivery and Storage ............................................................................... 6
EXECUTION......................................................................................................... 7
5.1
5.2
5.3
General ...................................................................................................... 7
Survey Work .............................................................................................. 7
Pile Splicing ............................................................................................... 8
5.4
5.5
Pre-Drilling ................................................................................................. 8
Pile Driving................................................................................................. 8
5.6
5.7
Clean-Up.................................................................................................... 9
Inspection ................................................................................................ 10
5.8
Field Coating............................................................................................ 10
QUALITY RECORDS ......................................................................................... 10

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 3 of 11
1.0
SCOPE
This specification provides the requirements for the supply and installation of
driven steel pipe piles as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
2.0
specification.
Alberta Building Code 1997
British Columbia Building Code 1998
National Building Code of Canada 2005 (Structural Commentaries (Part 4)
From the NBC 1995)
API 5A
Specification for tubular goods (well casing) Quality

Assurance
API 5L
Specification for line pipe
API 5LS
Specification for spiral-weld line pipe
ASTM A36
Standard Specification for Carbon Structure Steel
ASTM A53
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A252
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles
ASTM D1143
Standard test method for Piles Under Static Axial

Compressive Load
CSA-G40.21-M
Structural Quality Steels
CSA W47.1
Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of

Steel Structures
CSA W48.1
Mild Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes
CSA W59-M
Welded Steel Construction
CSA-Z245.1
Steel Line Pipe
TMPSE-42EF0008
Structural Steel
TMPSE-45ES0012A
Field Touch-up and Supplementary Schedule for

External Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves,

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 4 of 11
3.0
TMPSE-ENV-150
General Regulatory Compliance
Geotechnical Reports
EBA Engineering Consultants Ltd. 2006
QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.1
General
The Contractor shall supply the services of an approved third-party
geotechnical firm as required to ensure that soil conditions and piling
construction methods will produce suitable foundation systems. The field
engineer or technician shall monitor the piling installation and record the
results on an acceptable driving record, see Section 3.5.2 of this
specification.
Any difficulties encountered during the pile installation that deviates from
design requirements noted on the drawings or herein shall be reviewed
immediately with Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative.
The Contractor shall be remove, repair, or replace any pile non-compliant
to the drawings or as specified herein at no cost to Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.
3.2
Supplier - Installer Qualifications

The equipment and methods employed to install the piles shall be similar
to those used by contractors who have specialist experience in this type of
work.
The Contractor shall employ personnel fully experienced in driven steel
pipe piles.
The Contractor shall engage a qualified surveyor to perform surveys,
layouts and measurements for piling work.
3.3
Tolerances
The Contractor shall install piles to the following tolerances:
Pile head centre within 50 mm of location shown on drawings at the

pile cut-off elevation
Pile vertical alignment within 2% of pile length, but not exceeding

50 mm
Finished pile cut off elevation +/- 3 mm from elevation shown on the
drawings

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 5 of 11

3.4
Welding
The Contractor shall complete all welding in accordance to the
requirements of Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specification TMPSE42EF0008, Structural Steel. This is applicable for all shop fabrication, field
pile splicing, and pile cap installations.
3.5
Submittals
3.5.1 Prior to Installation
The Contractor shall, two (2) weeks prior to commencement of pile
installation, provide Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated
Representative the following information for review and approval:
Details of equipment for installation of piles. For impact

hammers, the Contractor shall provide the Manufacturers
name, type, rated energy per blow at normal working rate, mass
of striking parts of hammer, and mass of driving cap. For
vibratory hammers, the Contractor shall provide full details of
characteristics necessary to evaluate performance.
Detailed piling installation procedure complete with schedule of

planned sequence for piling installation that corresponds to the
pile schedule.
Certification of Geotechnical firm and qualification records of

field engineer or technician.
Steel producers certificate and copies of steel mill tests for steel
pile materials.
Ground disturbance plan.
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) detailing Contractor and Trans

Mountain Pipelines L.P. hold points as specified herein and on
the drawings.
Sample pile driving record, see Section 3.5.2 of this

specification.
3.5.2 Upon Completion of Pile Installation

The Contractor shall provide the Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative the following information for acceptance
upon completion of the piling installation:
A complete driving record for each pile within 24 hours after

installation, by number referencing the pile schedule, inclusive

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 6 of 11

of as-built deviations of pile location, cut-off elevation, drive
energy, blows per foot, blows per final inch, total pile length and
length below grade, material type, size and thickness
4.0
As-built drawing of actual pile installation locations and

elevations, this shall be submitted at end of the pile installation
work at a given site
Quality Records, see Section 6.0 of this specification
PRODUCTS
4.1
Materials
4.1.1 Steel Piles
Steel pipe piles shall be new material in accordance with ASTM
A252, Grade 3, 350 Mpa, or approved equal with either straight
longitudinal or spiral seams and plain machine cut ends unless
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
Pipe piles shall have a minimum wall thickness of 9.5 mm and

conform to the requirements as shown on the drawings.
CSA Z245.1 will define the permissible deviation from diameter,
wall thickness, and out-of-roundness of the pipe pile. Deviation
from a straight line must not exceed L/1000 where L is the length.
Piles not meeting the requirements of this specification must be
approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Engineer
in writing prior to delivering to the site.
4.1.2 Structural Steel
Structural steel bearing plates, pile driving shoes, and bearing rings
shall conform to CSA G40.21-M Grade 300W (min.).
4.1.3 Welding
Welding electrodes shall conform to CSA W48.1-M, E480XX.
4.1.4 Delivery and Storage
Pipe piles shall be delivered and stored horizontally on timber sills.
Timber separators shall be used to avoid metal-to-metal contact of
piles.

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 7 of 11
5.0
EXECUTION
5.1
General
The Contractor shall be familiar with soil descriptions and
recommendations provided in the project specific geotechnical report.
The choice of pile driving equipment shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor; the Contractor shall ensure that the pile wall thickness noted
on the drawings is sufficient for the pile driving equipment being utilized.
The Contractor shall ensure conditions at pile locations are adequate to
support piling equipment and shall make provisions for access and
support of piling equipment while driving piles.
The Contractor shall confirm location of existing underground pipelines or
utilities before starting pile driving operation and obtain an excavation /
ground disturbance permit from Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative. If underground pipelines or utilities exist
within 5 m of a pile location, a hole of equal diameter to the piling shall be
hydro trenched to a minimum depth of 3 m or the pipeline or utility shall be
positively identified in its entirety by means of hydro trenching or hand
excavation prior to driving the pile. If an obstruction is encountered during
the hydro trench or hand excavation operation, the Contractor shall report
to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative for further
instructions.
The Contractor shall ensure that he has proper clearance from
aboveground and overhead obstructions to install the piling at the required
locations and operate the equipment safely in respect to his own and other
personnel and equipment in the area.
5.2
Survey Work
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing the lines, levels, and
locations of pile centers from the construction drawings and from base
lines and benchmarks established by the Contractor and Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.
Piles shall be finished to the alignment and elevations within the
tolerances specified on the drawing or herein, whichever is more stringent.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of survey
monuments and shall repair any damage caused, during the course of the
work, to such monuments.

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 8 of 11

5.3
5.4
Pile Splicing
Wherever possible, the Contractor shall supply or fabricate full-length piles
and provide equipment of sufficient capacity to handle full-length piles
without cutting and splicing. Should splicing be required, the Contractor
shall:
Obtain approval, in writing, from Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s

Prepare surfaces for splicing by cutting and grinding square, to ensure

full bearing of spliced parts.
Welding shall be done in accordance to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.

Specification TMPSE-42EF0008, Structural Steel, and in such a way
as to prevent and minimize distortion. It is recommended that tack
welds to opposite points be made first and the main welding done to
opposite sections afterwards.
Complete full penetration welds shall be used.
Driving shoes may be installed as part of fieldwork.
Pre-Drilling
Pre-drilling will be completed as shown on the drawings.
Where required, the Contractor shall pre-drill holes at any site where
frozen ground prevents driving piles to the lengths indicated on the
drawings. The diameter of predrilled holes shall not be greater than 90%
of the piles diameter, unless specified otherwise.
5.5
Pile Driving
The Contractor shall install piles to minimize interference with adjacent
piles and in accordance with the approved piling sequence schedule.
Driving of steel piles may be facilitated by the use of different kinds of
driving hammer. The rated energy of the driving hammer, however, shall
be limited to 630 J/cm2 (3000-ft. lb./in2) of pile cross sectional area and a
maximum energy as indicated on the drawings.
Elevation of the pile top shall be taken after each pile is driven to its
required depth. Heaving of the piles shall be checked periodically, and
piles that are heaved shall be re-driven.
Where piles are driven in-groups, they should be driven from the centers
outwards; and, in some cases, it may be necessary to leave some time
between the driving of piles in order to gain greater penetration as the soil
is intensified.

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 9 of 11

The Contractor shall not drive piles within a radius of 8 m of concrete,
which has been in place less than three (3) days. The Contractor shall
exercise care when driving batter piles adjacent to existing structures to
ensure no contact between the pile and structure takes place. The
Contractor shall not drive batter piles until vertical piles within an 8 m
radius have been fully driven.
Acceptable tolerance for driven piles shall be as specified within Section
3.3 of this specification. Where it is found that the location of the installed
pile exceeds the permissible deviation, Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative shall assess the piles location and remedial
actions shall be made in consultation with the Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Engineer. Piles damaged while driving shall be replaced
at the Contractor's expense.
All piles shall be driven to the depth or practical refusal as indicated on the
drawings. Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative
shall be contacted immediately for further instructions when the Practical
Refusal is reached before the required embedment length, or when it is
not reached after the required embedment length.
The Contractor shall hold piles securely and accurately in position while
driving and deliver hammer blows in direct axis of pile. Pile heads shall be
reinforced, if necessary.
The Contractor shall rough cut off piles to within +300 mm of elevations
shown on the drawings after piles are completely driven and after any
danger of heaving due to driving of adjacent piles has ceased to exist.
The Contractor shall provide protective cover over pipe pile after
inspection to prevent entry of foreign materials.
5.6
Clean-Up
The Contractor shall dispose of excavated materials such as pre-drill
tailings off site or at a location designated acceptable by Trans Mountain
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean up and remove or
dispose of excess and waste materials off site.
Before leaving the jobsite, the Contractor shall ensure that the work site is
returned to a condition satisfactory to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative and at least equal to what existed before the
work commenced. The Contractor shall repair any adjacent work that has
been injured or marred by their operations.

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 10 of 11

5.7
Inspection
The Contractor shall provide access to the work at all times to Trans
Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative for checking
materials and pile installation procedures. Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s
Designated Representative reserves the right to check and confirm any
pile layout performed by the Contractor.
Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative shall have the
right to stop work and require repairs or alterations, if in his opinion, the
materials or workmanship do not meet the requirements of the drawings or
as specified herein. Any omissions or failure on the part of Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative to disapprove or reject any
work or materials shall not be construed as an acceptance of any
defective work or materials.
All piles shall be inspected and approved by Trans Mountain Pipelines
L.P.s Designated Representative before demobilization of the pile driving
rig. Piles that are out of position, below final cut-off elevation, or otherwise
damaged will be rejected. Rejected piles, at the option of Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative, shall be removed and
replaced with new ones or cut off as directed and replaced as necessary
to provide equivalent load carrying capability.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of repair and additional inspection
resulting from faulty materials or workmanship. If any pile is wrongly
located, the Contractor shall be responsible for correcting the pile
placement. Removal and replacement or other work made necessary
through rejection of a damaged or defective pile shall be at the
Contractors expense and at no additional cost to Trans Mountain
Pipelines L.P.
5.8
6.0
Field Coating
The Contractor shall coat the exposed portion of all pilings and pile caps in
accordance to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P. Specification TMPSE45ES0012A, Field Touch-up and Supplementary Schedule for External
QUALITY RECORDS
Quality records shall be compiled and maintained by the Contractor as objective
evidence that products were procured, manufactured, delivered, installed, and
tested in accordance to the project drawings, design specifications, applicable
codes and standards, regulations, and contract documents.
Quality records shall be legible, identifiable, and traceable to materials, products,
services, and persons involved.

TMPSE-42EF0015
Revision 2
August 16, 2007
Page 11 of 11

Upon project completion, the Contractor shall index and submit their quality
documents to Trans Mountain Pipelines L.P.s Designated Representative. They
Pile and structural steel mill test reports (MTRs)
Pile Layout / Schedule complete with as-built drawing records
Welding data (if applicable) company certifications, welding procedures and

welder qualifications.
Pile Driving Records
Signed off and accepted Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
TRANS MOUNTAIN PIPELINE L.P.

FIELD TOUCH-UP AND SUPPLEMENTARY SCHEDULE

FOR EXTERNAL COATING OF ABOVEGROUND
PIPING, VALVES, EQUIPMENT, AND STRUCTURAL
STEEL
TMPSE-45ES0012A, Revision 2, August 20, 2007
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
A
Prepared by/
Date
A. Hutchinson/
10-Nov-05
A. Hutchinson/
09-Jan-06
A. Hutchinson/
13-Jan-06
A. Hutchinson/
30-Jan-06
S. Woodside/
20-Aug-07
Reviewed by/
Date
D. Rauch/
09-Dec-05
D. Rauch/
30-Jan-06
VECO Approved by/

Date
KMC Approved/
Date
F. Siwak/
23-Dec-05
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review
F. Siwak/
11-Jan-06
Issued for Approval
D. Blackadar/
13-Jan-06
T. Delong/
13-Jan-06
D. Blackadar/
30-Jan-06
T. Delong/
30-Jan-06
Edits to Sections 6.6 & 7.0

Terasen references
removed

TMPSE-45ES0012A
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 2 of 7
Title: FIELD TOUCH-UP AND SUPPLEMENTARY SCHEDULE FOR EXTERNAL COATING

OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING, VALVES, EQUIPMENT, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
2.0
3.0
COATING SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 3
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
Prime Coat ................................................................................................. 4

Topcoat Colour .......................................................................................... 4
COATING SCHEDULE ......................................................................................... 4

4.1
4.2
Structural Steel .......................................................................................... 4

Bolted Valves (Flanged or In-Line), Instrumentation, and Tagged
Equipment.................................................................................................. 4
4.3
4.4
Un-Insulated Process and Drain Piping ..................................................... 4

Insulated Process and Drain Piping ........................................................... 5
SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................................. 5

5.1
Solvent Cleaning ........................................................................................ 5
5.2
5.3
Hand Tool Cleaning ................................................................................... 5

Recommended Specification Where Field Blasting is not Possible ........... 6
APPLICATION ...................................................................................................... 6
6.1
6.2
Prime Coat ................................................................................................. 6

Topcoat ...................................................................................................... 6
6.3
6.4
Film Continuity ........................................................................................... 6

Film Thickness ........................................................................................... 6
6.5
6.6

Overspray .................................................................................................. 7
INSPECTION........................................................................................................ 7
7.1
7.2
Contractors On-Site Supervisor, Quality Control ....................................... 7

Contractors Inspection Equipment ............................................................ 7
7.3
Client Hold Points ...................................................................................... 7
SAFETY DATA SHEETS ...................................................................................... 7

TMPSE-45ES0012A
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 3 of 7

1.0
GENERAL
This specification prescribes field touch up coatings of aboveground piping,
fittings, valves, equipment, and structural steel and is to be utilized as a
supplement to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P. Specification TMPSE-45ES0012
External Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves, Equipment, and Structural
Steel.
The purpose of this supplement is meant for field touch-up coatings of field welds
on piping and structural steel, handling damage to shop coated piping, structural
steel, tagged valves, and equipment, and is not meant for coatings of uncoated
raw materials, which could have been coated prior to shipping.
2.0
specification.
ISO 8501-1
Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints

and Related Products
SSPC-PA-1
SSPC-SP-1
Solvent Cleaning
SSPC-SP-2
Hand Tool Cleaning
The Manufacturers recommendations for use of their coatings shall be

considered a part of this specification.
3.0
COATING SYSTEM
3.1
The specified coating systems are listed in Table 5.1.A within Trans
Mountain Pipeline L.P. Specification TMPSE-45ES0012 External
Field touch-up coating shall be completed using the same Coating
Manufacturer that was selected to complete the original application at the
shop.

TMPSE-45ES0012A
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 4 of 7

4.0
3.2
Prime Coat
For the purpose of field touch-up only, it is acceptable to use a Trans
Mountain Pipeline L.P.-approved Surface Tolerant Epoxy in lieu of the
specified Coating System for the prime coat.
3.3
Topcoat Colour
The topcoat colour shall be as specified in Table 5.2.A within Trans
Mountain Pipeline L.P. Specification TMPSE-45ES0012 External
COATING SCHEDULE
4.1
Structural Steel
Surface prep, prime, and topcoat all areas damaged during shipment,
handling, and field installation, this also includes areas affected by field
welding.
Any galvanized structure that has field damage shall be removed from site
for re-galvanizing, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Trans
Mountain Pipeline L.P. Designated Representative.
All bolts shall be galvanized, cadmium plated, and / or stainless steel;
therefore, additional field coating is not required.
4.2
Bolted Valves (Flanged or In-Line), Instrumentation, and Tagged

Equipment
handling, and field installation.
Topcoat shall be as defined within Section 3.2 of this specification.
Valve bonnet bolt-ups, packing gland nuts, etc. shall be top coated to
match valve body.
Do not coat instruments or equipment that are of non-carbon materials
(i.e. turbine meters stainless steel).
For small-bore valves that were not previously shop coated prior to
shipping, see Sections 4.3 and 4.4 of this specification.
4.3
Un-Insulated Process and Drain Piping

handling, and field installation; this also includes areas affected by field
welding.

TMPSE-45ES0012A
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 5 of 7

Studs and nuts used to assemble process and drain piping spools to
valves or tagged equipment shall be cleaned, primed, and topcoated upon
completion of installation (post start-up).
For small bore valves that were not previously shop coated prior to
shipping, surface prep prime, and topcoat in accordance with this
specification. Do not coat handles of valves that are plated or are of noncarbon alloys.
4.4
Insulated Process and Drain Piping

Surface prep and prime coat all areas damaged during shipment,
handling, and field installation; this also includes areas affected by field
welding. Note, if flanges, valve bodies, or other equipment within an
insulated system are to be left uncovered, these areas shall be top coated.
All exposed studs and nuts used to assemble process and drain piping
spools to valves and / or tagged equipment shall be cleaned, primed, and
topcoated upon completion of installation (post start-up). If the installation
is to be covered, a topcoat is not required.
Small bore valves that were not previously shop coated prior to shipping
and are to be insulated shall be surface prepped and prime coated in
accordance to this specification. Do not coat handles of valves that are
plated or of non-carbon alloys.
5.0
SURFACE PREPARATION
5.1
Solvent Cleaning
Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil, grease, soil,
drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from
steel surfaces. Solvent cleaning shall be used prior to the application of
coatings and in conjunction with surface preparation methods specified for
the removal of rust, mill scale, or paint.
5.2
Hand Tool Cleaning

Hand tool cleaning is a method of preparing steel surfaces by the use of
non-power hand tools.
Hand tool cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint,
and other loose detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent
mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Mill scale, rust, and
paint are considered adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a
dull putty knife.

TMPSE-45ES0012A
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 6 of 7

ISO 8501-1 or other visual standards of surface preparation agreed upon
by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative and the
Contractor may be used to further define the surface.
5.3
Recommended Specification Where Field Blasting is not Possible

Oil and grease should be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent
cleaning.
Hand or power tool clean to remove all loose or flaked coatings back to a
film feathered edge. Bare areas should be prepared to a minimum of S12
(ISO 8501-1) or SSPC-SP2, taking care not to polish the surface.
6.0
APPLICATION
6.1
Prime Coat
Apply prime coat to recommended dry film thickness as per the
Manufacturers Data Sheet.
Allow sufficient drying time between primer and topcoat as per grade of
catalyst, ambient, and structure skin temperatures and in conjunction with
the Manufacturers Data Sheets.
6.2
Topcoat
Apply topcoat as per Manufacturers Data Sheets; care shall be taken to
ensure coating repair is feathered properly into previously coated areas.
6.3
Film Continuity
Coatings shall be uniformly applied and be free of runs, sags, holidays,
pinholes, voids, mud-cracking, and other anomalies.
6.4
Film Thickness
The Contractor shall provide the tradesmen applying coating materials
with wet film thickness gauges to ensure that the correct film thickness is
being applied.
6.5
If, in the judgment of Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative, a coatings performance is jeopardized by contact with
rain, moisture condensation, dust, or other foreign elements, it shall be
removed and replaced.

TMPSE-45ES0012A
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 7 of 7

6.6
7.0
8.0
Overspray
Any surfaces contaminated by the Contractor with overspray or otherwise
displaced coating shall be cleaned or recoated to Trans Mountain Pipeline
L.P.s satisfaction.
INSPECTION
7.1
Contractors On-Site Supervisor, Quality Control

For the duration of the job, the Contractors on-site supervisor shall
complete the Daily Coating / Inspection Report included within Trans
Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Specification TMPSE-45ES0012, External
Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves, Equipment, and Structural Steel
or on a similar form pre-approved by the Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
Designated Representative. Ambient conditions shall be recorded a
minimum of four (4) times per day or as requested by Trans Mountain
Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative.
7.2
Contractors Inspection Equipment

The Contractor must have the following inspection equipment on site:
surface thermometer, psychrometer, dew point chart, wet mil gauge, and
dry film thickness gauge.
7.3
Client Hold Points

The work shall be subject to the following client hold points; these hold
points shall be identified on the Contractors Inspection Test Plan (ITP):
Pre-job review of Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Specification TMPSE45ES0012, External Coating of Aboveground Piping, Valves,
Equipment, and Structural Steel, this supplement, and the
Manufacturers data sheets.
Final Inspection shall include a visual examination for anomalies and

film thickness measurements.
SAFETY DATA SHEETS

All materials to be used shall be clearly labelled with batch numbers and other
pertinent data. MSDS sheets, as required by WHMIS, are to be provided for all
materials to be used on Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s property.

FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING

TMPSE-CIV-100, Revision 2, August 20, 2007
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
Prepared by/
Date
P. Aldridge/
24-Jan-06
P. Aldridge/
13-Mar-06
P. Aldridge/
07-Apr-06
1
2
S. Woodside/
20-Aug-07
Reviewed by/
Date
J. Buckle &
S. Gundry/
03-Mar-06
J. Buckle &
S. Gundry/
13-Mar-06
J. Buckle &
S. Gundry/
07-Apr-06
VECO Approved by/

Date
KMC Approved/
Date
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review

D. Blackadar/
13-Mar-06
T. Delong/
13-Mar-06
Issued for Bid
D. Blackadar/
18-Apr-06
T. Delong/
18-Apr-06
S. Gundry/
05-Mar-07
D. Blackadar/
05-Mar-07
F. Siwak/
05-Mar-07
F. Siwak/
20-Aug-07
--
T. DeLong/
20-Aug-07
Revised for Anchor Loop

Facilities and Blue River
Pump Station
Terasen references
removed

TMPSE- CIV-100
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 2 of 6
Title: FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1
Description ................................................................................................. 3
1.2
Quality Assurance ...................................................................................... 3
1.3
Quality Records ......................................................................................... 3
2.0
3.0
EXECUTION......................................................................................................... 4
3.1
Preparation ................................................................................................ 4
3.2
Surveying ................................................................................................... 5

TMPSE- CIV-100
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 3 of 6
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
Description
This specification provides the requirements for facility construction
survey.
1.2
Quality Assurance
The Surveyor must hold a current, valid Land Surveyor registration in the
Province in which the work is being done.
The equipment, methods, and personnel employed to do the surveying
shall be suitable and qualified consistent with the industry standard for
specialists in this type of work.
All boundary surveys completed by the Surveyor shall be compliant with
the approving authorities Disposition Plan Requirements indicating when a
survey is required; when a sketch, without a survey, is allowed; and to an
accuracy suitable for registration as a legal plan.
Horizontal positions and elevations shall be staked or marked to within
3 mm (1/8).
Each survey point shall include elevation and UTM grid coordinates and
zone identification noting the NAD Map Datum.
All locations and elevations shall be confirmed by a second survey.
1.3
Quality Records
Quality records of survey data shall be compiled and maintained by the
Contractors Surveyor as objective evidence that services were completed
in accordance to the project drawings, specifications, applicable codes,
standards, regulations and contract documents.
Quality records shall be legible, identifiable, and traceable to the services
and persons involved.

TMPSE- CIV-100
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 4 of 6

Upon completion of Work, the Surveyor shall index and submit their
quality documents to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative. They shall include, but not be limited to:
Copies of field notebooks and plans as requested by Trans Mountain

Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative or specified herein.
Legal Survey plans
As-built Drawings

specification.
Environmental Protection Plan, March 2007 (Rev 1) or most recent version
Kinder Morgan Health and Safety Execution Plan
TMPSE-ENV-150
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
Before starting any construction work, the legal boundaries of the lease,
the mainline pipeline right-of-way, and any other overhead or underground
crossing dispositions within or adjacent to the lease must be established
and clearly staked and flagged by the Surveyor.
A survey plan of these boundaries shall be prepared suitable for legal
registration.
The basis for the above survey shall be legal registered plans, which shall
be obtained by the Surveyor from the land titles registry. Any plans
received from Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative
shall be verified for completeness using the most up to date registered
plans obtained. Where detailed registered plans do not exist, the
Surveyor shall consult with Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative.
Prior to the start of the survey, the Surveyor shall submit for review to
Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative copies of the

TMPSE- CIV-100
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 5 of 6

legal plans and any other documentation on which the survey will be
based.
The Plant Grid base lines, as shown on the Plot Plan, shall be established
using at least two (2) permanent monuments in each direction.
Permanent monuments shall be protected such that they cannot be
disturbed by construction activities.
A drawing showing the details of the proposed monuments shall be
submitted to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative
for approval.
The Surveyor shall install a permanent control monument at the site
establishing the geodetic elevation; UTM coordinates as well as the plant
elevation and coordinates.
The control monument shall be located such that it cannot be disturbed by
construction activities and not be subject to frost movement. The control
monument shall be clearly identified on the as-built drawings.
All existing legal survey markers and pins shall be protected from
disturbance during construction.
3.2
Surveying
The Surveyor shall scan the entire work area to identify and stake the
location of all undergrounds, pipelines, telecommunication lines, and
utilities. Coordinates and top-of pipe elevation of pipelines and utilities
exposed by the Contractor by means of hand excavation or hydro-vac
shall be recorded on the survey plans.
The Surveyor shall identify and stake cut-and-fill for rough grading; fill and
surfacing limits; limits-of-construction, sufficient to complete the work to
the required lines, and grades without unnecessary disturbance of lands
both inside and outside the legally established boundaries of the work.
Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.'s Designated Representative shall be
notified if the limits of construction staked at any location extend beyond
the legal boundaries established for the work for confirmation of
permission to work in any such areas.
During construction, the Surveyor shall identify and stake the location of
all fencing, including lease boundary temporary fencing, facility permanent
fencing (excluding utility sub-station), piling, foundations, building
locations, steel support locations, underground tanks, piping, cables,
conduits, and culverts and other facilities as directed by Trans Mountain

TMPSE- CIV-100
Revision 2
August 20, 2007
Page 6 of 6

At the completion of each survey task and prior to backfilling for
underground work, the Surveyor shall check and record the constructed
locations and indicate all deviations from design locations and elevations
on the as-built drawings.
The information for each survey task shall be submitted to Trans Mountain
Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative for review prior to the start of a
subsequent survey task.
The clearing and topsoil stripping boundaries as well as the topsoil
stockpile locations shall be clearly identified and staked.
All finished grade elevation locations shown on the drawing shall be
staked with the cut or fill required to obtain the subgrade elevation.
Each driven steel pile shall be staked with two (2) offset stakes 90 apart
(offset to be marked on each stake).
Batter boards establishing the two (2) outside edges of building
foundations or skids and tank centerline coordinates as shown on the Plot
Plan shall be suitably marked by the Surveyor.
At the completion of the work, an as-built survey plan shall be completed
providing site finished grades, fence line locations, ditch lines or toe of
slope lines, catchments, gates, buildings, foundations, culvert locations,
inverts, field-determined underground piping locations, valves, top-of
buried-pipe elevations, underground tank, cable, and conduit locations.
The as-built survey plan shall include the legal boundaries, all
dispositions, section lines, etc., for reference as well as the plant site grid.
The plan shall be submitted electronically in ACAD 2002 format, In
addition to a paper submission.
The paper submission shall be
reproducible and in the format specified by the land titles registry for the
province having jurisdiction not withstanding review and approval of the
survey work by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the accuracy
and results of the survey work.

TOPSOIL
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
Prepared by/
Date
P. Aldridge/
24-Jan-06
P. Aldridge/
13-Mar-06
P. Aldridge/
07-Apr-06
1
2
S. Woodside/
23-Aug-07
Reviewed by/
Date
J. Buckle &
S. Gundry/
03-Mar-06
J. Buckle &
S. Gundry/
13-Mar-06
J. Buckle &
S. Gundry/
07-Apr-06
VECO Approved by/

Date
KMC Approved/
Date
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review

D. Blackadar/
13-Mar-06
T. Delong/
13-Mar-06
Issued for Bid
D. Blackadar/
18-Apr-06
T. Delong/
18-Apr-06
S. Gundry/
05-Mar-07
D. Blackadar/
05-Mar-07
F. Siwak/
05-Mar-07
F. Siwak/
23-Aug-07
--
T. DeLong/
23-Aug-07
Revised for Anchor Loop

Facilities and Blue River
Pump Station
Terasen references
removed

TMPSE-CIV-112
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 2 of 5
Title: TOPSOIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 3
2.0
3.0
MATERIALS ......................................................................................................... 3
4.0
CONSTRUCTION................................................................................................. 4
4.1
4.2
General ...................................................................................................... 4
Placing Topsoil .......................................................................................... 5

TMPSE-CIV-112
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 3 of 5
Title: TOPSOIL
1.0
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This specification shall consist of the stripping, loading, hauling, unloading,
placing, and finishing of topsoil material on slopes, ditches, or other areas, as
designated on the plans or as directed by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
Designated Representative, for the purpose of returning the area disturbed by
construction to an equivalent level of land capability and to create conditions
suitable for establishing a vegetation cover.
Those disturbed areas outside the final fenced perimeter of the pump station
yard that are not required for operations are to be graded as per the grading plan
and restored with topsoil so that vegetation can be established.
2.0
specification.
Environmental Protection Plan, March 2007 (Rev 1) or most recent version
Kinder Morgan Health and Safety Execution Plan
3.0
TMPSE-CIV-100
Facility Construction Survey
TMPSE-CIV-100C
Road Construction Survey
TMPSE-CIV-110
Earthwork and Road Construction
TMSPE-CIV-113
Seeding
TMPSE-ENV-150
MATERIALS
Topsoil is the uppermost layer (A-Horizon) of organic matter consisting of sand,
clay particles, and humus (peat and similar decomposed organic material) and is
suitable for supporting the growth of vegetation.
Topsoil shall be obtained from stripping operations performed under the contract,
unless otherwise directed by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative.
The stripping and stockpiling of topsoil from all sources shall be under the
direction of Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative.

TMPSE-CIV-112
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 4 of 5
Title: TOPSOIL
4.0
CONSTRUCTION
4.1
General
Topsoil stripping shall be done in a single lift unless otherwise directed by

Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative.
The stripped topsoil shall be stockpiled or spread within lease boundaries
as shown on the drawings or as directed by Trans Mountain Pipeline
Topsoil or upper surface material shall only be stripped from areas of the
access right-of-way where removal of topsoil is required or construction
activities will result in extensive damage or mixing of surface and subsoils.
The Contractor shall avoid or limit topsoil-stripping activities during frozen
conditions. If a frozen topsoil cutter is not available, the Contractor shall
rip frozen topsoil or upper surface material to the same depth as the
salvage requirements.
The Contractor shall strip all available topsoil or upper surface material
where soil salvage is warranted (i.e., where the access road will be
widened or where grading is necessary on undisturbed land), as shown on
the drawings.
The Contractor shall salvage all available topsoil (minimum 10-15 cm or
50% organic material and 50% mineral soil). Where soils are not readily
distinguishable by colour, Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative will consult with Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
Environmental Coordinator for direction on evaluating soil texture and
structure.
The Contractor shall leave gaps in the topsoil windrow, if warranted, at
obvious drainages.
If soils are prone to erosion by wind, the Contractor shall apply tackifier,
water or pack the topsoil windrow with a sheeps foot packer or other
approved equipment, as directed by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
The Contractor shall salvage topsoil from areas to be graded and windrow
along one (1) or both edges of the access road right-of-way and shall
avoid overstripping. The area stripped shall correspond to the area being
graded.
The Contractor shall grade away from ephemeral drainages to minimize
introduction of soil and organic debris. Windrowed or fill material shall not
be placed in the drainages during grading or topsoil salvage.

TMPSE-CIV-112
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 5 of 5
Title: TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be free from objectionable quantities of sub-soil, roots,
stones, and other deleterious substances. Stripped material that, in the
opinion of Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative, is
not suitable shall be disposed of as directed by Trans Mountain Pipeline
Before stockpiling the topsoil, the boundaries of the stockpile area shall be
staked, stripped, and graded for run-off control as shown on the drawings.
Stockpile sites shall be trimmed to present a neat and tidy appearance,
fenced, and debris resulting from the operation shall be removed and
disposed of, all in a manner satisfactory to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
At locations where a topsoil stockpile is to remain for future reclamation of
the facility, the stockpile shall be shaped to minimize erosion loss and
seeded as per Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P. Specification TMSPE-CIV113, Seeding.
Location and shape of the topsoil stockpile shall be as shown on the
drawings or as directed by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative.
If shown on the drawings, topsoil stockpiles shall be fenced with a four (4)strand barbed wire fence as per Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.
Specification TMSPE-CIV-108, Barbed Wire Fencing.
4.2
Placing Topsoil
Topsoil shall be uniformly spread on the prepared areas with no areas

less than 75 mm (3) thick unless otherwise approved by Trans Mountain
After spreading, all hard lumps shall be broken down by use of approved
equipment and all rocks larger than 75 mm (3) in dimension, roots,
stumps, and other foreign matter shall be removed and disposed of in a
manner satisfactory to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative.
The area covered with topsoil shall be in a condition suitable for seeding
or planting as per Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P. Specification TMPSE-CIV113, Seeding.
At the completion of reclamation activities, undertaken at any stage of the
project, the adjacent graveled surfaces shall be cleaned of all debris
resulting from the operation, and the completed work shall be left in a neat
and tidy condition.

GROUTING
REVISION INDEX
Rev
No.
Prepared by/
Date
P. Aldridge/
07-Feb-06
P. Aldridge/
01-Mar-06
P. Aldridge/
07-Apr-06
Reviewed by/
Date
J. Buckle/
07-Feb-06
J. Buckle/
10-Mar-06
J. Buckle/
07-Apr-06
VECO Approved by/

Date
D. Blackadar/
07-Apr-06
KMC Approved/
Date
F. Siwak/
09-Feb-06
F. Siwak/
02-Apr-06
T. Delong/
07-Apr-06
P. Aldridge/
18-Apr-06
J. Buckle/
18-Apr-06
D. Blackadar/
18-Apr-06
T. Delong/
18-Apr-06
S. Woodside/
23-Aug-07
F. Siwak/
23-Aug-07
--
T. DeLong/
23-Aug-07
A
B
0
Pages
Revised
Remarks
Issued for Review
Issued for Approval
Changes to Formatting
and Sections 3.1.3, 3.3,
5.1, and 5.4.7
Terasen references
removed

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 2 of 26
Title: GROUTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 5
2.0
3.0
GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 6
3.1
Design Requirements ................................................................................ 6

3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
Submittals .................................................................................................. 8
3.2.1
3.2.2
Product Data ........................................................................................... 8

Installation Procedures ............................................................................ 9
3.3
Training (Supplier Installer Qualifications) .............................................. 9
3.4
Product Supply, Storage, and Handling ................................................... 10

3.4.1
3.4.2
Supply ....................................................................................................10
Storage and Handling.............................................................................10
3.5
Sequencing and Scheduling .................................................................... 10
3.6
3.7
Preparation, Mixing, Placing, Finishing, and Curing ................................ 10

Temperature ............................................................................................ 11
3.8
Quality Assurance / Control ..................................................................... 11

3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.9
4.0
Application Requirements ....................................................................... 7

Grout Performance Requirements ........................................................... 7
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Bearing Criteria ................................................ 8
Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ......................................................................11

Inspection...............................................................................................11
Testing and Reporting ............................................................................12
Voids (Soundness) .................................................................................12
Rejection of Work ...................................................................................12
Quality Control Records .........................................................................12
Warranty .................................................................................................. 13
NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT PRODUCTS AND PROCEDURES ... 13

4.1
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Materials................................................ 13
4.2
4.3
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Product Data ......................................... 13

Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Preparation............................................ 14
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
Concrete Surfaces .................................................................................14

Metal Surfaces in Contact with Grout .....................................................14
Foundation and Leveling Plates .............................................................14
Formwork ...............................................................................................14

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 3 of 26
Title: GROUTING
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.4
Precautions Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout ........................................... 15

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.5
Vibrations ...............................................................................................15
Minimum and Maximum Grout Lift Placement ........................................16
Hot and Cold Weather ............................................................................16
Equipment................................................................................................ 16
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
Grout Mixer ............................................................................................16

Grout Pump ............................................................................................16
Clean Mixing Equipment ........................................................................16
4.6
Mixing Non-Shrink Cementitious Grouts .................................................. 16
4.7
Placing Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout .................................................. 17

4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
Placing Flowable Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout ..................................17

Placing Pumped Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout ...................................18
Equipment with Elevated Interior Plate ...................................................18
Finishing and Curing Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout ............................18
4.8
Testing ..................................................................................................... 18
4.9
Clean-Up.................................................................................................. 19
4.9.1
5.0
Control Joints and Reinforcement ..........................................................15

Anchor Bolts and Sleeves ......................................................................15
Reports ..................................................................................................19
APPROVED NON-SHRINK EPOXY GROUT PRODUCTS AND PROCEDURES

........................................................................................................................... 19
5.1
5.2
General .................................................................................................... 19
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout Materials ........................................................... 19
5.3
5.4
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Product Data .................................................... 20

Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Preparation....................................................... 20
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.5
Concrete Surfaces .................................................................................20

Metal Surfaces in Contact with Grout .....................................................20
Foundation and Leveling Plates .............................................................20
Formwork ...............................................................................................21
Control Joints and Reinforcement ..........................................................21
Adjacent Surfaces ..................................................................................22
Anchor Bolts and Sleeves ......................................................................22
Precautions Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout ...................................................... 22

5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
Vibrations ...............................................................................................22
Hot and Cold Temperatures ...................................................................22
Equipment Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout.......................................................23
Clean Mixing Equipment ........................................................................23

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 4 of 26
Title: GROUTING
5.6
Mixing ...................................................................................................... 23
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
6.0
Placing ...................................................................................................23
Flowable Grouting ..................................................................................24
Equipment with elevated Interior Plate ...................................................24
Finishing.................................................................................................24
Curing ....................................................................................................25
5.7
Testing ..................................................................................................... 25
5.8
5.9
Clean-Up.................................................................................................. 25
Reports .................................................................................................... 25
PRE-APPROVED ANCHOR BOLT / DOWEL GROUT PRODUCTS AND

PROCEDURES .................................................................................................. 26
6.1
Anchor Bolt/Dowel Grout Materials .......................................................... 26

6.1.1
6.2
Anchor Bolt/Dowel Grout ........................................................................26
Anchor Bolt / Dowel Execution................................................................. 26

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 5 of 26
Title: GROUTING
1.0
SCOPE
This specification provides the requirements for the supply and installation of
structural grout as shown on the drawings, it shall include but not be limited to
the following:
Submittals
Training (supplier - installer qualifications)
Supply and storage of grouting materials
Preparation for grouting
Mixing and placement of grout
Finishing and curing of grout.
Testing and Quality Control
2.0
specification.
ACI 304R
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and

Placing Concrete
ACI 351.1R
Grouting Between Foundations and

Support of Equipment and Machinery
ASTM C33
Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C109
Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 50 mm Cube
Specimens)
ASTM C136
Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates
ASTM C150
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C531
Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of ChemicalResistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and
Polymer Concretes
ASTM C579
Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of

Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic
Surfacings and Polymer Concretes
Bases
for

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 6 of 26
Title: GROUTING
3.0
ASTM C827
Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early

Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious
Mixtures
ASTM C939
Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for

Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
ASTM C1019
Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing

Grout
ASTM C1107
Standard specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic

Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
CRD C621
Specification for Non-shrink Grout
CRD C611
Flow Cone Method (for Fluid Grouts)
CSA A23.1
Concrete Materials
Construction
CSA A23.2-1B
Viscosity, Bleeding, Expansion and Compressive

Strength of Flowable Grout
CSA A23.5
Supplementary Cementing Materials
CSA A5
Portland Cement
TMPSE-42EF0006
Cast-in-Place Concrete
TMPSE-42EF0008
Structural Steel
TMPSE-MECH-420A
Mechanical Equipment Installation
&
Methods
of
Concrete
GENERAL
All Non-Shrink Cementitious Grouts shall be handled, stored, mixed, placed, and
cured in conformance with this specification, CRD-C621, and the applicable
standards listed above.
All Non-Shrink Epoxy Grouts shall be handled, stored, mixed, placed, and cured
in strict conformance with the Manufacturers written instructions unless stricter
requirements have been specified herein or by the applicable standards.
3.1
Design Requirements
Foundation plates for equipment and structures shall be grouted to
provide full, uniform load transfer between bottom of plate and concrete.
Load transfer to foundation must be through grout, not through double nut
or other leveling devices.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 7 of 26
Title: GROUTING
3.1.1 Application Requirements
The grout selected shall be as specified on the design drawings or
as outlined, by application, in this specification. In the case of a
conflict between this specification and the design drawings, the
design drawings shall govern.
Non-shrink Cementitious Grout
Equipment with cast bases.
Column base plates.
Void filler for pump base framework.
Small equipment with flat plate bases.
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout
Generators, blowers, motors, pumps with bases wider than
600 mm (2), and other rotating equipment subject to vibration.
Heavy equipment with impact loading. Use only in areas
Anchor Bolt/Dowel Grout.
Anchor bolt and dowel locations when called for on the drawings
All Other Applications
For all other grout applications not listed above or specified on
drawings, non-shrink cementitious grout shall be used unless
otherwise approved, in writing, by Trans Mountain Pipeline
3.1.2 Grout Performance Requirements
The grout selected shall meet the following minimum requirements
or as specified on the drawings. In the case of a conflict between
this specification and the design drawings, the design drawings
shall govern:
Non-shrink Cementitious Grout
Grout shall not shrink and shall expand no more than 4.0%
when tested according to ASTM C827 (before set) and shall
expand no more than 0.4% when tested according to CRD
C621 (after set)
Compressive Strength for manufactured grouts Minimum
45 MPa at 28 days if tested according to ASTM C109

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 8 of 26
Title: GROUTING
Working Time Consistency greater than 100% for a minimum

of 45 minutes at 24C, if tested according to applicable
consistency section of ASTM C827 at 15-minute intervals
Free from chemically produced gas, oxidizing catalysts,
inorganic accelerators, chloride, and metallic particles
Non-staining
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout

Effective Bearing Area No less than 95% as measured by the
EBA Test
Compressive Strength Minimum 70 MPa at seven (7) days if
tested in accordance with ASTM C579
Thermal Expansion Maximum of 0.000054 mm/mm/C when
tested in accordance with ASTM C531
Working time Minimum working time of 45 minutes at 24C
Epoxy grout mix MUST be of flowable consistency
Anchor Bolt/Dowel Grout
Anchor bolt / dowel grout performance requirements shall
meet those of non-shrink epoxy grout
3.1.3 Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Bearing Criteria
The Contractor shall observe the following guidelines for NonShrink Epoxy Grout installations in order to minimize creep and
edge curling:
3.2
Total equipment weight plus total bolt torque load divided by

surface bearing area of grout does not exceed 3.4 MPa
Projection of the grout beyond edge of bearing plate shall be at
least equal to or more than the thickness of the grout bed, but
shall not exceed two (2) times the thickness of the grout bed.
Submittals
3.2.1 Product Data
The Contractor shall submit the Manufacturers data including
limitations for handling, storage, and use of the proprietary grout
prior to delivery to the site. The Contractor shall also submit
imported sand and coarse aggregate sieve analysis to Trans
Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative for approval
prior to use (minimum seven (7) working days).

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 9 of 26
Title: GROUTING
3.2.2 Installation Procedures
The Contractor shall submit Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout, NonShrink Epoxy Grout, and Anchor Bolt / Dowel Grout installation
procedures to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative for approval. The procedures shall include but not
be limited to:
3.3
Materials
Handling and storage of materials
Sequencing and scheduling
Preparation of concrete and metal surfaces.
Formwork
Inspection
Temperature
Mixing and placing of grout
Curing and finishing
Testing
Reporting
Training (Supplier Installer Qualifications)

The Manufacturer of proprietary grout products shall have had in place, for
a minimum of five (5) years, a program of training, certifying, and
technically supporting a nationally organized approved contractor program
with annual re-certification of its participants. The Contractors grout
installers shall be approved by the Manufacturer of the specified product
and have sufficient training and knowledge in working with the specified
product.
A Manufacturers Representative of a proprietary grout shall be present at
each site where a grout or grouting crew will be using the proprietary
product for the first time on the Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P. TMSPE
project. This pre-grouting conference is to assure that all grouting steps
are understood and followed in accordance with the Manufacturers written
instructions. The Manufacturers Representative shall remain on site until
he or she is fully satisfied that proper grouting procedures are being
followed.
When grouting mainline pump units, the grouting Manufacturers
Representative shall be on site during both the epoxy grouting and
cementitious grouting operations to ensure that he or she is fully satisfied
that proper grouting procedures and techniques are being followed.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 10 of 26
Title: GROUTING
3.4
Product Supply, Storage, and Handling

3.4.1 Supply
The Contractor shall supply manufactured grouts in Manufacturers
packaging. Non-shrink cementitious grout shall be delivered in
sound, dry packages, and Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout hardener and
resin in sealed, pre-measured containers. Grout aggregate shall be
delivered in sound dry packages.
3.4.2 Storage and Handling
The Contractor shall store grout in the Manufacturers moisture
resistant sealed containers, with seals and labels intact, in a
weatherproof, damp-proof building with a raised floor, and in
accordance with the Manufacturers instructions. The grout
materials shall be stored at a temperature between 10C to 30C or
as recommended by the Manufacturer.
All materials shall be stored in a manner that will prevent
contamination or deterioration. The Contractor shall remove any
material that has deteriorated or been contaminated from the site at
no additional cost to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.
3.5
Sequencing and Scheduling

The concrete surface to be grouted shall have been cured for at least 10
full days prior to placing non-shrink cementitious grout. The concrete shall
be at least 28 days old prior to placing Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout. In no
case, however, shall the period prior to placing grout against concrete be
less than the Manufacturers recommendation.
The Contractor shall ensure that all preparation requirements specified in
Section 3.6 are completed prior to setting the objects to be grouted.
3.6
Preparation, Mixing, Placing, Finishing, and Curing

The surface preparation, base plate fixing, grout mixing, placing, finishing,
and curing shall be as outlined by the Manufacturers instructions and in
these specifications as outlined in:
Section 4.0 Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Products and Procedures

Section 5.0 Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Products and Procedures
Section 6.0 Anchor Bolt / Dowel Grout Products and Procedures

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 11 of 26
Title: GROUTING
3.7
Temperature
The ambient temperature and the temperature of both the grout and all
elements coming into contact with the grout shall not be less than 10C or
greater than 30C unless specified otherwise by the Manufacturer. All
grout shall be kept at 30C for at least 24 hours following placing unless
specified otherwise by the Manufacturer or this specification. Urethane
grout shall conform to the Manufacturers temperature and curing
requirements.
3.8
Quality Assurance / Control

Quality records shall be compiled and maintained as objective evidence
that products were procured, manufactured, delivered, installed, and
tested in accordance to the project drawings, specifications, applicable
codes, standards, and contract documents.
3.8.1 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)
Prior to proceeding with any grouting work, the Contractor shall
submit to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative, an ITP for approval. These procedures shall define
the documentation and methods that will be employed to assure
that the certifications, examinations and tests and approvals are
accomplished.
The ITP shall identify all Contractor and engineering hold points
required to meet the standards, specifications, Manufacturers
requirements and to ensure contract compliance throughout the
grouting work.
3.8.2 Inspection
The Contractor shall notify Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
Designated Representative at least 24 hours in advance of
intention to place grout.
The Contractor shall not place grout until Trans Mountain Pipeline
L.P.s Designated Representative has inspected foundations,
forms, and methods of mixing, conveying, and placing grout.
Inspection shall cover:
Surface preparation;
Materials and mixing procedures;
Installation procedure;
Curing methods;
Temperature requirements; and

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 12 of 26
Title: GROUTING
All other items deemed necessary by Trans Mountain Pipeline

L.P.s Designated Representative to determine compliance with
the specifications.
3.8.3 Testing and Reporting

All testing and reporting shall be completed by the Contractors preapproved third-party testing firm. The cost of testing both in field
and laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional
cost to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P. Testing and reporting shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
Sampling
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout compressive strength test
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout compressive strength test
The reports for the above testing shall include, but not be limited to:
Date and location of placement and product placed

Sketch and / or placement specifics
Name and signature of certified inspector
Placement temperatures
Mean daily temperature
3.8.4 Voids (Soundness)

The Contractor shall test the completed grouting for voids using
accepted testing methods. The Contractor shall fill any voids found
with Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout or other grout as approved in writing
by Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Engineer.
3.8.5 Rejection of Work
If any grout materials or grout work does not meet the requirements
of this specification, Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated
Representative may reject immediately the affected materials or
work or may request that additional testing be carried out to further
determine the acceptability of the materials or work.
The cost of testing, locating, and filling voids in the grout or rejected
work shall be at no additional cost to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.
3.8.6 Quality Control Records
Quality records shall be legible, identifiable, and traceable to
materials, products, services, and persons involved.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 13 of 26
Title: GROUTING
Upon project completion, the Contractor shall index and submit
their quality documents to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s
Designated Representative. They shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
3.9
4.0
Inspection test Plan. (ITP)

Product technical data
Grouting installation procedures
Approved third-party certification and technicians qualifications
Field and laboratory testing reports
Warranty
The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation and
performance of all grout and grout installations. The Contractor shall
guarantee the grout supplied against defects material and workmanship or
design failure under normal usage, for a period of two (2) calendar years
from the date of the grout being placed in service The Contractor shall
repair or replace, without charge, any grouting found defective within the
guarantee period and reimburse Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P. for any
replacement costs involved in the removal and replacement of the
defective grout.
NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT PRODUCTS AND

PROCEDURES
4.1
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Materials

The Contractor shall supply pre-mixed, pre-proportioned, factorypackaged product consisting of a mixture of cement, sand, and inert
materials:
4.2
Masterflow 928
Sika Grout 212 HP
M-Bed Standard
M-Bed Superflow
Or approved equal
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Product Data

The Contractor shall submit the Manufacturers data including limitations
for use of the proprietary Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout prior to delivery
to the site.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 14 of 26
Title: GROUTING
The Contractor shall submit imported sand and coarse aggregate sieve
analysis to Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative for
approval prior to use (minimum seven (7) working days).
4.3
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout Preparation

4.3.1 Concrete Surfaces
The Contractor shall prepare concrete surfaces as outlined below:
Concrete shall be at least seven (7) days old before surface

preparation
Roughen surface by chipping, bush hammer, or other
mechanical means to a minimum 10 mm roughness profile to
assure bond of grout to concrete
Remove oil soaked concrete, loose, or broken concrete or
concrete with hairline cracks down to solid concrete. Finished
surfaces must be clean, firm, and rough.
Place forms, as needed
Wash surface clean; saturate with water for at least 24 hours
before placement of grout
Just before grouting, remove excess water with clean
compressed air, leaving surface damp; remove water from
anchor bolt sleeves
4.3.2 Metal Surfaces in Contact with Grout

The Contractor shall clean foundation plates to remove dirt, oil,
grease, or loose paint; tightly adhered paint is acceptable.
4.3.3 Foundation and Leveling Plates
The Contractor shall set leveling plates to the proper elevation and
set, align, and firmly anchor foundation plates before grout is
placed.
4.3.4 Formwork
The Contractor shall provide formwork as needed for Non-Shrink
Cementitious Grout as outlined below:
Design forms for repaid, continuous, and complete filling of

space to be grouted
Forms shall be strong, securely anchored, and shored
Design forms to be at least 25 mm clear of base plate or
equipment base; top of form to be at least 25 mm above bottom
of adjacent base plate

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 15 of 26
Title: GROUTING
Forms shall have a 20 mm chamfer strip where a chamfer edge

is required on exposed edges
Install vent holes in areas where air pockets may form during
grouting; minimum diameter 3 mm
Coat forms with form oil or heavy wax to prevent grout
adherence and absorption
Caulk or seal forms to prevent leakage
4.3.5 Control Joints and Reinforcement

The Contractor shall install joints in the grout work as required by
the Manufacturer or on the drawings as outlined below:
Place joints on 1200 mm - 1800 mm centers; extend joints full

depth and full length from form to form
Joint thickness to be 6 mm
Joint material to be closed cell Styrofoam, thick rubber, or wood
strips covered with polyethylene tape
Provide reinforcing bars for pours 100 mm or deeper if shown
on drawings
Consult
Manufacturers
technical
department
for
recommendations for extremely deep pours or extreme
temperature conditions
4.3.6 Anchor Bolts and Sleeves

The Contractor shall clean anchor bolt blockouts and sleeves to
remove deleterious materials.
4.4
Precautions Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout

The Contractor shall take all required precautions to provide the required
performance including, but not limited to, the items outlined below:
4.4.1 Vibrations
Vibrations from nearby operations can be transmitted into
foundations being grouted. These vibrations cause bleeding and
settlements, affect setting time and strength, or create hidden
fracture planes.
The Contractor shall observe surface of a shallow pan of water set
on foundation being grouted to detect vibration.
Shutdown nearby operations if vibrations are detected until grout
has taken final set.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 16 of 26
Title: GROUTING
4.4.2 Minimum and Maximum Grout Lift Placement
The Contractor shall place the grout in lifts, which allow shrinkage
or expansion from the setting of the grout to be minimized. The
minimum and maximum grout lifts placed at any one time shall be
25 mm and 100 mm, respectively, unless authorized in writing by
Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Engineer.
The
Contactor shall provide expansion joints and / or reinforcing bars for
grout pours deeper than 100 mm if shown on the drawings.
4.4.3 Hot and Cold Weather
When placing grout, the temperature of the foundation, base plate,
and grout material shall be within the temperature range
recommended by the Manufacturer and shall be measured with a
surface thermometer.
The Contractor shall refer to the Manufacturers procedures for
temperature limits on installation and curing of the grout.
4.5
Equipment
4.5.1 Grout Mixer
Mortar mixer with moving paddles inside a drum shall be used;
concrete mixer with fins attached to a rotating drum shall not be
used.
4.5.2 Grout Pump
Grout pump shall be a positive displacement type such as
diaphragm or piston pump; screw pump shall not be acceptable.
4.5.3 Clean Mixing Equipment
The Contractor shall clean all mixing equipment and tools to ensure
they are free from water, oil, dirt, grease, grout residue, or other
deleterious substances.
4.6
Mixing Non-Shrink Cementitious Grouts

Mixing of grout shall be as listed below and in compliance with the
Manufacturers recommendation for mixing of Non-Shrink Cementitious
Grouts:
Use a mortar mixer or a wheelbarrow; do not use a concrete mixer

Mix grout adjacent to area being grouted; have sufficient manpower
and equipment to mix and place grout rapidly and continuously

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 17 of 26
Title: GROUTING
4.7
Mixing equipment must be free from oil, dirt, grease, leftover grout, and
other deleterious substances, discard leftover grout from previous
batch
Wash out mixer with clean water. Empty out water, leaving mixer wet
Mix only that quantity of grout that can be placed within the working
time of the grout
Do not add admixtures or ingredients other than those specified or
included with the manufactured grout
Add dry grout components to mixer and dry mix; add pre-measured
amount or potable water to mixer, mix grout for not less than three (3)
minutes nor more than five (5) minutes; place grout immediately.
Placing Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout

Placing of grout shall be as listed below and in compliance with the
manufacturers recommendation for placing of Non-Shrink Cementitious
Grouts:
Grout may be dry-packed, flowed, or pumped into place

Place grout within the working time of the grout; discard grout that is
not placed within working time of grout
Place grout quickly and continuously to avoid segregation, bleeding, or
premature initial set; do not place grout in layers
Place grout from one (1) side of plate to the other to avoid trapping air
Place grout from one (1) long side of equipment base to the other, in
one (1) direction only
If grout must be placed through grout holes, place from one (1) hole
continuously until grout has passed second hole; continue placing
grout from next grout hole in similar fashion
Do not deviate from Minimum and Maximum Grout Lift Placement
limitations noted within Section 4.4.2 of this specification
4.7.1 Placing Flowable Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout

Use moveable head box having an inclined place to direct grout
beneath equipment base in a manner to remove trapped air
bubble formation.
For placing large volumes of grout continuously, use head box
with a minimum of 0.085 m3 (3 ft.3) volume.
Fill head box to top and plunge grout down to top of base plate;
continue until grout rises above bottom of base plate on far side.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 18 of 26
Title: GROUTING
4.7.2 Placing Pumped Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout
Use on large installations and multiple installations; for bases
with shear keys, stiffeners, or other obstructions; for grouting
over great distances; or if venting air is not possible.
Rinse pump, hose, and nozzle with water; wash cleansing plug
through line to ensure it is clear; pump grout slurry through
before starting.
Start grouting at far end of space to be grouted; slowly back out
nozzle so that it is always within the grout to prevent air
entrapment.
Continue placing grout until grout oozes out long entire
perimeter and up through every interior vent hole and grout
hole.
4.7.3 Equipment with Elevated Interior Plate
Grout under entire equipment base to top of exterior plate.
Stop grouting for a short time to allow grout to seal periphery of
exterior plate.
Continue placing grout until grout oozes up through every
interior vent hole and grout hole.
4.7.4 Finishing and Curing Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout
Remove shims (if specified on the drawings) as the grout
becomes capable of supporting the loads with out disturbance.
Just before grout has reached final set, cutback to lower edge of
plate.
A 45 angle cutback is preferred.
Top exposed surfaces shall be steel towelled.
The grout shall be moist cured for a period as per the
Manufacturers recommendations. If required, a suitable curing
and sealing compound shall be applied in accordance with the
Manufacturers recommendations.
Keep temperature of base plate, foundation, and grout between
10C and 32C or as per the Manufacturers recommendation,
for at least 72 hours after placing grout.
4.8
Testing
The Contractor shall field test Non-Shrink Cementitious Grouts. All fieldtesting shall be completed by the pre-approved third-party testing firm.
The field-testing and reports shall include but not be limited to the
following:

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 19 of 26
Title: GROUTING
4.9
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grouts compressive strength test.

Make four (4) test cubes in the field for each batch of grout mixed and
placed; make test cube according to applicable provisions of ASTM
C109.
Cure two (2) cubes in the field for three (3) days in the same way as
the placed grout is cured; after three (3) days transport cubes to testing
lab for compressive strength testing.
Cure remaining two (2) cubes in the field for initial 24 hours in the
same way as the placed grout is cured; after 24 hours transport cubes
to testing lab and moist cure according to applicable provisions of
ASTM C109 until tested.
Do compressive strength tests on cubes according to applicable
provisions of ASTM C109; test field cured cubes at three (3) days; test
lab cured cubes at seven (7) days and at 28 days.
Clean-Up
The Contractor shall remove all formwork, containers, and other items
used in, but not incorporated into this work.
The Contractor shall clean up any spilled or leaked grout to the
satisfaction of Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative.
4.9.1 Reports
The Contractor shall submit written reports on each test as soon as
results are available.
5.0
APPROVED NON-SHRINK EPOXY GROUT PRODUCTS AND

PROCEDURES
5.1
General
The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the Manufacturers instructions,
details on drawings, and specifications for receiving, storing, placing,
curing, and testing of epoxy grout.
5.2
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout Materials

The Contractor shall supply pre-proportioned, factory-packaged product
consisting of specially formulated resin, hardener, and aggregate. If
mixed together, the components form a pourable, 100% solids grout.
Epoxy grout shall be as specified on the design drawings or as follows:
Ceilcote 648 CP
Sikadur 42
Talygrout 100

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 20 of 26
Title: GROUTING
Or approved equal
5.3
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Product Data

The Contractor shall submit the Manufacturers data including limitations
for use of the proprietary Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout prior to delivery to the
site.
5.4
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Preparation

5.4.1 Concrete Surfaces
The Contractor shall prepare concrete surfaces as outlined below:
Concrete shall be at least seven (7) days old before surface

preparation
Roughen surface by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical
means to assure bond of grout to concrete
Remove oil soaked concrete, loose or broken concrete, or
concrete with hairline cracks down to solid concrete. Finished
surfaces must be firm and rough.
Clean surface using dry compressed air or dry brush; remove
debris from anchor bolts sleeves using dry compressed air
Place liquid tight, leak-proof forms for grout
Place control joint and reinforcing under bases, as shown on the
drawings or as specified within the Manufacturers instructions
5.4.2 Metal Surfaces in Contact with Grout

The Contractor shall prepare metal surfaces in contact with the
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout as outlined below:
All surface preparation shall be completed just prior to grouting

Prepare equipment surfaces bearing plates, etc., to be in
contact with Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout in accordance with the
Manufacturers recommendations, unless noted otherwise
5.4.3 Foundation and Leveling Plates

The Contractor shall set and prepare the plates as outlined below:
When bond is not desired between epoxy grout and plates,

apply paste wax to clean plate; allow to dry; buff
Set levelling plates to the proper elevation
Set, align, and firmly anchor foundation plates before grout is
placed

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 21 of 26
Title: GROUTING
Determine need to remove or retain shims subject to the

equipment Manufacturers instructions
For shims, wedges, or blocks to be removed, coat with paste
wax to prevent grout from adhering
For epoxy grouts with a flow greater than 145%, provide 13 mm
minimum clearance below and around plates
For epoxy grouts with a flow less than 145%, provide 25 mm
minimum clearance below and around plates
For grout pours deeper than 100 mm, provide expansion joints
and / or reinforcing bars if shown on the drawings
5.4.4 Formwork
The Contractor shall design and install formwork as outlined:
Design for rapid, continuous, and complete filling of space to be

grouted
Forms shall be strong, securely anchored, and shored
Caulk or seal to prevent grout leakage
Design forms to be at least 25 mm clear of base plate or
equipment base; top of form to be at least 50 mm above bottom
of adjacent base plate or higher, as required to achieve enough
head for grout to flow across width of plate. Use chamfer strip
where chamfered edge is required as per the drawings, or bevel
grind edges after removal of forms and curing.
Install vent holes in areas where air pockets may form during
grouting; minimum diameter 3 mm
Coat forms with paste wax to prevent grout adherences and
absorption
5.4.5 Control Joints and Reinforcement

The Contractor shall install joints in the grout work as required by
the Manufacturer or on the drawings as outlined below:
Place joints on 1200 mm - 1800 mm centers; extend joints full

depth and full length from form to form
Joint thickness to be 6 mm
Joint Material to be closed cell Styrofoam, thick rubber, or wood
strips covered with polyethylene tape
Provide reinforcing bars for pours 100 mm or deeper if shown
on drawings

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 22 of 26
Title: GROUTING
Consult the Manufacturers technical department for

recommendations for extremely deep pours or extreme
temperature conditions
5.4.6 Adjacent Surfaces

The Contractor shall prevent the grout from adhering to unintended
surfaces by applying wax or oil, or protecting with polyethylene
sheeting so that grout splatters or over pour shall not adhere.
5.4.7 Anchor Bolts and Sleeves
The Contractor shall clean anchor bolt blockouts and sleeves with
dry compression air to remove deleterious materials. Anchor bolts
shall be taped within the grout section of the sleeve as specified on
the drawings or equipment installation specifications.
5.5
Precautions Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout

The Contractor shall take all required precautions to provide the required
grout performance including but not limited to the items outlined below:
5.5.1 Vibrations
Vibrations from nearby operations can be transmitted into
foundations being grouted. These vibrations causes bleeding
and settlement, affect setting time and strength, or create
hidden fracture planes.
Observe surface of a shallow pan of water set on foundation
being grouted to detect vibration.
Shutdown nearby operations if vibrations are detected until
grout has taken final set.
5.5.2 Hot and Cold Temperatures
When placing epoxy grout, the temperature of the foundation, base
plate, and grout material shall be within the temperature range
recommended by the Manufacturer and shall be measured with a
surface thermometer.
The Contractor shall check ambient temperature; for temperatures
below 16C or above 32C the Contractor shall refer to the
Manufacturers mixing and placement procedures for cold weather
or hot weather requirements.
In cold weather, temperature of surfaces in contact with grout shall
be at or above 10C or as per the Manufacturers recommendation.
The surface must be kept absolutely dry.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 23 of 26
Title: GROUTING
The Contractor shall in hot weather:
Place grout in the evening or later, when the temperature is

dropping;
Use shading or air conditioning to keep temperatures of base
plates below 32C surface must be kept absolutely dry; and
Protect concrete, steel, and forms from direct sunlight beginning
at least 24 hours before grouting.
5.5.3 Equipment Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout

The Contractor shall use the equipment and methods
recommended by the Manufacturer for the mixing of Non-Shrink
Epoxy Grout.
5.5.4 Clean Mixing Equipment
The Contractor shall clean all mixing equipment and tools to ensure
they are free from water, oil, dirt, grease, grout residue, or other
deleterious substances.
5.6
Mixing
The Contractor shall carefully read the Manufacturers instructions as
supplied with grout before starting. Preparation shall be in accordance
with the Manufacturers instructions and approved installation procedures.
All epoxy grout components shall be conditioned to a temperature range
recommended by the Manufacturer prior to mixing.
The Contractor shall use only the pre-measured components supplied;
solvent shall not be added to change mix consistency.
During hot weather, the Contractor shall allow mixed resin and hardener to
remain without aggregate for more than five (5) minutes.
The Contractor shall mix only that quantity of grout that can be placed
within working time of the grout.
5.6.1 Placing
The grout mix must be of flowable consistency.
The Contractor shall place grout within the working time of the
grout; temperature shall affect working time of epoxy grout; grout
that is not placed within working time of the grout shall be
discarded.
The Contractor shall place grout from one (1) side of plate to the
other to avoid trapping air.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 24 of 26
Title: GROUTING
The Contractor shall place grout from one (1) long side or
equipment base to the other, in one (1) direction only.
If grout must be placed through grout holes, the Contractor shall
place from one (1) hole continuously until grout has passed second
hole; continue placing grout from next grout hole in similar fashion.
The Contractor shall check for leaks constantly and shall seal leaks
immediately to prevent voids.
The use of vibrators is not permitted. The use of steel straps is
permitted to move the grout into position.
Chaining is not permitted.
5.6.2 Flowable Grouting
Use moveable head box having an inclined plane to direct grout
beneath equipment base in a manner to minimize trapped air
and bubble formation.
For placing large volumes of grout continuously the Contractor
shall use head box with minimum 0.085 m3 (3 ft3) volume.
Fill head box to top and plunge grout down to top of base plate
and shall continue until grout rises above bottom of base plate
on far side.
Always keep surface of grout in head box above top of base
plate to prevent trapping air.
Pumping epoxy grout is permitted if so required.
5.6.3 Equipment with elevated Interior Plate
Grout under entire equipment base to top of exterior plate.
Stop grouting for a short time to allow grout to seal periphery of
exterior plate.
Continue placing grout until grout oozes up through every
interior vent hole and grout hole.
5.6.4 Finishing
Remove shims, designed to be removed, as the grout becomes
capable of supporting the loads with out disturbance.
Follow the Manufacturers recommendations for finishing grout
surfaces.
Epoxy grout cannot be trimmed after set, top surfaces may be
trowelled.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 25 of 26
Title: GROUTING
5.6.5 Curing
Cure grout according to the Manufacturers instructions.
Do not moist cure epoxy grout.
Keep forms in place overnight except for fast curing grouts.
Keep temperature of base plate, foundation, and grout between
10C and 32C for at least 24 hours after placing grout.
5.7
Testing
The Contractor shall field test Non-Shrink Epoxy Grouts. All field-testing
shall be completed by the pre-approved third-party testing firm. The fieldtesting and reports shall include but not be limited to the following:
5.8
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grouts compressive strength test

Make four (4) test cubes in the field for each batch of grout mixed and
placed; make test cubes according to applicable provisions of ASTM
C579, Method B.
Cure two (2) cubes in the field for three (3) days in the same way the
placed grout is cured; after three (3) days, transport cubes to testing
lab for compressive strength testing.
Cure remaining two (2) cubes in the field for 24 hours in the same way
the placed grout is cured; after 24 hours, transport cubes to test lab
and condition according to applicable provisions of ASTM C579 until
tested.
Do compressive strength tests on cubes according to applicable
provisions of ASTM C579, Method B; test field cured cubes at three (3)
days; test lab conditioned cubes at seven (7) days and at 28 days.
Clean-Up
The Contractor shall remove all formwork, containers, and other items
used in, but not incorporated into this work.
The Contractor shall clean-up any spilled or leaked grout to the
satisfaction of Trans Mountain Pipeline L.P.s Designated Representative.
5.9
Reports
The Contractor shall submit written reports on each test as soon as results
are available.

TMPSE-CIV-135
Revision 2
August 23, 2007
Page 26 of 26
Title: GROUTING
6.0
PRE-APPROVED ANCHOR BOLT / DOWEL GROUT PRODUCTS AND

PROCEDURES
6.1
Anchor Bolt/Dowel Grout Materials

6.1.1 Anchor Bolt/Dowel Grout
The Contractor shall supply pre-proportioned, factory-packaged
product consisting of specially formulated resin, hardener and filler.
6.2
Brutem MP
Talygrout 100
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mode
Anchor Fix 2
Or approved equal
Anchor Bolt / Dowel Execution

The Contractor shall prepare the surfaces, secure the base plates, provide
formwork, mix, place, finish, test, and cure the anchor bolt or dowel grout
in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations or as outlined in
Section 5.0 of this specification.

A2S2T6 - ETE Project Design - Construction Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A2S2T6 - ETE Project Design - Construction Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND PRACTICES

EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS,

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS ............................................................................ 3

LIMITING ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS ........................................................... 3

COATING SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 3

Topcoat Colours ........................................................................................ 4

SURFACE PREPERATION .................................................................................. 6

Surface Irregularities .................................................................................. 6

Pre-Blast Cleaning ..................................................................................... 6

Blast Cleaning ............................................................................................ 6

Blasting Equipment Grounding .................................................................. 6

Blast Cleaning Abrasive ............................................................................. 7

Surface Contamination .............................................................................. 7

Incomplete Blasting Prior to Priming .......................................................... 7

Coating Contamination .............................................................................. 7

Dead Man Control ...................................................................................... 8

Alternate Cleaning Methods....................................................................... 8

Coating Film Continuity .............................................................................. 8

Wet Film Thickness.................................................................................... 8

Handling or Shipping ................................................................................. 8

Measures for Corroded Surfaces ............................................................... 9

Clean-Up and Disposal .............................................................................. 9

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

Daily Reporting .......................................................................................... 9

Inspection Hold Points ............................................................................... 9

SAFETY DATA SHEETS .................................................................................... 10

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting

Commercial Blast Cleaning

Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

Near White Metal Blast Cleaning

Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

The Manufacturers recommendations for the use of their coatings shall be

LIMITING ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS

The relative humidity is greater than 80%;

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

Bar Rust 231, 235, or 236

Devthane 359, 379, or 389

Intergard 345 or 251

Interthane 990 or 870

Sigmacover CM Miocoat II 7427US

Sigmadur Verafinish 5522

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 4.2.A TRANS MOUNTAIN TOPCOAT COLOURS

Motors and Pumps

Handrails and Kickplates

Piping and Shoes

Valve Actuator and Gear Boxes

Standard Colour Scheme

Valve Actuator and Gear Boxes

Motors and Pumps

Motor and Pump Base

Handrails and Kickplates

Piping and Shoes

KINDER MORGAN CANADA INC.

Title: EXTERNAL COATING OF PIPING, COMPONENTS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

Outside Diameter of Flanges